H01 1 <#FROWN:H01\>Some reporters had difficulty distinguishing in their H01 2 records between parts that should have been included in 'road H01 3 vehicles and parts' or 'other transport equipment' and parts that H01 4 should have been included in other categories. BEA reviewed reports H01 5 with large trade values and, after discussions with reporters, H01 6 revised those with incorrect reporting. However, reports with low H01 7 values were not reviewed, and in some cases, reporters may have H01 8 erroneously included both types of parts in 'road vehicles and H01 9 parts' or 'other transport equipment.' Thus, these two categories H01 10 may be overstated, and other categories, particularly machinery, H01 11 may be understated.

H01 12 Total U.S. trade associated with U.S. parents and their foreign H01 13 affiliates consists of (1) trade between U.S. parents and their H01 14 foreign affiliates, (2) trade between other U.S. persons and H01 15 foreign affiliates, and (3) trade between U.S. parents and H01 16 unaffiliated foreigners. Data on trade between U.S. parents and H01 17 their foreign affiliates were collected on the BE-10A and H01 18 BE-10B(LF) and (SF) forms; on the BE-10A form, total trade of a H01 19 given U.S. parent with all of its foreign affiliates combined was H01 20 reported, while on the BE-10B(LF) and (SF) forms, trade of the U.S. H01 21 parent with only the individual foreign affiliate covered by that H01 22 form was reported. In principle, the sum of a U.S. parent's trade H01 23 with each of its individual foreign affiliates, as reported on the H01 24 BE-10B forms for those affiliates, should equal the parent's total H01 25 trade with all of its affiliates combined, as reported on the H01 26 parent's BE-10A form. In fact, however, the sum of the data from H01 27 the affiliates' BE-10B forms may not equal the total reported on H01 28 their parent's BE-10A form, because of differences in timing and H01 29 valuation and because the parent's BE-10A form may include data for H01 30 affiliates that are exempt from being reported on the BE-10B H01 31 forms.

H01 32 In this publication, the data on trade between parents and H01 33 affiliates used in computing total U.S. trade associated with U.S. H01 34 parents and their foreign affiliates are derived from the H01 35 affiliates' BE-10B forms rather than from the U.S. parents' BE-10A H01 36 forms. (However, the data derived from the parents' BE-10A forms H01 37 are shown as an addendum.) Data on trade between other U.S. persons H01 38 and foreign affiliates are also derived from the affiliates' BE-10B H01 39 forms. However, data on trade between U.S. parents and unaffiliated H01 40 foreigners are from the parents' BE-10A forms.

H01 41 In this publication, BEA is showing, for the first time, H01 42 separate data on U.S. parent trade with foreign parent groups H01 43 (FPG's). A U.S. parent has an FPG if the U.S. parent is, in turn, H01 44 owned 10 percent or more by a foreign person. For a given U.S. H01 45 parent, the FPG consists of (1) the foreign parent of the U.S. H01 46 parent, (2) any foreign person, proceeding up the ownership chain, H01 47 that owns more than 50 percent of the person below it, and (3) any H01 48 foreign person, proceeding down the ownership chain(s) of each of H01 49 these members, that is owned more than 50 percent by the person H01 50 above it.

H01 51 Direct Investment Position and Balance of Payments H01 52 Data

H01 53 Direct investment position and balance of payments data cover H01 54 U.S. parents' positions in, and transactions with, their foreign H01 55 affiliates; in contrast, the direct investment financial and H01 56 operating data, discussed earlier, cover the overall activities of H01 57 the parents and affiliates themselves. For foreign affiliates, the H01 58 data include positions in, and transactions with, them by all H01 59 persons, not just their U.S. parents. The U.S. direct investment H01 60 position abroad is equal to U.S. parents' equity in, and net H01 61 outstanding loans to, their foreign affiliates; foreign affiliates' H01 62 total assets, in contrast, are equal to the sum of (1) total H01 63 owners' equity in affiliates held by both U.S. parents and all H01 64 other persons and (2) total liabilities owed by affiliates to both H01 65 U.S. parents and all other persons. For example, suppose that an H01 66 affiliate is owned 80 percent by its U.S. parent and that the H01 67 affiliate has total owners' equity of $50 million and total H01 68 liabilities of $100 million (including $20 million owed to the H01 69 parent). In this case, the affiliate's total assets would be $150 H01 70 million (total owners' equity of $50 million plus total liabilities H01 71 of $100 million), and the parents' position in the affiliate would H01 72 be $60 million (80 percent of the $50 million of owners' equity H01 73 plus the $20 million of intercompany debt).

H01 74 In the benchmark survey, data for the position and balance of H01 75 payments items were reported in part III of the BE-10B(LF) or (SF) H01 76 (or the BE-10B BANK) forms. The balance of payments items consist H01 77 of transactions between parents and their affiliates and of H01 78 transactions between parents and other persons that change the H01 79 parents' equity in their affiliates. The major items that appear in H01 80 the U.S. balance of payments accounts for U.S. direct investment H01 81 abroad are these:

H01 82 <*_>bullet<*/> Direct investment capital outflows,

H01 83 <*_>bullet<*/> Direct investment income,

H01 84 <*_>bullet<*/> Direct investment royalties and license fees, H01 85 and

H01 86 <*_>bullet<*/> Other direct investment services.

H01 87 It should be noted that there are two types of adjustments made H01 88 to the balance of payments data presented here before the data are H01 89 entered into the U.S. international accounts. First, as noted H01 90 earlier, two of these items - income and capital outflows - are not H01 91 entered into the international accounts at the reported book values H01 92 until they are adjusted to reflect current-period prices.

H01 93 Second, as discussed in the section on fiscal year reporting, H01 94 the direct investment position and balance of payments data H01 95 collected in the 1989 benchmark survey and shown in this H01 96 publication are on a fiscal year basis, whereas the data in the H01 97 U.S. balance of payments accounts and in BEA's annual series on the H01 98 direct investment position are on a calendar year basis. Before H01 99 being incorporated into the balance of payments accounts and the H01 100 series on the position, the data from the 1989 benchmark survey H01 101 will be adjusted to a calendar year basis. These adjusted data for H01 102 1989 will also be extrapolated forward to derive universe estimates H01 103 for subsequent calendar years, based on sample data collected in H01 104 BEA's quarterly surveys for those years. The adjusted 1989 data and H01 105 the extrapolated estimates for calendar years 1990-92 are scheduled H01 106 for publication in the June and August 1993 issues of the H01 107 Survey of Current Business. As noted earlier, BEA also H01 108 plans to revise its balance of payments and direct investment H01 109 position data for 1983-88 to incorporate information from the 1989 H01 110 benchmark survey.

H01 111 The balance of payments data included here differ from data H01 112 from the 1982 benchmark survey because of methodological and H01 113 definitional changes introduced in June 1992 to make BEA's data H01 114 more consistent with the international standards recommended in the H01 115 forthcoming fifth edition of the International Monetary Fund's H01 116 (IMF) Balance of Payments Manual and in the United H01 117 Nations System of National Accounts. These changes include (1) the H01 118 presentation of receipts and payments of income, royalties and H01 119 license fees, and other private services before deduction of H01 120 withholding taxes and (2) the removal of capital gains and losses H01 121 from direct investment income. These and other changes are H01 122 explained in the sections that follow.

H01 123 U.S. direct investment position abroad

H01 124 As noted earlier, the U.S. direct investment position abroad is H01 125 equal to U.S. parents' equity in, and net outstanding loans to, H01 126 their foreign affiliates. The position may be viewed as the U.S. H01 127 parents' contribution to the total assets of their foreign H01 128 affiliates or as financing provided by U.S. parents to their H01 129 affiliates in the form of either equity or debt. The data are H01 130 derived from the foreign affiliates' books at yearend.

H01 131 The direct investment position estimates published here are at H01 132 book value and are not adjusted to current value. Thus, they H01 133 largely reflect prices at the time of investment rather than prices H01 134 of the current period. Because historical cost is the basis used H01 135 for valuation in company accounting records in the United States, H01 136 it is the only basis on which companies can report data in BEA's H01 137 direct investment surveys. It is also the only basis on which H01 138 detailed estimates of the position are available by country, by H01 139 industry, and by account. (Elsewhere, however, BEA does provide H01 140 aggregate estimates of the position valued in current-period H01 141 prices.) For simplicity, all subsequent references to the position H01 142 are to the position on a historical-cost (book-value) basis, unless H01 143 otherwise stated.

H01 144 U.S. parents' equity in incorporated foreign affiliates H01 145 consists of the U.S. parents' holdings of capital stock in, and H01 146 other capital contributions to, their affiliates and U.S. parents' H01 147 equity in the retained earnings of their affiliates. Capital stock H01 148 comprises all stock of affiliates, whether common or preferred, H01 149 voting or nonvoting. Other capital contributions by U.S. parents, H01 150 also referred to as the 'U.S. parents' equity in additional paid-in H01 151 capital,' consists of capital, invested or contributed, that is not H01 152 included in capital stock, such as amounts paid for stock in excess H01 153 of its par or stated value, capitalizations of intercompany H01 154 accounts (conversions of debt to equity) that do not result in the H01 155 issuance of capital stock, and donations. U.S. parents' equity in H01 156 retained earnings is the U.S. parents' shares of the undistributed H01 157 earnings of their incorporated foreign affiliates.

H01 158 For most unincorporated affiliates, U.S. parents' were able to H01 159 provide a breakdown of owners' equity by type. Thus, in tables H01 160 showing U.S. parents' equity in affiliates by type, the parents' H01 161 equity in both incorporated and unincorporated affiliates are shown H01 162 together. For those unincorporated affiliates for which no H01 163 breakdown of owners' equity by type was available, all of the H01 164 parents' equity in the affiliates was included in capital stock H01 165 (which includes additional paid-in capital and capital H01 166 contributions) rather than in retained earnings, because these H01 167 affiliates usually remit all of their earnings to the U.S. parent. H01 168 The U.S. parents' share in total owners' equity (not broken down by H01 169 type) is shown separately for incorporated and unincorporated H01 170 affiliates in addenda to the direct investment position tables.

H01 171 The U.S. parents' net outstanding loans to their foreign H01 172 affiliates, shown in the tables as the affiliates' net intercompany H01 173 debt to U.S. parents, consist of trade accounts and trade notes H01 174 payable, other current liabilities, and long-term debt owed by the H01 175 affiliates to their U.S. parents, net of similar items due to the H01 176 affiliates from their U.S. parents.

H01 177 Intercompany accounts include the value of all capital leases H01 178 and of operating leases of more than 1 year between U.S. parents H01 179 and their foreign affiliates. (Only long-term operating leases are H01 180 included in intercompany accounts to conform to U.S. data on H01 181 merchandise trade, which also exclude shipments under leases for H01 182 periods of 1 year or less.) The value of property so leased to a H01 183 foreign affiliate by its U.S. parent is included in affiliates' H01 184 payables, and the net book value of property so leased by a foreign H01 185 affiliate to its U.S. parent is included in affiliates' H01 186 receivables. Capital leases recognize that title to the leased H01 187 property will usually be transferred to the lessee at the H01 188 termination of the lease - similar to an installment sale. H01 189 Operating leases have a term significantly shorter than the H01 190 expected useful life of the tangible property being leased, and H01 191 there is usually an expectation that the leased property will be H01 192 returned to the lessor at the termination of the lease. For capital H01 193 leases, the net book value of the leased property is calculated H01 194 according to GAAP. Under GAAP, the lessee records either the H01 195 present value of the future lease payments or the fair market H01 196 value, whichever is lower; the lessor records the sum of all future H01 197 lease receipts. For operating leases of more than 1 year, the value H01 198 is the original cost of the leased property less accumulated H01 199 depreciation.

H01 200 For bank affiliates, the direct investment position is defined H01 201 to include only their parents' permanent debt and equity investment H01 202 in them; similarly, the direct investment flows that enter the U.S. H01 203 balance of payments accounts for these affiliates include only H01 204 transactions related to such permanent investment. All other H01 205 transactions and positions - mainly claims and liabilities arising H01 206 from the parents' and affiliates' normal banking business - are H01 207 excluded from the direct investment accounts because they are H01 208 included with other banking claims and liabilities in the portfolio H01 209 investment accounts. The definition of permanent investment may H01 210 vary somewhat from bank to bank. Examples of such investment are H01 211 funds from parents that are used to establish or acquire the H01 212 affiliates or that finance the affiliates' purchases of property, H01 213 plant, and equipment.

H01 214 H02 1 <#FROWN:H02\>CHAPTER I

H02 2 INTRODUCTION

H02 3 Members of the Kentucky General Assembly were not surprised H02 4 when the 101st U.S. Congress, in its closing days, placed stringent H02 5 new controls on the burning of coal by electric utilities. H02 6 Proposals to control acid deposition, commonly referred to as acid H02 7 rain, were introduced in Congress as early as 1981. From 1982 until H02 8 1990, interim committees of the Kentucky General Assembly studied H02 9 congressional proposals to control acid rain and communicated H02 10 regularly with the state's congressional delegation on the issue. H02 11 Recognizing that Congressional action was close at hand, the 1990 H02 12 General Assembly enacted Senate Concurrent Resolution 73 on March H02 13 29, 1990. Senate Concurrent Resolution 73 directed an interim H02 14 legislative committee, the Energy Task Force, to study the H02 15 potential impacts of federal acid rain legislation in Kentucky's H02 16 economy and to develop a strategy for addressing those impacts.

H02 17 On November 15, 1990, the President of the United States signed H02 18 into law S.1630, the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990, Public Law H02 19 101-5491. Title IV of the Act contains the acid rain H02 20 legislation.

H02 21 Acid rain forms when fossil fuel combustion from electric power H02 22 plants, industrial boilers, and motor vehicles release pollutants, H02 23 primarily sulfur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides H02 24 (NOx), into the atmosphere. Reacting with the H02 25 SO2 moisture in the atmosphere, and NOx H02 26 emissions are converted into sulfuric and nitric acids, H02 27 respectively. The acidic materials, which may be carried long H02 28 distances by wind, are released back into the atmosphere or are H02 29 deposited on the ground in the form of rain, fog, snow, gas, or dry H02 30 particles. Acid rain, in certain concentrations and under certain H02 31 conditions, can damage forests, lakes, streams, aquatic life, H02 32 buildings, and monuments, and cause human respiratory problems.

H02 33 According to a national inventory completed in 1985, electric H02 34 utilities were responsible for 69% of SO2 emissions in H02 35 the United States, with most of those emissions created by coal H02 36 combustion. The transportation sector was identified as the largest H02 37 source <}_><-|>catetgory<+|>category<}/> for NOx H02 38 emissions, 43% of the total. Electric utilities were responsible H02 39 for 32% of NOx emissions. Fairly early in the process, H02 40 proposals to tackle the acid rain issue narrowed to one source: H02 41 fossil-fueled electric power plants.

H02 42 Although the Clean Air Act, prior to the 1990 Amendments, did H02 43 no specifically address acid rain formations, it did require H02 44 certain controls on SO2 and NOx for industrial H02 45 power facilities, as well as electric utility power plants. H02 46 However, as the phenomenon of acid rain was recognized and concern H02 47 over the effects of acid rain grew in the 1980's, controls in the H02 48 existing law were viewed as inadequate and support for increased H02 49 controls grew, leading to the inclusion of Title IV acid rain H02 50 provisions in the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments.

H02 51 The acid rain issue provoked much argument among the states and H02 52 between the U.S. and Canada. Canada and the northeastern states H02 53 initiated the congressional acid rain battle, claiming that their H02 54 forested areas and lakes were suffering from the long-range H02 55 transport of acid rain originating in the midwest.

H02 56 Once it became clear that acid rain legislation would target H02 57 emissions from coal-burning electric utilities, the congressional H02 58 proposals pitted states with high-sulfur coal reserves against H02 59 states with low-sulfur coal reserves. The mid-western states of H02 60 Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, which have high-sulfur coal, favored H02 61 proposals to require installation of pollution control equipment on H02 62 all existing coal-fired utility units. States with low-sulfur coal, H02 63 such as Wyoming and Montana, pushed for proposals to give affected H02 64 utilities more options for reducing sulfur emissions, including H02 65 switching to their low-sulfur coal. States with utilities targeted H02 66 for the largest SO2 reductions, again, primarily H02 67 midwestern states, argued for cost-sharing provisions where H02 68 all electric consumers, nationwide, would be subject to a tax to be H02 69 used to subsidize the cost of the acid rain controls. The regional H02 70 battles still continue, months after the signing of the Clean Air H02 71 Act Amendments, as the rules for implementation are being H02 72 developed.

H02 73 Kentucky, as one of the nation's largest coal-producing states, H02 74 with large reserves of high-sulfur coal in the west and H02 75 low-to-medium sulfur coal in the east, was in a particularly H02 76 difficult position during congressional deliberations. Proposals H02 77 which favored one of the state's coalfields were not always H02 78 favorable to the other coalfield.

H02 79 The state was one of the early supporters of clean coal H02 80 technology development, contributing over $10 million for H02 81 construction of the atmospheric fluidized bed combustion project at H02 82 the Tennessee Valley Authority's Shawnee plant near Paducah. And H02 83 much support did exist within the state and the General Assembly H02 84 for the position that Congress should not act on the issue without H02 85 sound scientific knowledge of the benefits and costs of new acid H02 86 rain control. To gain this knowledge the federal government H02 87 embarked in 1980 on one of the largest research projects of its H02 88 kind ever undertaken, the National Acid Precipitation Assessment H02 89 Program (NAPAP). The project took over ten years and $600 million H02 90 to complete and involved the efforts of over 1000 scientists in the H02 91 United States, Canada, and Great Britain.

H02 92 Ironically, the fiscal assessment by the NAPAP project was not H02 93 available to either the Senate or House of Representatives as each H02 94 chamber passed their initial version of the Clean Air Act H02 95 Amendments. A draft of the report surfaced just a month prior to H02 96 final action by a conference committee but had little effect on the H02 97 legislative process. The final NAPAP report raises serious H02 98 questions as to whether the costs of the new acid rain controls H02 99 outweigh the benefits NAPAP was able to identify.

H02 100 The final bill gives utilities flexibility in making H02 101 SO2 and NOx reductions. Pollution control H02 102 equipment is not mandated and no cost-sharing provisions are H02 103 included.

H02 104 Task Force Activity

H02 105 Soon after the President signed the Clean Air Act Amendments of H02 106 1990, hereafter referred to as the CAAAs, the Interim Energy Task H02 107 Force began its work on Senate Concurrent Resolution 73. In H02 108 November 1990, a subcommittee of the Energy Task Force met with H02 109 researchers at the University of Kentucky's Center for Applied H02 110 Energy Research and reviewed the center's current coal research. H02 111 Also that same month the Energy Task Force received its first H02 112 briefing on the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 from state H02 113 officials in the Natural Resources and Environmental Protection H02 114 Cabinet and the Governor's Office for Coal and Energy Policy.

H02 115 In January 1991, when the General Assembly reorganized several H02 116 House and Senate committees, the Energy Task Force's jurisdiction H02 117 was broadened to include tourism and the name was changed to the H02 118 Tourism Development and Energy Task Force. Because of the 1991 H02 119 Extraordinary Session of the General Assembly, the new task force H02 120 did not meet during the first three months of 1991. At its April H02 121 meeting, the Tourism Development and Energy Task Force established H02 122 the Subcommittee on Energy and assigned the subcommittee the task H02 123 of completing the Senate Concurrent Resolution 73 study on acid H02 124 rain legislation.

H02 125 The subcommittee devoted most of the remainder of the interim H02 126 to the study, hearing testimony from coal producers and coal H02 127 miners, from electric utilities in the state, and from various H02 128 state agencies which will be involved in implementation of the acid H02 129 rain legislation. On November 12, 1991, the Tourism Development and H02 130 Energy Task Force completed its work on SCR 73, with the receipt of H02 131 the subcommittee's report and adoption of recommendations.

H02 132 Review of Chapters

H02 133 This report is the final product by the Tourism Development and H02 134 Energy Task Force on Senate Concurrent Resolution 73. Chapter II H02 135 describes the federal acid rain legislation, including an H02 136 SO2 emissions trading system, and discusses the various H02 137 compliance options available to affected utilities. Chapter III H02 138 presents coal mining trends in this state, as well as factors which H02 139 affect national coal markets. Chapter IV is an analysis, based on a H02 140 computer model simulation, of the effects of the federal H02 141 legislation on the state's economy. Chapter V presents all issues H02 142 identified by the various participants of the study process, and H02 143 the final chapter presents the task force's findings and H02 144 recommendations.

H02 145 Future Review

H02 146 As the Tourism Development and Energy Task Force worked on this H02 147 issue, through its subcommittee, it quickly became apparent that H02 148 the task force's work is preliminary. Title IV of the Clean Air Act H02 149 Amendments of 1990 - as well as the entire act - is a very H02 150 complicated piece of legislation, a product of much political H02 151 compromise. The emissions trading system is experimental; there is H02 152 uncertainty as to how or indeed whether the experiment will work. H02 153 Congress left many of the implementation details up to the U.S. H02 154 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), which has not yet worked out H02 155 many of those details. Utilities are now formulating compliance H02 156 plans without the final rules; the task force completed its work H02 157 under similar uncertainties. As recommended by the task force, the H02 158 General Assembly, through its interim committee system, will need H02 159 to continue to monitor implementation of Title IV of the Clean Air H02 160 Act Amendments of 1990.

H02 161 CHAPTER II

H02 162 CLEAN AIR AMENDMENTS OF 1990: ACID RAIN PROVISIONS

H02 163 When President Bush signed S.1630 into law on November 15, H02 164 1990, a major overhaul of the nation's air pollution law was set H02 165 into motion. The Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (CAAAs) are the H02 166 first amendments to the Clean Air Act since 1977 and the first H02 167 major environmental law of the 1990s. The amendments will require H02 168 as many as 175 regulations. The CAAAs, which include 11 titles, H02 169 tighten air standards to control acid rain, urban air pollution, H02 170 and toxic air pollution. The legislation sets out a new permitting H02 171 program, strengthens enforcement efforts, and mandates additional H02 172 clean air research. This chapter summarizes the acid rain H02 173 provisions of the CAAAs and explores the various ways affected H02 174 entities may comply.

H02 175 Title IV, the acid rain title, mandates that by the year 2000, H02 176 utilities' overall SO2 emissions will be ten million tons H02 177 less than they were in 1980. Nitrogen oxide emissions are to be two H02 178 million tons less than they were in 1980. Reductions of H02 179 SO2 and NOx will be accomplished in two phases. H02 180 The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) will administer the H02 181 first phase; states with approved permit programs will administer H02 182 the second phase. Whereas there will be no fees for permits in the H02 183 first phase, there will be a permit emission fee in Phase II, H02 184 which, in most states, will run $25.00 per ton of emissions. All H02 185 affected units are required to install continuous emission monitors H02 186 to record the levels of SO2 and NOx emitted at H02 187 specific time intervals.

H02 188 Utility generating units larger than 25 megawatts will, at some H02 189 point, become an affected source. Cogeneration facilities, H02 190 facilitites that produce both electricity and process heat from the H02 191 same source, are exempt if they produce less than one-third of H02 192 their electric output for use by a utility.

H02 193 Sulfur Dioxide Reductions

H02 194 Title IV's SO2 reduction provisions represent a H02 195 radical departure form federal emissions control programs of the H02 196 past. A permanent annual sulfur emissions cap for electric utility H02 197 plants is set at 8.95 million tons for the year 2000 and each year H02 198 thereafter. This represents approximately a 50% reduction in H02 199 SO2 emissions. No absolute caps on sulfur emissions are H02 200 to be set for individual utilities. Instead the sulfur reductions H02 201 will be accomplished through a market-based emissions allowance H02 202 trading system. The underlying goal of the SO2 provisions H02 203 is to allow each utility flexibility to choose the most H02 204 cost-effective way to make SO2 reductions.

H02 205 Affected units are to be given set allowances to emit H02 206 SO2. One allowance will permit an affected source to emit H02 207 one ton of SO2 during or after a specified calendar year. H02 208 The allowances can be traded within the utility's own system, H02 209 banked for future use, or sold on the open market. Utilities which H02 210 exceed their emissions allowance and do not obtain any additional H02 211 allowances to cover their deficit will be fined $2000 per excess H02 212 ton and will be required to offset the excess tons the following H02 213 year. However, regardless of the number of allowances an affected H02 214 source may hold, previously existing SO2 air quality H02 215 standards must still be met. For example, units which come under H02 216 the New Source Performance Standard of 1977 will not be permitted H02 217 to exceed their current SO2 emission rate of 1.2 pounds H02 218 per million Btus.

H02 219 H03 1 <#FROWN:H03\>Although we are here to discuss the subject matter H03 2 in a broad nature, I want you to know that I support H.R. 1502, H03 3 which is the Violence Against Women Act.

H03 4 I have a special interest in the provisions relating to H03 5 domestic violence and, in fact, offered an amendment to the crime H03 6 bill that incorporated part of Mrs. Boxer's bill last session. As a H03 7 former prosecutor, I know firsthand how difficult it is for women H03 8 to come forward in domestic violence cases.

H03 9 I am sad to report that today a battered woman stands a better H03 10 chance in the courts if her assailant is a stranger. The undeniable H03 11 fact is that if the husband or partner is the assailant her H03 12 complaint is often dismissed as a domestic squabble or a private H03 13 matter between husband and wife. Until very recently, battery H03 14 almost never resulted in arrest.

H03 15 Why is it that battered women who eventually kill their H03 16 husbands in self-defense receive on an average double the sentence H03 17 that men who murder their wives receive. I believe we in Congress H03 18 have a responsibility to recognize domestic violence for what it H03 19 is; and that is, it is a crime. Those guilty of domestic violence H03 20 crimes must be held accountable for their actions and punished H03 21 under the law.

H03 22 We must work to change the perception that domestic violence is H03 23 a family matter. We can begin by passing laws that will give our H03 24 Nation's police officers, judges, and prosecutors the tools H03 25 necessary to treat these types of offenses in the same way as any H03 26 other crime. In addition, victims of domestic violence who are H03 27 often terrified to come forward need assurances and, indeed, should H03 28 be guaranteed that the system will help them and not work against H03 29 them.

H03 30 Sadly, Mr. Chairman, the problem of violence against women goes H03 31 well beyond the disturbing trends in domestic violence. In today's H03 32 violent culture, it seems as though every woman has reason to fear. H03 33 In fact, the Department of Justice's calculations that three out of H03 34 four American women could expect to be victims of at least one H03 35 violent crime in their lifetime is, as astounding as it is, H03 36 unacceptable. Also unacceptable is the FBI statistic indicating H03 37 that rapes have increased four times as fast as the general crime H03 38 rate during the past decade, and Mrs. Boxer's bill suggests H03 39 proposals in those areas as well.

H03 40 I look forward to hearing the testimony this morning and thank H03 41 you again, Mr. Chairman, for scheduling this hearing.

H03 42 Mr. SCHUMER. Thank you, Mr. Sangmeister.

H03 43 Mr. Gekas.

H03 44 Mr. GEKAS. I thank the Chair, and I too welcome Senator Biden H03 45 and Congresswoman Boxer and Congresswoman Morella to this H03 46 hearing.

H03 47 For a long time, I had been laboring under the false impression H03 48 that we had made great strides in the arena of victimization of H03 49 women. In my own State and elsewhere, even in the Federal H03 50 establishment, we began to develop recognition of groups that would H03 51 be honing in on these various individual problems, like rape H03 52 crisis, and other domestic violence entities that really had a H03 53 firsthand, hands-on knowledge of the series of problems that we are H03 54 encountering in this field, and I was feeling rather smug about it H03 55 until this last couple of years when the headlines began to scream H03 56 all over the country with a renewed, shall we say, outbreak of H03 57 visible incidents involving the victimization of women. So when H03 58 Senator Dole and Congresswoman Molinari and I got together to do H03 59 our version of a women victims' rights bill, I was eager to renew H03 60 my own interest in this field and in preventing such H03 61 victimizations.

H03 62 We have shield laws, we have increased penalties, we have even H03 63 the inclusion of rape-murder in the death penalty provisions H03 64 pending, so we are continuously cognizant of the problem. But, a H03 65 sweeping change in the attitudes of our citizens and in our law H03 66 enforcement, and in those of us who have the responsibility of H03 67 crafting new laws, still remains with us. That is why I am eager to H03 68 proceed with listening to our colleagues and in hearing hard H03 69 testimony for our consideration.

H03 70 Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

H03 71 Mr. SCHUMER. Thank you, Mr. Gekas.

H03 72 Congressman Washington.

H03 73 Mr. WASHINGTON. Thank you for recognizing me, Mr. Chairman. I H03 74 don't have a prepared statement, but I would like to say that I H03 75 have always felt that leadership was defined by, or at least the H03 76 qualities of leadership were essentially defined by those who had H03 77 the courage to step forward and to recognize a problem and do what H03 78 was right. I am therefore not at all surprised that Senator Biden H03 79 and Congresswomen Boxer and Morella, all of whom I respect and H03 80 admire very much, have taken the leadership on this issue. So I H03 81 look forward to hearing their testimony, and I am happy to be an H03 82 original cosponsor of H.R. 1502, and I hope that we can find a way H03 83 to make all the provisions that are required in order to beef up H03 84 our law to make all our citizens understand that there is no H03 85 difference between violence committed against women and violence H03 86 committed against others. In fact, if there were to be a H03 87 distinction, I think we would look on it with more abhorrence than H03 88 violence committed against men, but that would sound chauvinistic H03 89 on the other end.

H03 90 At any rate, I look forward to hearing all the testimony. I H03 91 have had the opportunity to read over the testimony of the H03 92 witnesses last evening, a lot of which brought tears to my eyes. I H03 93 want to hear it again, and I want us to move forward on this H03 94 legislation. I want us to get it on the floor and get it passed and H03 95 over to the President's desk as soon as possible.

H03 96 Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

H03 97 Mr. SCHUMER. Thank you, Mr. Washington.

H03 98 Mr. Ramstad.

H03 99 Mr. RAMSTAD. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

H03 100 I, too, thank you for holding this important hearing today. As H03 101 we all know, far too many women in our neighborhoods are battered, H03 102 far too many women on our college campuses are raped, and I might H03 103 add to Mr. Sensenbrenner's comment that the most recent national H03 104 study corroborates the University of Minnesota study, which was a H03 105 local study done in my State, that, in fact, one of four college H03 106 women during her 4-year college career is the victim of either H03 107 attempted rape or an actual rape, a full-fledged sexual assault, H03 108 and, as we all know, far too many women are denied justice.

H03 109 On top of all that, we know that these crimes are vastly H03 110 underreported. The same study I just cited shows that, once again, H03 111 fewer than 10 percent of all sexual assaults in this country are H03 112 reported.

H03 113 In Minnesota alone, with a population of just over 4 million H03 114 people, further research indicates there may be over 400,000 H03 115 battered women, yet 41 of our 87 counties do not have battered H03 116 women's programs. In some counties, a battered woman's nearest H03 117 option for emergency safety is over 100 miles away. In the Twin H03 118 Cities metropolitan area, part of which I represent, more than H03 119 two-thirds of women seeking safe shelter from domestic violence are H03 120 turned away due to lack of space.

H03 121 Clearly, Mr. Chairman, the Federal Government must step in to H03 122 buttress State efforts to prevent violence against women, to H03 123 prosecute their attackers, and to provide victims shelter and much H03 124 needed treatment.

H03 125 Mr. Chairman, I am particularly pleased today that we will H03 126 receive testimony from Jenny Katzoff, who was the victim of sexual H03 127 assault as a 1st-year college student and whose allegations of rape H03 128 were grossly mishandled by a number of different college officials. H03 129 As Jenny knows, we tried but just weren't able to get her out to H03 130 Minnesota to testify at a recent field hearing that Congresswoman H03 131 Molinari, Congresswoman Penny, and I conducted last September on H03 132 the issue of campus sexual assault. Thus, I am very pleased that we H03 133 will be able to hear from her today.

H03 134 I am also grateful that Senator Biden and our distinguished H03 135 colleagues, Congresswomen Boxer and Morella, are here today. H03 136 Senator Biden and I introduced the Campus Sexual Assault Victims H03 137 Bill of Rights Act, H.R. 2363 and S. 1287, last year. This H03 138 legislation, which now has 165 cosponsors in the House, complements H03 139 the Violence Against Women Act which I was proud to cosponsor.

H03 140 H.R. 2363, the campus sexual assault victims bill, would H03 141 protect campus rape victims by requiring university and college H03 142 officials to make victims aware of their legal rights and assist H03 143 them in bringing allegations of sexual assault before the criminal H03 144 justice system. Our bill also protects victims who choose to go H03 145 through campus disciplinary proceedings. But the choice should be H03 146 with the victim.

H03 147 Jenny's tragic story shows exactly why we must enact both the H03 148 Violence Against Women Act and the Campus Sexual Assault Victims' H03 149 Bill of Rights Act. Senator Biden and Congresswomen Boxer and H03 150 Morella obviously recognize this as they are sponsors of both, H03 151 Senator Biden being the principal sponsor of both of these bills in H03 152 the Senate, and Congresswomen Boxer and Morella are cosponsors. We H03 153 must work to prevent rape as well as ensure that rape survivors are H03 154 not traumatized a second time because justice is denied them.

H03 155 Mr. Chairman, I think this will be one of the most important H03 156 hearings that we will hold this year, and I thank you again for H03 157 your leadership in this area.

H03 158 Mr. SCHUMER. Thank you, Mr. Ramstad.

H03 159 Now let us go on to our first panel. If the witnesses don't H03 160 mind, I would like to ask Connie Morella maybe to join us because H03 161 she not only has her legislation but she is the second sponsor of H03 162 the bill after Congresswoman Boxer for the Violence Against Women H03 163 Act.

H03 164 So, Connie, you are welcome to join us and maybe say a few H03 165 words after Joe and Barbara.

H03 166 As our first panel of witnesses today, I am pleased to welcome H03 167 two - three now - very distinguished Members of Congress: Senator H03 168 Joe Biden of Delaware, Representative Barbara Boxer from the Sixth H03 169 District of California, and Representative Connie Morella from the H03 170 Eighth District of Maryland.

H03 171 Senator Biden and Representative Boxer and Representative H03 172 Morella have been leaders in combating violence against women. H03 173 Senator Biden introduced the Violence Against Women Act, S. 15, H03 174 which was reported favorably by the Senate Judiciary Committee, and H03 175 Representatives Boxer and Morella have introduced the Violence H03 176 Against Women Act, H.R. 1502, here in the House. All three have H03 177 been real leaders on this issue, being the beacon for not only the H03 178 Congress but for the country in helping us all recognize not only H03 179 how serious the problem is but how hidden it has been for so H03 180 long.

H03 181 I want to thank all of you for coming, commend you for your H03 182 efforts, and turn over the floor to you.

H03 183 Senator Biden, again, it is an honor for you to be here, and H03 184 you may proceed. We are doing it in alphabetical order. It is not H03 185 because you are a Senator or a man.

H03 186 STATEMENT OF HON. JOSEPH BIDEN, A SENATOR IN CONGRESS FROM THE H03 187 STATE OF DELAWARE

H03 188 Mr. BIDEN. Thank you, Mr. Chairman. Thank you very much. Let me H03 189 begin by thanking my colleagues on my left and right for their H03 190 leadership. Quite frankly, it is not only their leadership in H03 191 drafting and pushing this legislation, but also their standing that H03 192 has given this legislation the kind of credibility that it H03 193 otherwise might not have had. The mere fact that my friend, Barbara H03 194 Boxer, immediately indicated an interest in perfecting this H03 195 legislation and introducing it gave it a legitimacy - and I mean H03 196 this sincerely - that I was not capable of giving it by the mere H03 197 fact of drafting parts of it on the Senate side. I want to thank H03 198 both my colleagues for their work.

H03 199 As you know, Mr. Chairman - you and I have worked together on a H03 200 lot of crime issues - I try not to beat around the bush. I am not H03 201 going to take your time by going through each part of this H03 202 legislation - it has a number of titles. H03 203 H04 1 <#FROWN:H04\>Chapter III

H04 2 ASSESSMENT OF HIGHWAY NEEDS

H04 3 The Task Force to Study Highway Needs held public hearings in H04 4 all twelve highway districts. These hearings assisted the Task H04 5 Force in identifying projects being proposed by the Department of H04 6 Highways' personnel and the local elected officials of the H04 7 district.

H04 8 The intent of the Task Force was to identify those corridors H04 9 which would have the greatest impact on a region. The Task Force H04 10 defines corridor as a major route through Kentucky or a route which H04 11 connects a rural area to its regional center or another corridor. H04 12 While the Task Force recognizes the needs for storage lanes, local H04 13 connector roads, curve realignments and other types of local H04 14 improvement projects, priority was given to establishing a system H04 15 of roads which would allow each region better access to larger H04 16 markets of the area. The state's philosophy of road building, the H04 17 Task Force believes, should continue to emphasize connecting the H04 18 rural areas to the urban markets.

H04 19 The finding of the Task Force is that the 1990-1996 highway H04 20 construction proposal is the best starting point for the future of H04 21 road building in Kentucky and these identified needs should be H04 22 addressed prior to the introduction of other needs.

H04 23 The information obtained through the hearing process, coupled H04 24 with an examination of the highway accessibility of every county in H04 25 Kentucky, allowed the Task Force to develop its strategic highway H04 26 corridor system. The highway corridor system includes the existing H04 27 limited access system, key US routes, and other corridors which H04 28 need upgrading to four lanes.

H04 29 The following discussion is the strategic corridor system H04 30 identified by the Task Force to Study Highway Needs. The first H04 31 segment is a list of highways which currently provide adequate H04 32 access to the Commonwealth. Following that list is a discussion of H04 33 highways which the Task Force identified as needing improvement in H04 34 order to provide access to all regions of the Commonwealth.

H04 35 Adequate Corridors

H04 36 The following routes have been determined to provide adequate H04 37 accessibility, with the exception of minor reconstruction and H04 38 improvements which will maintain the functional integrity of the H04 39 existing system. For example, several interstate routes need H04 40 additional lanes and these improvements are critical to the highway H04 41 network. In addition, many of the proposed corridors will connect H04 42 to the routes presented in this section.

H04 43 East to West Corridors

H04 44 Interstate 64

H04 45 Mountain Parkway from I-64 to Campton

H04 46 Bluegrass Parkway

H04 47 Western Kentucky Parkway

H04 48 Cumberland Parkway

H04 49 Interstate24

H04 50 Audubon Parkway

H04 51 North to South Corridors

H04 52 Interstate 75

H04 53 Interstate 65

H04 54 Green River Parkway

H04 55 Pennyrile Parkway

H04 56 Purchase Parkway

H04 57 Interstate 71

H04 58 Circumferential Corridors

H04 59 Interstate 264

H04 60 Interstate 265

H04 61 Interstate 275

H04 62 KY 922, KY 4, US 25

H04 63 The Task Force is defining an adequate corridor as an existing H04 64 facility of four or more lanes. Despite this categorization, some H04 65 of these corridors will need reconstruction in order to maintain H04 66 their functional value. The improvements for those purposes are H04 67 estimated by the Department of Highways to be $2,230,400,000.

H04 68 Corridors Needing Development

H04 69 The routes which follow are projects for which the Task Force H04 70 is recommending improvement. The Task Force recommends that each H04 71 route be designed as a four-lane facility; however, it realizes H04 72 that initial reconstruction as quality two-lane routes may be a H04 73 desirable goal.

H04 74 The discussion of each route will provide the rationale for H04 75 project inclusion, points of interest along each route and a cost H04 76 estimate provided by the Department of Highways.

H04 77 U.S. 23

H04 78 U.S. 23 is the major north to south corridor in eastern H04 79 Kentucky. It enters the state at South Shore, Kentucky and exits at H04 80 Jenkins, Kentucky. Its route intersects with major east to west H04 81 corridors including I-64, KY 114 (connects to Mountain Parkway), KY H04 82 80, and U.S. 119. This corridor is the major route in eastern H04 83 Kentucky and serves to connect the region with the larger markets H04 84 in all directions.

H04 85 Completion of the segments of U.S. 23, as authorized by the H04 86 1990 road bond issue projects, was emphasized at public hearings in H04 87 Districts 9 and 12. The entire length of this route will be H04 88 four-lane upon completion. Points of interest along this route H04 89 include: Paintsville Lake State Park, Jenny Wiley State Resort H04 90 Park, Fishtrap Lake, and Dewey Lake.

H04 91 This route will complete U.S. 23 as a four-lane facility from H04 92 monies allocated by the 1990 bond issue and federal highway H04 93 development funds. For that reason, no cost estimate is H04 94 included.

H04 95 U.S. 25E

H04 96 U.S. 25E connects with I-75 at Corbin and extends southeast to H04 97 Middlesboro and into Tennessee. Points of interest along this route H04 98 include: Pine Mountain State Resort Park, Kentucky Ridge State H04 99 Forest, and Cumberland Gap National Historical Park.

H04 100 Two segments of U.S. 25E are currently under construction. A H04 101 section south of Barbourville to Pineville is being funded by the H04 102 1990 bond issue. A second project is the Cumberland Gap tunnel H04 103 project just south of Pineville. Upon completion of this project, H04 104 U.S. 25E will be a four-lane facility. For that reason no cost H04 105 estimate is included.

H04 106 U.S. 127

H04 107 U.S. 127 is a north to south corridor entering the state at H04 108 Newport and extending south to Static, at the Kentucky line, and on H04 109 into Tennessee. The current bond issue will provide major H04 110 reconstruction along this route. In addition, U.S. 127 will provide H04 111 access to I-64, the Bluegrass Parkway and the Cumberland Parkway. H04 112 Points of interest along this route include: Buckley Hills Wildlife H04 113 Sanctuary, Old Harrod State Park, Isaac Shelby State Historic H04 114 Shrine, Constitution Square, Herrington Lake, Lake Cumberland, and H04 115 Dale Hollow Lake.

H04 116 The 1990 bond issue included several sections of U.S. 127 for H04 117 improvements. The six-year road plan included $105,977,000 in H04 118 projects for the U.S. 127 corridor. In addition, $79,000,000 was H04 119 cited in long range needs for U.S. 127.

H04 120 US 119

H04 121 US 119 enters Kentucky at South Williamson and traverses the H04 122 southeast border of Kentucky, intersecting US 25E at Pineville. The H04 123 route joins US 23 at Pikeville; therefore, the segment from Dorton H04 124 to Jenkins is incorporated into the current bond issue, as is a H04 125 section of US 119 over Pine Mountain to Letcher County.

H04 126 The improvements of US 119 can be divided into two distinct H04 127 sections: the section between South Williamson and Pikeville and H04 128 the section between Pineville and Jenkins. The section between H04 129 South Williamson and Pikeville was identified by the local H04 130 officials at the District 12 hearing as a major need. The two-lane H04 131 section traverses two mountains and its narrow curvy nature makes H04 132 it hazardous. Improvement to the section would also extend a H04 133 multi-lane road into a previously isolated area of Pike County, H04 134 allowing easier access to I-77 in West Virginia, opening the area H04 135 to eastern markets.

H04 136 US 119 from Pineville to Jenkins crosses Letcher, Harlan, and H04 137 Bell Counties. These counties have been established as being at H04 138 least 25 miles away from an existing continuous four-lane highway. H04 139 This project was also identified at the District 11 public hearing H04 140 as a major corridor need for the region. The counties which will H04 141 directly benefit from this improvement have the following H04 142 unemployment and per capita income figures:

H04 143 table

H04 144 Development of US 119 would give this region an east to west H04 145 route which would provide greater access to the US 23 corridor in H04 146 Eastern Kentucky, and the US 25E corridor, which accesses H04 147 Interstate 75. These connections would provide access to major H04 148 markets in the northeast and southeast. A segment of this route was H04 149 placed in the 1990 road bond issue. The estimated cost of the H04 150 remaining portion of the project is $782,780,000.

H04 151 US 460

H04 152 The section of US 460 from Pikeville to the Kentucky-Virginia H04 153 line is identified as a corridor which needs development. H04 154 Improvement to this corridor was mentioned at the public hearing in H04 155 District 12. The justification provided was improving tourist H04 156 access to Fishtrap Lake and the Breaks Interstate Park.

H04 157 A construction project in this area would also improve access H04 158 to an isolated area of Pike County. The county has an unemployment H04 159 rate in excess of 9% and a per capita income of approximately H04 160 $10,000, which is about $3,000 less than the statewide average.

H04 161 US 460 would connect at Grundy, Virginia, and eventually would H04 162 access Interstate 77 at Princeton, West Virginia, to the east. The H04 163 west connection at Pikeville would connect US 23, which is a major H04 164 north-south corridor in the Eastern United States. US 23 connects H04 165 with Interstate 64 in northern Kentucky, and the nearest interstate H04 166 connection to the south is Interstate 77. The estimated cost of H04 167 this project is $150,000,000.

H04 168 The Mountain Parkway and KY 114

H04 169 The segment of this corridor needing improvement is from H04 170 Campton to Prestonsburg. The parkway's four-lane section currently H04 171 stops at Campton and continues as a two-lane route from H04 172 Salyersville to Prestonsburg, with truck climbing lanes to H04 173 Salyersville, where it connects with KY 114. KY 114 is a two-lane H04 174 route which connects with US 23. The counties directly benefiting H04 175 from this project are Wolfe, Magoffin, and Floyd.

H04 176 The extension of the Mountain Parkway was cited as a need at H04 177 the public hearings in Districts 10 and 12. A concern mentioned at H04 178 these hearings was that the completion of US 23 would allow easier H04 179 access to out-of-state markets by the populace in this area. The H04 180 parkway has long provided Eastern Kentucky a connection to H04 181 Lexington as a retail center, but the lack of improvement to this H04 182 route could change the habits of consumers, especially with the H04 183 completion of improvements on US 23. Magoffin and Floyd Counties H04 184 are both at least 25 miles from an existing four-lane facility. An H04 185 improved east to west feeder in this area would connect north/south H04 186 corridors at both ends. The west connection is Interstate 64 at H04 187 Winchester, just 16 miles from the Interstate 75 junction. The east H04 188 connection is US 23, which has been mentioned previously.

H04 189 Wolfe, Magoffin and Floyd Counties have unemployment rates H04 190 between 9% and 15% and per capita income ranging from $7,000 to H04 191 $9,500. Both Wolfe and Magoffin counties have unemployment rates H04 192 about twice the statewide average. State Parks along this route H04 193 include Natural Bridge State Resort Park and Red River Gorge. The H04 194 estimated cost of this project is $350,000,000.

H04 195 KY 15

H04 196 KY 15 traverses Wolfe, Breathitt, Perry, and Letcher Counties. H04 197 Improvement to this corridor would provide easier access in these H04 198 counties to the Mountain Parkway and US 119 south of Whitesburg.

H04 199 This improvement was cited as a need in the public hearing in H04 200 District 10 and, as a corridor, need by the Economic Development H04 201 Cabinet. Breathitt, Perry and Letcher Counties are all at least 25 H04 202 miles from a continuous four-lane highway. The unemployment rate is H04 203 approximately 9% in each county and the per capita income is about H04 204 $9,000.

H04 205 Breathitt County is one of the counties previously identified H04 206 as a county with only Kentucky routes. Buckhorn Late State Resort H04 207 Park is located along this corridor. The estimated cost of this H04 208 project is $473,700,000.

H04 209 KY 7

H04 210 KY 7 was identified as having potential regional significance H04 211 at the public hearing in District 9. This route is a north to south H04 212 corridor which crosses one of the most economically depressed H04 213 <}_><-|>area<+|>areas<}/> in Kentucky. The proposed improvement H04 214 would connect KY 7 to Interstate 64 in Carter County and the H04 215 Mountain Parkway at Salyersville. The counties receiving direct H04 216 benefit from this corridor improvement are Carter, Elliott, Morgan, H04 217 and Magoffin. Grayson Lake State Park lies along this corridor.

H04 218 Morgan and Magoffin Counties are 25 miles from a continuous H04 219 four-lane highway and the major route in Elliott County is KY 7. H04 220 The following economic data reveal problems associated with this H04 221 area.

H04 222 table&caption

H04 223 KY 11

H04 224 KY 11 was identified as a need at the District 10 meeting. This H04 225 route is a north to south corridor which connects at the Slade exit H04 226 on the Mountain Parkway and runs south to just east of Manchester H04 227 on the Daniel Boone Parkway. This corridor has been upgraded from H04 228 Slade to Beattyville. Counties receiving direct benefit from H04 229 improvement to the remaining segment of KY 11 include Lee, Owsley, H04 230 and Clay.

H04 231 Lee and Owsley Counties are areas which have been previously H04 232 identified as having only Kentucky routes. Owsley and Clay Counties H04 233 are both outside of the 25-mile criterion. These counties can also H04 234 be identified as depressed areas by the following data:

H04 235 table&caption

H04 236 US 421

H04 237 US 421 is a major highway in the network of interstate H04 238 connectors. H04 239 H05 1 <#FROWN:H05\>Second, financial factors could also have a H05 2 bearing on a decision about whether to appropriate. In particular, H05 3 a concern that an uncured default on a bond issued by one authority H05 4 might cause financial markets to increase the costs of issuance or H05 5 lower the rating assigned to subsequent bonds of other state debt H05 6 authorities could lead the General Assembly to appropriate funds to H05 7 cure the default. Finally, even in the absence of any legal and H05 8 financial consequences of a default, political factors could be H05 9 such that legislators have little choice but to appropriate H05 10 funds.

H05 11 Thus, the purpose of the research is to identify the likely H05 12 legal, financial and political consequences of a default of the H05 13 various state debt authorities. Because the research issues are H05 14 complex and because little prior research addresses the issues, H05 15 five distinct research methods were utilized.

H05 16 Legal Research

H05 17 First, legal research was conducted by an LRC staff attorney to H05 18 determine whether current law contains any provision that could be H05 19 used to require the General Assembly to appropriate funds in the H05 20 event of a default by any of the state debt authorities. The H05 21 results of the legal research are presented in Chapter II.

H05 22 Case Studies

H05 23 The second approach was to conduct case studies of past H05 24 defaults of bonds issued by state debt authorities in other states. H05 25 Since the late 1970's, the Bond Investor's Association (BIA) has H05 26 tracked defaults of corporate and municipal bonds. At the request H05 27 of LRC staff, BIA searched their on-line database for the years H05 28 1980-1990 and identified 71 defaults of bonds issued by state debt H05 29 authorities, in twenty states. Staff conducted a telephone H05 30 interview with the ranking legislative staff (or a designee) having H05 31 knowledge of state debt management issues in each of those states. H05 32 The interview questionnaire (Appendix A) was intended to elicit H05 33 information regarding the legal, financial and political H05 34 consequences of each default for the state legislature, and to H05 35 identify any actions the legislature considered in response to the H05 36 default. These case studies are presented in Chapter III.

H05 37 Expert Opinions

H05 38 The third piece of the research utilized a technique known as H05 39 the 'Adelphi technique,' whereby a small number of experts in a H05 40 particular field are asked their opinions concerning the issues H05 41 under study. To this end, a random sample of listings was drawn H05 42 from the Bond Buyer's Municipal Marketplace and a survey H05 43 questionnaire was sent to each selected listing. The survey H05 44 instrument (Appendix B) contained open-ended questions concerning H05 45 what financial consequences the respondents perceived from the 71 H05 46 actual defaults identified in the BIA search. They were also asked H05 47 for opinions regarding expected consequences from a H05 48 hypothetical default of any of the active Kentucky state debt H05 49 authorities. A summary of the survey responses is presented in H05 50 Chapter IV and copies of the complete responses are contained in H05 51 Appendix C.

H05 52 Periodical Search

H05 53 A fourth research activity was a search of newspaper and H05 54 periodical indexes for articles relating to defaults of state debt H05 55 authorities. There were two aspects to this research. First, a H05 56 search was conducted for articles and editorials pertaining to the H05 57 particular defaults examined in the case studies. The purpose here H05 58 was to see if the press had extensively covered the default and H05 59 had, perhaps as a reflection of public opinion, called for state H05 60 action to cure the default. The results of the search pertaining to H05 61 the existing defaults are reported in the summary of each case H05 62 study.

H05 63 A second search of indexes focused on the more general topic of H05 64 municipal bond defaults. Specific attention was given to H05 65 identifying recent articles in the national financial press which H05 66 discussed issues pertinent to market expectations about municipal H05 67 defaults. In particular, staff reviewed all 1990 and 1991 issues of H05 68 MuniWeek, a national news weekly devoted to the municipal bond H05 69 market, to identify relevant articles. Articles obtained in the H05 70 second search are discussed in Chapter IV.

H05 71 Statistical Analysis

H05 72 Staff believed that concerns about possible financial H05 73 consequences of a default would be a major factor in any H05 74 legislative decision to appropriate funds. However, the previously H05 75 outlined research relied on individual perceptions of market H05 76 responses to a default, rather than on actual assessments of market H05 77 responses. Therefore, the final piece of the research represents an H05 78 attempt to determine whether the defaults identified in the case H05 79 studies had a statistically significant effect on the cost of H05 80 subsequent issues of state debt authorities. Staff obtained data on H05 81 bonds issued from 1980-1989 by the debt authorities of all 50 H05 82 states, for either public projects or industrial development H05 83 projects. Variables were incorporated to control for the effect of H05 84 other factors, such as project type, the condition of the state's H05 85 economy, the amount of state debt-outstanding and the general level H05 86 of interest rates in the economy. A regression analysis was H05 87 conducted to assess the amount of variation in interest costs which H05 88 could be attributed to the existence of a prior state default. A H05 89 full description of the statistical research and a discussion of H05 90 the results are presented in Chapter V.

H05 91 Chapter VI presents a summary assessment of the various H05 92 research pieces. The chapter also includes staff recommendations H05 93 regarding changes the General Assembly may want to consider in its H05 94 oversight of the Commonwealth's state debt-issuing authorities.

H05 95 Current Oversight of State Debt Authorities

H05 96 Like most states, Kentucky has long issued bonds to pay for H05 97 major capital projects. Similar to a mortgage, a bond is a promise H05 98 to pay principal and interest in the future in return for money H05 99 borrowed to fund a project for current use. In a mortgage loan, the H05 100 house stands as collateral for the loan. If the borrower fails to H05 101 repay the loan as promised, the lender is allowed to take H05 102 possession of the house.

H05 103 However, in the case of state borrowing, it would be difficult H05 104 for bondholders to take possession of a road or the state capitol H05 105 building. So rather than pledging the project as collateral for the H05 106 bonds, traditional practice has been for states to pledge the 'full H05 107 faith and credit' of the state for bond retirement. Bonds which H05 108 pledge the full faith and credit of a government issuer are called H05 109 general obligation bonds. With such bonds, if the H05 110 government fails to make the regularly scheduled debt service H05 111 payments, bondholders may go to court and force the government to H05 112 do whatever is necessary, including raise taxes, to make the H05 113 promised principal and interest payments. A special or limited H05 114 obligation bond is one that pledges only certain tax or other H05 115 receipts as collateral for the bond. An example is the pledging of H05 116 the receipts of a motor fuels tax to retire a bond used to build a H05 117 highway. State bonds have usually been issued with a repayment H05 118 schedule (or term) of 20-40 years. A bond is said to H05 119 mature when the final scheduled debt service payment is made H05 120 and the state's obligation to bondholders is discharged. The key H05 121 point to note about general or special obligation bonds is that if, H05 122 at any time before the maturity date, the state does not make its H05 123 regularly scheduled debt service payment (or defaults on the H05 124 bond), bondholders may have the court enforce the obligation and H05 125 require the state to raise taxes to make debt service payments.

H05 126 Sections 49 and 50 of the Kentucky Constitution stipulate that, H05 127 before the state can issue debt in excess of $500,000, the issuance H05 128 must be approved by the majority of voters in a referendum H05 129 election. This requirement applies to all state general and limited H05 130 obligation bonds, which are issued by the State Treasurer. Kentucky H05 131 issued its last bond subject to referendum vote in 1966.

H05 132 Section 157 of the Constitution prevents units of local H05 133 government from issuing any debt without prior approval of H05 134 two-thirds of those voting in a referendum election. Section 158 H05 135 limits total indebtedness of local governments to various H05 136 percentages of the value of taxable property. Section 159 limits H05 137 local debt to a term of no more than 40 years. The last Kentucky H05 138 local government general obligation bond was issued in 1982.

H05 139 Revenue bonds pledge only the particular revenues H05 140 generated by a project as collateral on the bonds issued to fund H05 141 the project. The traditional use of revenue bonds is for the H05 142 provision of government services which generate fees, such as H05 143 utilities. Revenue bonds issued for fee-supported government H05 144 services are often called special revenue bonds, to H05 145 differentiate them from revenue bonds issued for private purposes. H05 146 Government issuance of private-purpose revenue bonds arose H05 147 primarily because the interest earnings on bonds issued by state H05 148 and local governments (called municipal bonds) are exempt H05 149 from federal taxes and, usually, from the taxes of the state in H05 150 which the bonds are issued. This means that lenders will charge a H05 151 lower rate of interest for the tax-free bonds than they do for a H05 152 bond which carries taxable interest earnings. State and local H05 153 governments are able to provide an interest subsidy to local firms H05 154 or individuals by issuing a tax-free municipal bond and loaning the H05 155 proceeds to the firm or individuals. The loan repayments of the H05 156 firm (or individuals) to the issuing government are the only H05 157 collateral pledged by the government to secure the bonds. Such H05 158 revenue bonds are also known as pass-through or conduit H05 159 bonds because the issuing government merely acts as a H05 160 go-between for the private borrower and the lenders. Because of the H05 161 limited collateral offered for revenue bonds, they carry a higher H05 162 interest cost than general obligation bonds issued by the same H05 163 government. However, even that higher cost is usually lower than H05 164 the interest cost a private borrower could obtain on a bond with H05 165 taxable interest earnings.

H05 166 Since 1966, the proceeds of state revenue bonds have also been H05 167 used to fund all of the various types of public projects which had H05 168 previously been funded through the use of general obligation bonds. H05 169 The usual practice is as follows. The state creates an independent H05 170 debt-issuing authority, which is defined to be a municipal H05 171 corporation of the state, so it can issue tax-exempt bonds, but H05 172 which is not defined to be a part of state government, so it is not H05 173 subject to the Constitutional restrictions on debt issuance. The H05 174 authority issues a revenue bond and uses the proceeds to fund a H05 175 public project desired by the state. The authority then leases the H05 176 project to the state for an amount equal to that necessary to fund H05 177 debt service payments. When the bond is retired, ownership of the H05 178 project is transferred to the state. The biennial lease payments of H05 179 the state to the authority are the only 'revenue' pledged to secure H05 180 the bonds. These bonds are called lease rental bonds.

H05 181 Even though lease rental bonds are issued for public purpose H05 182 projects and are supported by appropriations of the General H05 183 Assembly, the Kentucky Supreme Court has held that they do not H05 184 represent a debt of the Commonwealth and are not, therefore, H05 185 subject to the Constitutional restrictions. This is because the H05 186 General Assembly is not required to renew a lease with the H05 187 independent authority beyond the current biennium. Since future H05 188 General Assemblies are in no way legally obligated to make the H05 189 lease payments, the lease agreement does not constitute state debt. H05 190 (See Chapter II for a more thorough discussion of these legal H05 191 issues.)

H05 192 The Commonwealth currently has seventeen independent entities H05 193 with outstanding state revenue debt, including the eight state H05 194 universities. The entities are listed in Figure 2. Figure 3 H05 195 displays various characteristics of the state debt entities.

H05 196 Although the Supreme Court makes no legal distinction H05 197 between appropriation-supported revenue bonds and H05 198 non-appropriation-supported revenue bonds, state officials have H05 199 made a clear distinction in oversight of the two kinds of state H05 200 debt. According to staff of the Office of Financial Management and H05 201 Economic Analysis (OFMEA), except in two special cases, the State H05 202 Property and Buildings Commission and the Kentucky Turnpike H05 203 Authority issue all state appropriation-supported debt. Both H05 204 authorities issue only appropriation-supported debt. As one special H05 205 case, state universities issue consolidated education bonds and H05 206 housing and dining bonds, which are supported by appropriations H05 207 from restricted agency funds derived from university receipts. In H05 208 the second special case, the Kentucky Infrastructure Authority H05 209 (KIA) issues appropriation-supported bonds for the following H05 210 programs:

H05 211 Fund A: Federally Assisted Wastewater Revolving Loan Fund

H05 212 Fund B: Infrastructure Revolving Loan Fund

H05 213 Fund B1: Kentucky Drinking Water Grant Fund

H05 214 Fund B2: Kentucky Drinking Water Loan Fund

H05 215 Fund E: Solid Waste Revolving Loan Fund

H05 216 H06 1 <#FROWN:H06\>Because such research depends on costly and H06 2 specialized equipment, funding for ships and associated sampling H06 3 tools is a limiting factor (NSB, 1989).

H06 4 The importance of marine biodiversity is almost as vast as the H06 5 oceans themselves. Much of the Earth's human population depends on H06 6 the oceans, especially marine coastal systems, for food. In the H06 7 developing nations, more than half of the population obtains at H06 8 least 40 percent of its animal protein from fish (WRI, 1986). Some H06 9 9,000 species of fish are currently exploited for food, although H06 10 only 22 are harvested in significant quantities on a global scale H06 11 (WRI, 1987). Approximately 80 percent of the marine species of H06 12 commercial importance occur within 200 miles of a coast. Marine H06 13 flora and fauna are also extensively used in the production of H06 14 antibiotics and other pharmaceuticals, food additives and H06 15 processing agents, and a variety of manufactured goods.

H06 16 Above and beyond these commodity values, marine organisms are H06 17 critical determinants of the structure and function of the global H06 18 ecosystem. Marine phytoplankton, for example, are the foundation of H06 19 marine food chains and play an important role in atmospheric H06 20 dynamics. The interactions among marine biota, the Earth's H06 21 geochemical cycles, and global climate change are just coming to H06 22 light, and even our most advanced computer models have been able to H06 23 offer only the roughest approximations of the feedback mechanisms H06 24 involved in the maintenance of biospheric conditions. The study of H06 25 marine biodiversity is thus critical to understanding environmental H06 26 dynamics on the global, as well as on local and regional, H06 27 scales.

H06 28 Interest in the conservation of marine biodiversity is a H06 29 relatively recent phenomenon. The immensity that makes oceans such H06 30 a challenge to study has also made it possible to believe that H06 31 anthropogenic disturbances would remain limited in their H06 32 environmental impact. Compared to terrestrial environments, oceans H06 33 provide relatively stable, extensive, open, well-buffered habitats H06 34 for the organisms that inhabit them. Nonetheless, the threats to H06 35 marine diversity are much the same as on land: habitat destruction H06 36 (especially in coastal, estuarine, wetland, and coral reef H06 37 systems); pollution (including suspended sediments, nutrients, and H06 38 toxics); overexploitation of harvestable species (including fish, H06 39 shellfish, turtles, and mammalian species); and the specter of H06 40 global climate change with all its attendant marine impacts H06 41 (Soul<*_>e-acute<*/>, 1991; Thorne-Miller and Cantena, 1991).

H06 42 Although the biota of oceans has been protected from many of H06 43 these impacts by the extent of the medium itself, environmental H06 44 stresses can be expected to place the same pressures on marine H06 45 systems that they are placing on terrestrial systems. So little is H06 46 known about marine biota that rates of extinction are difficult to H06 47 estimate. Ray (1988), however, suggests that the degradation of H06 48 coastal zones is occurring as rapidly as tropical forest H06 49 destruction, and recent findings indicate that coral reefs may be H06 50 among those communities most seriously imperiled by human H06 51 activities (Salvat, 1987; Guzman, 1991). As in terrestrial systems, H06 52 inventories and ecological studies are needed for all oceans, with H06 53 special emphasis on those habitats most immediately threatened.

H06 54 This brief review does not reflect the full status of H06 55 scientific knowledge with regard to specific taxa, geographic H06 56 areas, ecosystems, or habitats, and only touches on genetic-level H06 57 diversity and the vitally important relationship between ecosystem H06 58 dynamics and diversity. As we seek the means to slow or reverse the H06 59 losses, we will have to secure increased support for established H06 60 scientific efforts in systematics and resource management, and for H06 61 relatively new scientific endeavors in such integrative, applied H06 62 fields as sustainable agriculture, conservation biology, and H06 63 restoration ecology. We face an unprecedented situation that H06 64 demands new combinations of the basic and applied sciences, the H06 65 expertise of specialists and the vision of generalists, conceptual H06 66 clarity as well as concrete experience. The science of biological H06 67 diversity and its conservation demands not only more knowledge but H06 68 new kinds of knowledge, and new ways of synthesizing what we H06 69 know.

H06 70 IMPLICATIONS FOR DEVELOPMENT AGENCIES

H06 71 Biological diversity reaches its highest levels, and faces its H06 72 greatest risks, in the developing nations of the world, primarily H06 73 because of intensive resource exploitation and the extensive H06 74 alteration of habitats. This is due in part, however, to H06 75 international markets, development policies, and lending practices H06 76 that transfer financial resources from developing countries to H06 77 industrial countries and undermine the capacity of developing H06 78 countries to sustainably manage their resources.

H06 79 Rapid population growth, extreme and persistent poverty, social H06 80 inequity, institutional breakdown, and perverse policy incentives H06 81 have brought unstable economic conditions to many developing H06 82 nations. In response, many of these countries have had to adopt H06 83 short-term development agendas and exploitative resource management H06 84 practices aimed at increasing foreign exchange earnings from their H06 85 undiversified economies. Trade in elephant ivory (mostly illegal) H06 86 and tropical timber (legal) provides obvious examples that have H06 87 important consequences for the maintenance of biodiversity, but H06 88 other less publicized practices - overgrazing of ranges, expansion H06 89 of cash crop agriculture, intensified shifting cultivation - also H06 90 lead directly to the demise of species and habitats.

H06 91 As a result of these interrelated social, economic, and H06 92 environmental trends, many developing countries have begun to H06 93 question the sustainability of current resource management H06 94 practices and look for more promising alternatives. The policies H06 95 and funding practices of international development agencies, if H06 96 directed toward wise, long-term commitments of assistance, can aid H06 97 in this by affording developing countries greater economic H06 98 stability and hence greater national capacity to preserve H06 99 biological diversity. In the past, development agencies have funded H06 100 infrastructural development activities, agricultural expansion H06 101 programs, dams, and other large-scale projects that have H06 102 contributed directly to the loss of biological diversity, while H06 103 doing little to ease the indirect causes of resource decline (NSB, H06 104 1989). A new vision is necessary at all levels of the development H06 105 community - one that recognizes the inextricably connected fate of H06 106 human communities and the biotic community, of development and H06 107 conservation.

H06 108 Biological diversity is, in the most literal sense, the basis H06 109 of sustainable development and resource management. By conserving H06 110 biodiversity, we retain not only plants and animals, soils and H06 111 waters, but the foundations of sustainable societies and the H06 112 availability of options for future generations. Fuelwood gathering, H06 113 to cite just one example, is a significant contributing factor H06 114 behind the rising rates of deforestation in many parts of the H06 115 tropics. A billion and half people in developing countries depend H06 116 on firewood as their major fuel source. In many areas, expanding H06 117 demand and declining local supplies have led to excessive harvest H06 118 rates, and acute fuelwood shortages, and subsequent decline in soil H06 119 and water resources. Developing renewable, cost-effective H06 120 alternative energy sources, sustainable agroforestry systems, and H06 121 more productive sources of firewood, charcoal, and timber will H06 122 require greater attention to potentially useful species and genetic H06 123 resources (NRC, 1991a).

H06 124 Biodiversity, in short, must come to be seen as an inherently H06 125 important aspect of every nation's heritage and as a productive, H06 126 sustainable resource upon which we all depend for our present and H06 127 future welfare. The conservation of biological diversity is not H06 128 merely an obscure, hitherto neglected area of endeavor whose H06 129 importance has only now been discovered; rather, it is a H06 130 fundamental concern that has been absent in short-term development H06 131 planning, at the risk of long-term social and economic H06 132 well-being.

H06 133 Responding to Research Needs

H06 134 In both the developing and the developed nations, immediate H06 135 action needs to be taken to protect biodiversity. At the same time, H06 136 there is a continuing need for research on biodiversity that H06 137 improves our knowledge base and our management capacities, and H06 138 leads to the development of new ways for people to live with, and H06 139 not at the expense of, their biological resources.

H06 140 It is unlikely that poor countries will be able to support H06 141 major biodiversity research enterprises, however important, in the H06 142 near future. If global environmental and scientific objectives are H06 143 to be served, more effective means for north-south transfers of H06 144 funding must be found, and more productive mechanisms for H06 145 scientific collaboration must be invented (NSB, 1989). The H06 146 international development agencies are essential in this regard. H06 147 Other organizations are unlikely or unable to provide the necessary H06 148 funds. In the long run, this assistance will allow developing H06 149 nations to move toward greater independence by strengthening H06 150 in-country research institutions. As their research capacity H06 151 increases, so too will their ability to chart their own course of H06 152 sustainable development.

H06 153 As they seek to meet these growing research needs, development H06 154 agencies will themselves have to undertake institutional changes. H06 155 Research on biological diversity is necessarily broad based and H06 156 multidisciplinary, and the administration of research within the H06 157 agencies must reflect this. Overlapping areas of biology, including H06 158 ecology, sustainable agriculture, and conservation biology, are H06 159 critically important in addressing the needs of developing H06 160 countries and must be given greater support. More support must also H06 161 be given to research that integrates economics, the social H06 162 sciences, and biodiversity conservation. Above all, research must H06 163 be carried out largely by people in and of the countries H06 164 involved.

H06 165 Long-term institutional commitment is necessary. Support for H06 166 these changes must be incorporated wherever possible into the human H06 167 resource development programs of technical assistance agencies. All H06 168 personnel should be given training in biodiversity science and H06 169 policy. More personnel with the requisite background knowledge must H06 170 be brought into the agencies on a permanent basis and given H06 171 adequate specific training, as well as opportunities to remain up H06 172 to date on research in their fields. Although development and H06 173 science agencies can play a leading role in promoting these H06 174 efforts, their work must involve agencies, institutions, and H06 175 organizations that have not traditionally taken part in H06 176 conservation activities. Finally, development agencies must have a H06 177 'built-in' capacity to review outcomes, monitor practices, and H06 178 recommend adjustments in policies that affect the status of H06 179 biological diversity.

H06 180 Several development agency research programs have begun to H06 181 reflect these needs. The U.S. Agency for International Development, H06 182 for example, provides funds for innovative research on biodiversity H06 183 under its Program of Scientific and Technical Cooperation (PSTC) H06 184 and its Sustainable Agriculture and Natural Resource Management H06 185 (SANREM) Collaborative Research Support Program. Support for this H06 186 kind of research should be expanded and strengthened. Agencies will H06 187 need to find creative ways to sustain funding for these endeavors H06 188 over many years, even indefinitely. National biological H06 189 inventories, for example, could well be funded by pooling the H06 190 resources of all international assistance agencies functioning H06 191 within a given country.

H06 192 The research agenda outlined in the remainder of this report is H06 193 intended to assist development agencies in their efforts to respond H06 194 to these research needs. Research cannot, in and of itself, H06 195 conserve biodiversity in developing nations any more than it can in H06 196 the developed nations. What research can do, however, is provide H06 197 the people and the leaders of these nations with information that H06 198 may help them to improve their lives, while securing the biological H06 199 legacy on which their livelihood depends.

H06 200 Biological Aspects Of Conservation

H06 201 In the past, national and international development agencies H06 202 have seldom relied on - or called for - basic information on H06 203 biological diversity. This can no longer be the case. Many H06 204 development projects include a significant natural resource H06 205 component and thus require sober analysis of their environmental H06 206 impacts. More broadly, international agencies and resource and H06 207 planning ministries in developing countries need information about H06 208 biological diversity to formulate development plans and specific H06 209 projects that are both successful and sustainable.

H06 210 Pertinent information on biological diversity in most H06 211 developing countries is too sparse or scattered to be of practical H06 212 use. Often it is unavailable altogether. A good deal of 'gray' H06 213 literature exists - unpublished reports, files in government H06 214 archives, studies of limited distribution. The most important of H06 215 these should be analyzed and made more accessible. In general, H06 216 however, the required information can be gathered and disseminated H06 217 only through systematic efforts to strengthen the entire research H06 218 process.

H06 219 Development agencies need to know which kinds of research are H06 220 of greatest relevance as they assist client governments and develop H06 221 the rationale to secure funding for this research. A large and H06 222 growing body of literature describes conservation strategies H06 223 appropriate to different species, ecosystems, and regions in H06 224 developing countries. This includes journals such as H06 225 Biotropica, Biological Conservation, and H06 226 Conservation Biology. Recent agendas, involving a range H06 227 of basic and applied research needs, can be found in Research H06 228 Priorities in Conservation Biology (Soul<*_>e-acute<*/> and H06 229 Kohm, 1989); From Genes to Ecosystems: A Research Agenda For H06 230 Biodiversity (Solbrig, 1991); and The Sustainable H06 231 Biosphere Initiative: An Ecological Research Agenda (ESA, H06 232 1991). Subsequent chapters of this report focus on the H06 233 socioeconomic and cultural aspects of biodiversity research in H06 234 developing countries. H06 235 H06 236 H07 1 <#FROWN:H07\>Mission Statement

H07 2 The mission of the Metropolitan Water District of Southern H07 3 California is to provide its service area with adequate and H07 4 reliable supplies of high-quality water to meet present and future H07 5 needs in an environmentally and economically responsible way.

H07 6 Foreword H07 7 Incorporated in 1928, the Metropolitan Water District of H07 8 Southern California provides a supplemental water supply for H07 9 Southern California's coastal plain. Municipal and industrial H07 10 demands account for approximately 92 percent of the water supplied H07 11 by Metropolitan with the remaining 8 percent being used for H07 12 agricultural purposes and the prevention of seawater intrusion into H07 13 coastal groundwater basins. Metropolitan currently supplies more H07 14 than half of the water used within its service area, and is H07 15 expected to deliver nearly all of the anticipated increase in H07 16 future demand.

H07 17 Metropolitan's service area encompasses 5,200 square miles, H07 18 consisting of 27 member agencies, composed of 14 individual cities, H07 19 12 municipal water districts, and a county water authority. This H07 20 area extends for about 200 miles along the Pacific Ocean, from H07 21 Oxnard to the Mexican border, and inland in some places for about H07 22 70 miles into six counties: San Diego, San Bernardino, Riverside, H07 23 Orange, Los Angeles, and Ventura. The distribution system utilizes H07 24 775 miles of pipeline, five filtration plants, eight reservoirs, H07 25 numerous regulating structures, 350 service connections, and H07 26 includes 14 hydroelectric power recovery plants. Metropolitan's H07 27 member agencies (or their subagencies) subsequently deliver the H07 28 water to homes, industries, and agricultural users.

H07 29 Water for Southern California is supplied by the State Water H07 30 Project, operated by the California Department of Water Resources, H07 31 and by the Colorado River Aqueduct, built and operated by H07 32 Metropolitan. Water from the State Water Project is transported H07 33 from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta through the central valley H07 34 via the Governor Edmund G. Brown California Aqueduct to Southern H07 35 California. It is introduced into Metropolitan's distribution H07 36 system through State Water Project's West Branch from Castaic Lake H07 37 in the Santa Clarita Valley, and through the State Water Project's H07 38 East Branch from Silverwood Lake in the San Bernardino Mountains. H07 39 East Branch water flows through several points into the H07 40 distribution system: the Rialto Pipeline below Devil Canyon Power H07 41 Plant, the Box Springs Feeder Junction Structure, the Perris Bypass H07 42 Pipeline, or directly from Lake Perris.

H07 43 The Colorado Aqueduct spans 242 miles of desert terrain and H07 44 mountain ranges between its Lake Havasu intake and its terminal H07 45 reservoir, Lake Mathews, near Riverside. Five pumping plants lift H07 46 the Colorado River Water a total of 1,617 feet, taking it over H07 47 several mountain ranges and into Metropolitan's service area. H07 48 Whitsett Intake Pumping Plant on the western shore of Lake Havasu H07 49 lifts water 291 feet to Gene Wash Reservoir located two miles H07 50 inland. Gene Pumping Plant raises the water an additional 303 feet H07 51 to Copper Basin Reservoir, the aqueduct's major flow control point. H07 52 The water then flows by gravity approximately 63 miles to the Iron H07 53 Mountain Pumping Plant where it is elevated 144 feet through the H07 54 Iron Mountains. After flowing another 45 miles, the water reaches H07 55 Eagle Mountain Pumping Plant where it is lifted 438 feet. Following H07 56 a 16-mile gravity flow, the water arrives at the Julian Hinds H07 57 Pumping Plant. This final lift of 441 feet brings the water to an H07 58 elevation of 1,807 feet, adequate for flow by gravity the remaining H07 59 116 miles to Lake Mathews. Completed in 1941, the Colorado River H07 60 Aqueduct was designed to accommodate an eight-pump flow of 1,605 H07 61 cubic feet per second (cfs), but will convey flows 15 percent H07 62 higher due to the massive pump rehabilitation project which was H07 63 designed to ensure dependable delivery of Metropolitan's allocation H07 64 of 487,000 acre-feet, as well as more than 800,000 acre-feet of H07 65 surplus Colorado River water, when available.

H07 66 The Colorado River Aqueduct Pump Rehabilitation Project H07 67 resulted from a 1985 evaluation of the pumping units which had been H07 68 installed as part of the original Colorado River Aqueduct H07 69 construction. The evaluation revealed that the pumping units were H07 70 nearing the end of their useful life and needed to be H07 71 rehabilitated. The rehabilitation project started in 1988; work was H07 72 divided into phases and completion is scheduled for 1993. This H07 73 project is distinct from normal operating requirements and H07 74 maintenance schedules.

H07 75 Organization

H07 76 Office of General Manager

H07 77 The General Manager's Department has the responsibility for H07 78 planning, directing, and managing Metropolitan's overall H07 79 operations. For fiscal year 1991-92 the objectives were:

H07 80 <*_>bullet<*/> To make the most efficient use of Metropolitan's H07 81 existing facilities.

H07 82 <*_>bullet<*/> To expand Metropolitan's water distribution H07 83 system capacity.

H07 84 <*_>bullet<*/> To continue the program of upgrading existing H07 85 facilities to maintain reliability and enhance service H07 86 capability.

H07 87 <*_>bullet<*/> To pursue opportunities to increase dependable H07 88 water supplies.

H07 89 <*_>bullet<*/> To encourage conservation and formulate programs H07 90 to reduce demands on Metropolitan's system.

H07 91 <*_>bullet<*/> To intensify programs to meet regulations in the H07 92 areas of drinking water, wastewater, air quality, hazardous H07 93 materials, and waste.

H07 94 <*_>bullet<*/> To continue automation of Metropolitan's H07 95 activities (purchasing, accounting, maintenance, project H07 96 management) to increase staff efficiency and effectiveness.

H07 97 <*_>bullet<*/> To enhance Metropolitan's employee development H07 98 and Equal Employment Opportunity programs.

H07 99 <*_>bullet<*/> To continue legislative monitoring at both the H07 100 State and Federal level.

H07 101 Legal Department

H07 102 Metropolitan's legal staff represents Metropolitan, its Board H07 103 of Directors, officers, and occasionally employees, in litigation H07 104 and administrative proceedings. The staff provides the Board of H07 105 Directors and Metropolitan's officers with legal advice and written H07 106 opinions, and reviews contracts and other documents. Additionally, H07 107 staff members follow litigation and administrative proceedings to H07 108 which Metropolitan is not a party, but whose outcome could affect H07 109 Metropolitan or the resources on which it depends. By closely H07 110 monitoring State legislative proposals, staff recommends positions H07 111 Metropolitan should take, if any.

H07 112 Internal Audit

H07 113 Metropolitan's Audit Department performs internal auditing H07 114 activities consisting of financial, compliance, and computer H07 115 audits, as well as miscellaneous reviews or special audits. The H07 116 Auditor reports directly to the Board of Directors through its H07 117 Special Audit Committee. He works closely with Metropolitan's H07 118 staff, but is independent of general management.

H07 119 Internal audit assignments are usually selected by the Auditor H07 120 and are occasionally requested by Metropolitan's Board of Directors H07 121 or management. Proposed Audit Department work activities are H07 122 reflected in the Audit Work Plan submitted to all directors through H07 123 the Special Audit Committee at the beginning of each fiscal year. H07 124 The Audit Work Plan is modified as necessary throughout the year H07 125 based on actual experience, new priorities, or other circumstances. H07 126 The Auditor also prepares a written activity report each month for H07 127 the Board of Directors<&|>sic! information.

H07 128 Detailed audit testing is preceded by appropriate planning and H07 129 coordination with management or staff. When significant audit H07 130 assignments are completed, all directors receive the report to the H07 131 Special Audit Committee, with copies provided to management. In H07 132 accordance with internal auditing standards, the typical audit H07 133 report outlines the objectives and scope of the work performed, the H07 134 audit findings noted, and any recommendations for corrections or H07 135 improvements which the Auditor feels are warranted under the H07 136 circumstances. In addition to internal audit assignments, the H07 137 Auditor and his staff provide substantial assistance to H07 138 Metropolitan's external auditors in conducting quarterly financial H07 139 audits and the year-end audit required by the California Government H07 140 Code and Metropolitan bond covenants.

H07 141 Preface H07 142 Fiscal year 1991-92 opened with a gloomy water supply picture H07 143 for Southern California as it faced a sixth year of drought. On H07 144 September 30, the end of a water year, storage in the State's major H07 145 reservoirs was only 58 percent of average, the lowest level since H07 146 1977's severe drought. Sacramento river runoff, a major source for H07 147 the State Water Project and usual provider of about half of the H07 148 water Metropolitan delivers, was only 46 percent of normal. H07 149 Colorado River basin supplies, which usually provide the other half H07 150 of the water Metropolitan delivers, were only slightly better, H07 151 ranging from 63 to 75 percent of normal. To cope with dwindling H07 152 supplies and increasing demands, Metropolitan provided input to H07 153 proposed plans for better management of Federal and State water H07 154 supplies; moved forward with its plans to construct Southern H07 155 California's largest reservoir; and accelerated its efforts to H07 156 encourage water management and conservation, and to construct new H07 157 and rehabilitate existing facilities for greater efficiency.

H07 158 As the Federal government considered reforms to the operation H07 159 of the federal Central Valley Project, Metropolitan's board of H07 160 Directors adopted a series of provisions to be pursued for H07 161 inclusion in any Central Valley Project reform legislation. The H07 162 general principles to be promoted involved water transfers; fish H07 163 and wildlife improvements, including water metering and changes in H07 164 water pricing; appropriate Federal actions to pursue needed H07 165 facilities; and other provisions consistent with Metropolitan's H07 166 mission to provide "adequate and reliable supplies of high H07 167 quality water to meet present and future needs in an H07 168 environmentally and economically responsible way". At the H07 169 State level, providing input to Governor Pete Wilson's Water Policy H07 170 Task Force, Metropolitan urged that the State formulate a balanced H07 171 water policy, stressing the need for developing significant new H07 172 supplies through a combination of improved facilities and water H07 173 transfers.

H07 174 Innovative was the key word for many of Metropolitan's programs H07 175 during the fiscal year. With approval of a landmark pact, forged by H07 176 the State's major urban water suppliers and environmental H07 177 organizations, Metropolitan helped set an industry standard for H07 178 urban water conservation practices throughout California. Detailing H07 179 16 specific conservation measures, also known as 'best management H07 180 practices', the agreement helps assure a more dependable water H07 181 supply by providing justifiable water savings. To secure additional H07 182 water supplies, Metropolitan's Board of Directors adopted a H07 183 far-reaching policy statement regarding the future development of H07 184 voluntary water transfers, primarily from agricultural water users. H07 185 Transfer activities would be accomplished through conservation, H07 186 conjunctive use, water management programs and selective land H07 187 fallowing, and would be designed to avoid contributing to or H07 188 creating long-term groundwater overdraft conditions. The activities H07 189 appropriately address potential third-party impacts in a manner H07 190 that protects and enhances the state's environmental resources. An H07 191 historic two-year experimental program will demonstrate the H07 192 potential of fallowing California farmland near the Colorado River H07 193 and making the saved water available to urban Southern California. H07 194 The program's agreement marked the first time urban and H07 195 agricultural water interests and Colorado River water rights H07 196 holders have joined forces in a land-fallowing program.

H07 197 Locally, Metropolitan launched an inventive pilot program that H07 198 combines the goals of water conservation with community action. The H07 199 program in East Los Angeles will create new jobs for community H07 200 members who will be trained to install ultra-low-flush toilets in H07 201 local residences and who will also receive instruction in sales and H07 202 personal development.

H07 203 Domenigoni Valley was selected as the site for an H07 204 800,000-acre-foot reservoir, the largest in Southern California - H07 205 completion of which will nearly double Southern California's water H07 206 storage capacity. The proposed 4,410-acre lake is critical to H07 207 long-range planning, prudent water management practices, and H07 208 assurance that an adequate supply of water will be available. It H07 209 will also provide the Hemet and San Jacinto areas with increased H07 210 tourism, a stronger economy, and one of the largest and most H07 211 pristine public recreation areas in California.

H07 212 Reservoir construction will be accomplished in an H07 213 environmentally sensitive manner through creation of one of the H07 214 first multi-species preservation and mitigation banking areas in H07 215 the nation. Joining lands purchased in the Santa Rosa Plateau and H07 216 lands already maintained as a reserve by the Nature Conservancy, H07 217 dedication of the 3,000-acre Shipley Reserve brought the H07 218 multi-species habitat to nearly 16,000 contiguous acres.

H07 219 Metropolitan's concern for the environment extended to actively H07 220 joining efforts to alleviate air pollution in the Los Angeles area H07 221 by acquiring ten clean-burning, methanol-fueled automobiles and H07 222 including a program of preventing and containing chemical spill H07 223 hazards as part of a major capital improvement program. The H07 224 chemical containment program essentially will eliminate the risk of H07 225 accidental chemical contamination at Metropolitan's filtration, H07 226 pumping and hydroelectric power plants, reservoirs and maintenance H07 227 areas where chemicals are stored and handled.

H07 228 Anticipating rigid new drinking water quality standards under H07 229 the Safe Drinking Water Act, Metropolitan began testing a new H07 230 treatment process at its Oxidation Demonstration Project on the H07 231 grounds of the F.E. Weymouth Filtration Plant. The demonstration H07 232 facility allows Metropolitan to test the performance of ozone and H07 233 PEROXONE (a combination of hydrogen peroxide an ozone) at a scale H07 234 that closely resembles actual use. Until the plants' completion, H07 235 Metropolitan had studied ozone and PEROXONE use in small-scale H07 236 treatment tests to reduce disinfection by-product levels, eliminate H07 237 disease-causing water-borne microorganisms, and control undesirable H07 238 taste and odor.

H07 239 Hoping to make desalination a more viable option for H07 240 supplementing existing water supplies, Metropolitan's Board of H07 241 Directors authorized the first planning and development phase of a H07 242 seawater desalination demonstration project which will include H07 243 construction of a 2,000 gallon-per-day test unit at a coastal power H07 244 plant site. H07 245 H08 1 <#FROWN:H08\>Terrorism: Efforts Toward International H08 2 Solutions

H08 3 A. Peter Burleigh, Coordinator for Counter-Terrorism

H08 4 Address before the 1992 Worldwide Anti-terrorism Conference, H08 5 Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, June 23, 1992

H08 6 I appreciate the opportunity to address this important H08 7 conference. I'd like to describe some recent noteworthy H08 8 developments in our efforts to counter the threat of international H08 9 terrorism.

H08 10 Despite the extraordinary and positive changes in the world in H08 11 the last 2 years and despite an evolving international consensus to H08 12 oppose terrorism, the problem is still very much with us. In fact, H08 13 last year there was a sharp increase in the number of international H08 14 terrorist incidents, although the number of deaths and injuries H08 15 declined. The increase reflected the large number of generally H08 16 small-scale incidents that occurred during the Gulf war. There were H08 17 no terrorist spectaculars resulting in large loss of life in 1991. H08 18 However, in 1992, we have seen the most spectacular terrorist H08 19 attack in 3 years: the bombing of the Israeli Embassy in Buenos H08 20 Aires. This brutal bombing killed about 2 dozen people and left 200 H08 21 injured.

H08 22 Although the number of international terrorist incidents seems H08 23 to be on a downward trend so far this year, the number of deaths H08 24 and injuries has increased. There have also been a number of H08 25 serious attacks by domestic terrorist groups in Spain, Peru, H08 26 Turkey, and other countries.

H08 27 It is shocking to note that almost all of the American citizens H08 28 who died in terrorist attacks during the past 2 years had some H08 29 connection to the US military - either on active duty or under H08 30 contract to the Defense Department. They died in Panama, the H08 31 Philippines, El Salvador, Turkey, and Greece. Two weeks ago, one US H08 32 serviceman was killed by gunfire and a second soldier wounded in an H08 33 ambush in Panama in advance of the President's visit.

H08 34 The Gulf War

H08 35 One of the most important developments of the last year was the H08 36 success of the coalition and the international community in H08 37 trumping Saddam Hussein's terrorist 'ace in the hole.' I think it H08 38 is clear that Saddam Hussein believed terrorism would be a H08 39 strategic weapon in deterring the coalition and undermining support H08 40 for the effort to liberate Kuwait. Iraq trained terrorists and H08 41 Iraqi intelligence operatives and dispersed them to locations H08 42 around the world in preparation for the 'mother of all battles.' In H08 43 the months following the invasion of Kuwait, and especially during H08 44 Operation Desert Storm, Saddam Hussein called publicly and H08 45 repeatedly for terrorist attacks against coalition targets. But H08 46 these attacks for the most part did not materialize.

H08 47 As many of you here know well, it was no accident that there H08 48 were no major successful terrorist attacks. It was the result of H08 49 unprecedented and largely unheralded cooperation among security and H08 50 law enforcement services around the world - including Europe, H08 51 Eastern Europe, and the Arab world - that stifled the Iraqi H08 52 terrorist threat. This cooperation involved the sharing of H08 53 intelligence information, expulsion of Iraqi diplomats and agents, H08 54 preemptive arrests, and enhanced security countermeasures. Those H08 55 attacks that did take place were largely sporadic and uncoordinated H08 56 acts of indigenous groups acting in sympathy with Saddam Hussein or H08 57 exploiting the Gulf war as a pretext to commit terrorism.

H08 58 While we can be proud of our successes, we must remember that H08 59 the Iraqi terrorist threat, while currently suppressed, is likely H08 60 to re-emerge if international sanctions are loosened and Iraq is H08 61 allowed to rebuild its diplomatic and intelligence operations.

H08 62 End to East Bloc Support

H08 63 Another new element has been the astonishing changes that have H08 64 occurred in the former Soviet Union and former Soviet bloc. We note H08 65 with great interest the recent reports from Moscow of documents H08 66 containing evidence that the former Soviet Government supported H08 67 groups that engaged in terrorism against Western interests. It is H08 68 too early to discuss broad conclusions about the extent of the H08 69 former Soviet Union's responsibility for international terrorism, H08 70 but these fragmentary reports are disturbing.

H08 71 The demise of the communist governments has obviously deprived H08 72 terrorist groups of material support, sanctuary, and safehaven from H08 73 which to operate, arms, financing, and front companies and other H08 74 infrastructure. Also important, it deprived them of the Leninist H08 75 ethos of all-justifying revolutionary violence. In some circles, H08 76 this had lent appeal and an aura of respectability to leftwing H08 77 terrorist groups.

H08 78 At the same time, the disintegrations of the Soviet Union and H08 79 now Yugoslavia has unleashed long-contained ethnic, religious, and H08 80 territorial rivalries. While these, regrettably, have claimed a H08 81 great number of lives and caused widespread suffering, they do not H08 82 appear to have spilled over into international terrorist incidents. H08 83 Nevertheless, it is a sobering reminder, today, that Sarajevo, site H08 84 of one of the most momentous terrorist incidents in history, is H08 85 again the scene of bloodshed.

H08 86 State-Supported Terrorism

H08 87 While Iraq was unable to incite a terrorist offensive against H08 88 the coalition, and despite welcome changes in the former communist H08 89 bloc, there remain states that have been and remain willing to H08 90 employ terrorism as an instrument of state policy.

H08 91 As many of you know, the United States maintains a list of H08 92 countries that support terrorism. There are six countries on that H08 93 list: Cuba, Iran, Iraq, Libya, North Korea, and Syria.

H08 94 Iraq, today, is in a state of enforced quiescence. Libya, as I H08 95 will discuss in greater detail shortly, is under great pressure to H08 96 comply with the UN resolutions requiring it to hand over suspects H08 97 in the Pan Am [Flight] 103 bombing, cooperate with French H08 98 authorities' investigation into the bombing of UTA Flight 772, and H08 99 cease its support for terrorism. Libya continues to provide support H08 100 and facilities for a number of terrorist groups, including the Abu H08 101 Nidal Organization [ANO], the Popular Front for the Liberation of H08 102 Palestine-General Command, and the Palestine Liberation Front.

H08 103 Iran, regrettably, continues to sponsor terrorism in an effort H08 104 to intimidate governments and individuals around the world. An H08 105 Iranian-sponsored group, Islamic Jihad, has claimed H08 106 responsibility for the bombing of the Israeli Embassy in Buenos H08 107 Aires, and it produced videotaped footage of the embassy taken H08 108 prior to the bombing in order to authenticate its claim.

H08 109 Iran continues to assassinate dissidents abroad. Four Iranian H08 110 agents are under arrest for the murder of former Iranian Premier H08 111 Minister Shapur Bakhtiar in Paris last year.

H08 112 Iran has also refused to rescind the fatwa, or religious H08 113 decree, calling for the murder of author Salman Rushdie because of H08 114 his book, The Satanic Verses. This seems a particularly H08 115 perverse and Orwellian <}_><-|>from<+|>form<}/> of terrorism - H08 116 international thought crime, bearing a sentence of death. In H08 117 addition, attacks on translators of Rushdie's books in Italy and H08 118 Japan are believed to be linked to their work.

H08 119 Iran also continues to provide material and financial H08 120 assistance to terrorist groups throughout the world. Last year, H08 121 Iran finally helped arrange for the freeing of Western hostages H08 122 held in Lebanon. The last two, both German citizens, were freed H08 123 last week. We have recognized Iran's role in this, and it was an H08 124 important step. As the President said, it has removed an enormous H08 125 obstacle to a more normal relationship with Iran. Serious problems H08 126 remain, however.

H08 127 Hezbollah elements in Lebanon that are fighting Israeli H08 128 troops are continuously resupplied by the Government of Iran by H08 129 flights to Damascus. Syria then permits these supplies to travel H08 130 overland by truck.

H08 131 Islamic Jihad also claimed responsibility for an H08 132 attack in Ankara, Turkey, that killed the Israeli Embassy's top H08 133 security officer. This attack followed by a few days a handgrenade H08 134 attack in front of the Neve Shalom Synagogue in Istanbul for which H08 135 Hezbollah is suspected.

H08 136 Tehran must recognize that only by abandoning state sponsorship H08 137 of terrorism can it expect to re-enter the international community. H08 138 The Iranians are not acting as if they have understood this basic H08 139 message. We need to work with other states to drive it home in H08 140 every way possible.

H08 141 Syria is not known to have sponsored any international H08 142 terrorist attacks outside Lebanon since 1987, and most of the H08 143 groups it supports have been relatively quiet since Syria joined H08 144 the allied coalition in the war with Iraq. However, Syria continues H08 145 to provide support and safehaven to a number of groups that engage H08 146 in international terrorism, and, for that reason, it remains on the H08 147 US Government list of state sponsors.

H08 148 A number of terrorist attacks, particularly against Israel, H08 149 have been attributed to groups based in Syria and in H08 150 Syrian-controlled areas of Lebanon. Groups enjoying Syrian support H08 151 and sanctuary include Hezbollah, Palestinian Islamic H08 152 Jihad, and the ANO. Two non-Arab groups that receive Syrian H08 153 support - the PKK and Dev Sol - are very active in Turkey. The PKK, H08 154 or Kurdish Workers' Party, has kidnapped Western hostages, H08 155 including Americans. The virulently anti-US group Dev Sol murdered H08 156 two DOD [Department of Defense]-associated Americans in Turkey last H08 157 year. Another non-Arab group supported by Syria is the Japanese Red H08 158 Army, which has attacked the US military. It is responsible for the H08 159 1988 car bombing of a USO [United Services Organization] club in H08 160 Naples that killed an American servicewoman and injured four US H08 161 servicemen.

H08 162 Syrian efforts over the past few years to reign in terrorists H08 163 under its control represent a half step. It has yet to sever its H08 164 relationships with these groups and shut down their training H08 165 camps.

H08 166 Other Trends

H08 167 I'd like to also touch briefly on two other issues. One is what H08 168 you might call the growing 'reach' of terrorists today. During the H08 169 Gulf war, Iraqi agents attempted unsuccessful attacks in Indonesia, H08 170 Thailand, and the Philippines, far from the traditional areas of H08 171 operation in the Middle Eastern terrorist groups. The bombing of H08 172 the Israeli Embassy in Buenos Aires is the latest, tragic example H08 173 of what may be a new strategy of seeking targets in traditionally H08 174 low-threat areas of the world, where security may be less vigilant H08 175 and local security forces may have little experience with the H08 176 international terrorist threat.

H08 177 I would also like to mention the threat of narco-terrorism. H08 178 This is not a new problem. In recent years, we have seen the H08 179 emergence both of narcotics traffickers who employ terrorism H08 180 against the state, and particularly its judicial system, to further H08 181 their own criminal goals. Many of you will recall the terrible H08 182 violence that struck Colombia in 1989, including the bombing of a H08 183 civilian airliner and the assassinations of judges, journalists, H08 184 police officials, and politicians.

H08 185 We have also seen more political insurgent and terrorist groups H08 186 - for example, the Shining Path in Peru - turn to narcotics H08 187 trafficking as an easy way to generate more income to support their H08 188 terrorist and military activities.

H08 189 We must continue to closely monitor this phenomenon, especially H08 190 as terrorist groups feel the effects of the cutoff in funding from H08 191 the former East bloc countries and reduced assistance from Cuba. In H08 192 Latin America and the Middle East especially, there are many areas H08 193 that are both major and traditional narcotics production areas and H08 194 operating areas for terrorist groups.

H08 195 US Policy

H08 196 I would like to turn now to the US counter-terrorism policy. H08 197 Our policy is based on three tenets:

H08 198 <*_>bullet<*/> No concessions to terrorists;

H08 199 <*_>bullet<*/> Pressure on states to cease support for H08 200 terrorism; and

H08 201 <*_>bullet<*/> Cooperation with other governments to impose the H08 202 rule of law on terrorists. This involves practical measures to help H08 203 us identify, apprehend, and prosecute terrorists.

H08 204 I believe that over the past year this policy has produced some H08 205 significant successes in our fight against terrorism.

H08 206 No Deals. The United States maintains a policy of H08 207 refusing to make concessions to terrorists. This means that we will H08 208 not pay ransom, release convicted terrorists, or pressure other H08 209 countries to give in to terrorist demands. No group should believe H08 210 that it can blackmail the United States. There will be no rewards H08 211 for terrorism.

H08 212 This aspect of our policy was damaged by the Iran-contra H08 213 affair, but we saw it succeed in the unconditional release, last H08 214 year, of all the remaining US hostages in Lebanon. As President H08 215 Bush stated last week in the wake of the release of the two H08 216 remaining German hostages from captivity, the 'no deals' policy, H08 217 which had encountered some rough water along the way, has been H08 218 vindicated by results. We are very well aware of the terrible, H08 219 wrenching pressure that terrorists can bring to bear, especially on H08 220 humane, democratic governments that value the lives of their H08 221 citizens. But we believe this policy is the only correct one.

H08 222 H09 1 <#FROWN:H09\>By Mr. BIDEN (for himself and Mr. H09 2 DeConcini):

H09 3 S. 618. A bill to control and reduce violent crime; to the H09 4 Committee on the Judiciary.

H09 5 VIOLENT CRIME CONTROL ACT OF 1991

H09 6 Mr. BIDEN. Mr. President, I rise today to introduce the Violent H09 7 Crime Control Act of 1991, the most comprehensive anticrime H09 8 initiative I have ever proposed. It is my belief that this H09 9 legislation would make tremendous strides toward restoring safety H09 10 and sanity to our Nation's dangerous streets.

H09 11 America needs a crime bill and it can have one in 100 days. But H09 12 it must be a crime bill that is tougher than the one the President H09 13 proposed yesterday, in at least two important respects:

H09 14 First, it must ban the killer assault weapons used by H09 15 drug-dealers and terrorists.

H09 16 Second, it must do more to add new police officers to the front H09 17 lines of the war on crime.

H09 18 If anyone doubts that such action is needed, I urge them to H09 19 take a look at a report that the Judiciary Committee majority staff H09 20 is releasing today.

H09 21 This report, entitled 'Fighting Crime in America: An Agenda for H09 22 the 1990's,' contains new data that illustrates how horrible the H09 23 crime problem has become.

H09 24 Among the report's findings:

H09 25 The year 1990 set a national record for murders, a national H09 26 record for rapes, a national record for assaults. Last year's H09 27 increase in murder and rape was the largest 1-year jump in more H09 28 than a decade. And every American - every American - is four times H09 29 more likely to be victimized by a violent crime today than he or H09 30 she was in 1960. The fact is this: more Americans were killed on H09 31 our streets over the past 8 weeks than were killed by enemy H09 32 soldiers during Operation Desert Storm.

H09 33 Yet if the report we are releasing today contains some H09 34 depressing, stark facts, it also contains some rather simple - but H09 35 important - solutions for meeting this crisis.

H09 36 And these solutions form the core of the legislation I am H09 37 proposing today: a bill, I am proud to say, that was endorsed last H09 38 month by my colleagues in the Senate Democratic Conference.

H09 39 Before I discuss our bill, I want to say a few things about the H09 40 President's 100 days.

H09 41 I have little doubt that Congress can pass a crime bill in 100 H09 42 days. In fact, we could have passed a crime bill last year had the H09 43 special interests in the gun lobby not worked to stall, delay, and H09 44 ultimately kill the bill because of its ban on deadly assault H09 45 weapons.

H09 46 Simply put: If the President would join the Congress in banning H09 47 the murderous weapons that are killing police officers, children H09 48 and countless of innocent bystanders, we could easily pass a crime H09 49 bill within the next 100 days.

H09 50 The report we are releasing today makes clear what America must H09 51 do to end its rapidly rising crime rates:

H09 52 First, we must get the people who commit crimes out of the H09 53 community, and we must punish them severely for their actions;

H09 54 Second, we must stop people from committing crimes before they H09 55 happen; and

H09 56 Third, we must get the deadly weapons off the streets.

H09 57 On the first of these goals, our bill has little difference H09 58 from the President. We disagree not in what the President proposes H09 59 - but what he opposes - not in what he includes but in what he H09 60 excludes.

H09 61 Like the President's bill, our bill:

H09 62 Imposes the death penalty for the largest number of offenses in H09 63 U.S. history - indeed, our bill covers even more capital offenses H09 64 than does the President's.

H09 65 It extends the death penalty for drug killers, terrorists, and H09 66 the murderers of law enforcement officers.

H09 67 It shortens the appeals process for capital offenders.

H09 68 And, it increases penalties for criminals who commit gun H09 69 offenses.

H09 70 We have no disagreement with the President over whether we must H09 71 punish criminals severely. On this point, both proposals are in H09 72 agreement. Our differences with the President start with the second H09 73 goal, the question of whether more must be done to prevent crimes H09 74 in the first place.

H09 75 Here, we think that much more must be done - not just to punish H09 76 criminals - but also to make our streets safer from mayhem in the H09 77 first place.

H09 78 On this point, the findings of our new staff report are worth H09 79 noting. It shows:

H09 80 In 1950, America had three police officers per violent crime. H09 81 Yet today, the ratio is just the reverse - three violent crimes per H09 82 officer.

H09 83 After 18 months of the administration's war on drugs, the H09 84 number of police officers on our streets today is only 1 percent H09 85 higher than it was when the President's effort was launched.

H09 86 And the administration's 1992 budget actually proposes a cut in H09 87 Federal aid sent to local law enforcement agencies.

H09 88 Our streets are unsafe because our police forces are H09 89 undermanned and overwhelmed. They can never be safe again until we H09 90 reverse this imbalance.

H09 91 That's why our bill, unlike the President's, includes funding H09 92 for thousands of new police officers, FBI agents, DEA agents, and H09 93 other law enforcement officers. We don't want to just punish H09 94 murderers, we want to prevent murders.

H09 95 And it's why our bill includes three new initiatives that the H09 96 President's plan ignores: a comprehensive new program to combat H09 97 juvenile gangs; more help for rural areas that are suffering rising H09 98 crime rates, and emergency aid to the places hardest hit by H09 99 drugs.

H09 100 And it is why we are pushing an important initiative called the H09 101 Violence Against Women Act, which would tackle the escalating H09 102 problems of rape, domestic violence, and sexual assault.

H09 103 The Violence Against Women Act, along with Senator H09 104 DeConcini's motorcycle gang bill are further aspects of our H09 105 anticrime agenda that are not adequately addressed by the H09 106 President's plan.

H09 107 Finally, and again, unlike the President's bill, our bill H09 108 addresses a third goal of any substantial crime legislation; H09 109 getting killer assault weapons off the streets.

H09 110 Our bill includes the so-called DeConcini amendment, a H09 111 measure adopted by the Senate last year to ban the manufacture and H09 112 sale of 14 deadly assault weapons.

H09 113 These guns are the weapons of choice for drug dealers and H09 114 international terrorists. They have no legitimate purpose and they H09 115 must be controlled before they kill any more of our law-abiding H09 116 citizens.

H09 117 Unfortunately, the President's bill is silent in this respect. H09 118 Instead of controlling assault weapons, the President proposes to H09 119 increase the penalties on those who use such guns to commit H09 120 crimes.

H09 121 Mr. President, I say this in response: We agree that gun H09 122 criminals should face stiffer punishments, but we also think that H09 123 we should get the most deadly weapons off the streets before they H09 124 are used to kill or maim anyone else.

H09 125 In sum: The President wants to punish crime - and so do we - H09 126 but we also want to do more to prevent crime, and make our cities H09 127 and towns safer for all Americans.

H09 128 Can the Congress meet the challenge to pass a crime bill in 100 H09 129 days? I am convinced that if the President works with us, this H09 130 ambitious goal can be achieved.

H09 131 But for this goal to be a meaningful one, the crime bill we H09 132 pass must be a meaningful one. Our goal should not be to pass just H09 133 any crime bill within 100 days, but rather, to enact a H09 134 comprehensive, valuable piece of crime-fighting legislation in that H09 135 period.

H09 136 To achieve that end, the President must help us in two ways: H09 137 First, he must prevent his allies in the gun lobby from blocking H09 138 this bill, and indeed, he should join us in coming up with an H09 139 agreeable proposal to limit these weapons; and second, he must work H09 140 with us putting aside the rhetoric of partisanship on crime to H09 141 reach an accord on a hill that we can all support.

H09 142 None of us here in Congress or at the White House, Republican H09 143 or Democrat - can afford to wait any longer to start to tackle this H09 144 crisis.

H09 145 Hopefully, if we all work together, we can make progress to H09 146 combat death and violent aggression on this home front as swiftly H09 147 and decisively as we achieved this same end in the gulf.

H09 148 I urge my colleagues to review our new majority staff report H09 149 and join me in supporting the Violent Crime Control Act.

H09 150 I ask unanimous consent that the full text of my bill, along H09 151 with a side-by-side comparison of it to the President's bill, and H09 152 some summary materials, be printed in the Record.

H09 153 Mr. President, I rise today to introduce a voluminous piece of H09 154 legislation, but I think an important one - I hope my colleagues H09 155 see it that way - the Violent Crime Control Act of 1991. This is H09 156 the most comprehensive anticrime initiative I have ever introduced H09 157 in the 18 years I have been here, and it is my belief that this H09 158 legislation would make tremendous strides toward restoring safety H09 159 and sanity to our Nation's streets and neighborhoods.

H09 160 Mr. President, before I say my little piece here, let me point H09 161 out that the President announced yesterday that violent crime is H09 162 going to be his No. 1 domestic initiative. I hope that doesn't mean H09 163 we are going to back off on the fight against drugs. The President H09 164 laid out a crime bill, a crime bill all of which we passed last H09 165 year here in the Senate. It ultimately failed because of a H09 166 Presidential threat of a veto because we in the Senate included a H09 167 provision eliminating 14 assault-style weapons - the so-called H09 168 DeConcini bill.

H09 169 Mr. President, I want to say at the outset about the death H09 170 penalty that I do not think many of us in here - I know the Senator H09 171 from Florida, because he knows so much about this area and has H09 172 worked so hard in it so long when he was a Governor and since he H09 173 has been here - disagree. Few of us disagree - at least I do not, H09 174 nor does the Senator from Florida - on reinstating the death H09 175 penalty.

H09 176 Our bill last year provided for the death penalty. And the bill H09 177 this year provides for a <}_><-|>dealth<+|>death<}/> penalty - H09 178 total of 44 offenses for which you can receive death as the H09 179 penalty. That is more than what the President is proposing.

H09 180 There is also a proposal the President has to change the habeas H09 181 corpus law. The Senator, as an attorney and former attorney H09 182 general, knows full well what that means. It means that there are H09 183 people who have been put on death row, and who are filing frivolous H09 184 and successive petitions that are taking up the courts' time and H09 185 everyone's time.

H09 186 But we can change habeas corpus tomorrow, and it will have no H09 187 effect on the crime rate; zero. Those folks on death row are not H09 188 shooting people. Yet, if you listen to some of my colleagues talk, H09 189 they will tell you: "If we get the death penalty and we get H09 190 a change in the habeas corpus, well, we will change the world. Our H09 191 streets will be safer."

H09 192 Now, I support the death penalty. I am going to try to pass it H09 193 again through this legislation. We passed it here in the Senate, H09 194 and passed it in the House, and we are going to pass it again. That H09 195 is not a big problem.

H09 196 But with the Federal death penalty, Mr. President, if you add H09 197 up all the potential people who will be put to death and convicted H09 198 for all the crimes we include, you are not talking about more than H09 199 a dozen folks a year. Heck, there are far more murders right here H09 200 in the city of Washington. We are not talking about a lot of H09 201 people.

H09 202 The point I wanted to make is this: It is not what the H09 203 President has proposed in his legislation that I oppose; it is what H09 204 he does not propose. We will change the habeas corpus law to H09 205 provide for only one appeal, one bite out of the apple. We have H09 206 some disagreement among ourselves and with the President over the H09 207 nuances. We will settle that. And we will pass a death penalty.

H09 208 As I said, I spoke to a group of attorneys general this morning H09 209 - and you spoke to them just prior to my speaking to them, Mr. H09 210 President - Republicans and Democrats alike. H09 211 H10 1 <#FROWN:H10\>Women have the right <}_><-|><+|>to<}/> be informed of H10 2 the risks, potential ramifications, and benefits related to urine H10 3 screening toxicology.

H10 4 Recommendation #32

H10 5 The Michigan Department of Social Services and the Michigan H10 6 Department of Public Health should review the Child Protective H10 7 Services policies regarding child abuse and neglect in relation to H10 8 substance use among parent(s). Policies should be revised where H10 9 indicated to foster family preservation as the goal of all H10 10 programs, that is to keep families together with appropriate H10 11 support services where possible.

H10 12 Recommendation #33

H10 13 Prosecutors should include in their policies the referral of H10 14 substance-using pregnant women into substance abuse treatment H10 15 programs and prenatal care. The Department of Public Health should H10 16 enlist the assistance of advocacy groups and private organizations H10 17 to support local prosecutors in the development and implementation H10 18 of policies on the non-punitive approach to pregnant, H10 19 substance-using women and their referral into substance abuse and H10 20 prenatal care. The statement submitted to the Task Force by Wayne H10 21 County Prosecutor John O'Hair in support of the non-prosecution of H10 22 substance-using pregnant women should be accepted as a stellar H10 23 example for local prosecutors.

H10 24 Recommendation #34

H10 25 Widely publicize written policies of treatment and education as H10 26 an alternative to criminal prosecution for substance-using pregnant H10 27 women.

H10 28 Recommendation #35

H10 29 Increase public information targeting the male role and H10 30 responsibility in reducing fetal exposure to alcohol, tobacco, and H10 31 other drugs and in promoting positive pregnancy outcomes.

H10 32 Recommendation #36

H10 33 All state legislation, regulations and programs should consider H10 34 the culturally relevant lifestyle issues of substance-using H10 35 women.

H10 36 Recommendation #37

H10 37 All state legislation and regulations should support smoke-free H10 38 treatment environments, i.e., Clean Air Act. The Michigan H10 39 Department of Public Health should develop a protocol for smoking H10 40 cessation that may be used with pregnant women. Substance abuse H10 41 treatment facilities should offer smoke-free environments.

H10 42 Health Services

H10 43 The use of ATOD (alcohol, tobacco and other drugs) during H10 44 pregnancy can have detrimental effects both non-specific and highly H10 45 specific on perinatal outcome. Non-specific effects include fetal H10 46 growth retardation, resulting in low birth weight infants and H10 47 infants with small head circumference. Specific effects include H10 48 facial, skeletal and organ system abnormalities. Women using drugs H10 49 during pregnancy are also at increased risk for preterm labor and H10 50 abruptio placenta thereby placing an already H10 51 compromised fetus at increased risk. The number of mothers who are H10 52 HIV infected from sharing needles and practicing unsafe sex is H10 53 increasing at an alarming rate.

H10 54 Definitive information does not exist about the long-term H10 55 effects of drug use during pregnancy. Researchers have reported H10 56 that some infants who were prenatally exposed to cocaine have H10 57 suffered from stroke or hemorrhage in the areas of the brain H10 58 responsible for intellectual capabilities; and there is a H10 59 substantial body of information available which describes the H10 60 harmful effects of alcohol and tobacco use on the developing fetus. H10 61 In-utero exposure to alcohol, tobacco and other drugs is associated H10 62 with an increased rate among newborns of (1) low birthweight, with H10 63 small for gestational age length and head circumference, (2) H10 64 central nervous system damage that may delay or impair H10 65 neurobehavorial development, (3) mild to severe withdrawal effects, H10 66 and (4) certain congenital physical malformations. Researchers have H10 67 also stated that follow-up studies of these children indicate that H10 68 the vast majority of them reach developmentally appropriate H10 69 milestones by 36 months.

H10 70 Prenatal care can help or at least ameliorate many of the H10 71 problems and costs associated with the births of prenatally-exposed H10 72 infants. Through three basic components of prenatal care: (1) early H10 73 and continued risk assessment, (2) health promotion, and (3) H10 74 health/medical and psychosocial interventions and follow-up, the H10 75 chances of an unhealthy infant are greatly reduced. Comprehensive H10 76 residential and intensive outpatient substance abuse treatment that H10 77 includes prenatal and other health services for women, such as H10 78 gynecological, HIV counseling and testing, etc. is the best H10 79 approach to helping women to stop using drugs during pregnancy and H10 80 providing the developing infant with the best chance of being born H10 81 healthy.

H10 82 In addition to prenatal care, the earliest opportunity for H10 83 intervention is the provision of reproductive health services. H10 84 Reproductive health services should be made available to all H10 85 substance-using women of childbearing age in Michigan. These H10 86 services would include teaching abstinence and family planning as H10 87 well as providing pre- and post-conceptional counseling. In H10 88 addition it is widely accepted and documented by pregnancy and H10 89 sexually-transmitted disease (STD) data that adolescents are H10 90 negatively impacted by early sexual activity and that the most H10 91 reliable method of preventing pregnancy and STDs is abstinence. H10 92 Abstinence-based strategies, therefore, should receive adequate H10 93 funding.

H10 94 Recommendation #38

H10 95 Reproductive health services should be made a Basic Health H10 96 Service (teaching abstinence, family planning methods, pre- and H10 97 post-conceptional counseling.) Abortion counseling is not H10 98 included.

H10 99 Recommendation #39

H10 100 Develop protocols for use and dissemination of reproductive H10 101 health services information to substance-using women to be used by H10 102 all appropriate programs.

H10 103 Recommendation #40

H10 104 Increase statewide access to health care for substance-using H10 105 pregnant women through provision of education, training and H10 106 incentives to providers to serve this population.

H10 107 Administrative Recommendations

H10 108 Education and Training

H10 109 A recurring theme in discussing substance abuse treatment is H10 110 the importance of well-trained and committed professionals to lead H10 111 substance abuse programs and to provide direct care. Unfortunately, H10 112 more often than not, drug treatment services, as well as other H10 113 services which should be linked with them, are frequently staffed H10 114 by inadequately trained individuals who are poorly paid and given H10 115 little on-going support. It is often the least skilled and trained H10 116 individuals who are given the tasks of managing the state's most H10 117 serious problems in health and human services.

H10 118 It is imperative that persons caring for substance-using women H10 119 and pregnant women clearly understand and address all aspects of H10 120 the complex psychosocial, medical, gender, legal and ethical issues H10 121 involved, so that the best possible care and positive outcomes can H10 122 be provided for the woman, her infant and family.

H10 123 Recommendation #41

H10 124 State funding should be made available to sponsor on-going H10 125 training to professionals who provide care to substance-using H10 126 women. Training should include information on assessment, H10 127 culturally-relevant lifestyle issues and the influence/impact drug H10 128 usage may have on women (e.g., issues of sexuality and hormonal H10 129 surge). State funding should be made available to substance abuse H10 130 programs to assist with planning, implementation and evaluation.

H10 131 Recommendation #42

H10 132 Curricula for physicians, nurses and social workers and others H10 133 concerned with maternal and child health issues should include H10 134 gender specific issues including behavioral manifestations of H10 135 exposures to environmental stress, and sexual abuse and stress. H10 136 Topics should include post-traumatic stress syndrome, depression, H10 137 incest, rape, co-dependency, drug use, child abuse, and domestic H10 138 violence.

H10 139 Evaluation H10 140 Research and evaluation is needed on the results for various H10 141 approaches of treating alcohol, tobacco, and other drug use among H10 142 parents and families, and especially among pregnant women and women H10 143 with young children. This requires, among other things, greater H10 144 clarity among goals of treatment and careful definition of the H10 145 markers of success.

H10 146 In Michigan, few resources have been devoted to evaluating H10 147 programs for substance-using women. There is little qualitative or H10 148 quantitative data to support the objectives of the state's H10 149 programs. What works? How can we replicate? What should be H10 150 replicated? How can we prevent, treat and address the myriad of H10 151 problems associated with and the impact of perinatal substance use H10 152 on women, their children and families in our state?

H10 153 Many experts believe that the most cost-effective approach is a H10 154 comprehensive continuum of care model program that includes H10 155 specially trained staff; provision of physical, social, medical, H10 156 educational, childcare, and vocational services; and the H10 157 involvement of the family in therapy. The conclusion is that more H10 158 programs tailored to meet the unique requirements of women are H10 159 needed. More research is also needed regarding treatment H10 160 effectiveness, as well as the etiology of alcohol and drug abuse. H10 161 To this end, the government (federal, state and local) must play a H10 162 major role in funding longitudinal and multi-site studies.

H10 163 Recommendation #43

H10 164 The Michigan Department of Public Health should develop H10 165 guidelines for cost-effectiveness, process and outcome-based H10 166 evaluations of women- and family-specific substance abuse treatment H10 167 and prevention programs. The guidelines should be reviewed and H10 168 endorsed by appropriate state, local and educational H10 169 institutions.

H10 170 Recommendation #44

H10 171 Guidelines and training should be made available to assure that H10 172 program evaluators understand the need for culture and gender H10 173 specific program designs and service delivery methods.

H10 174 Recommendation #45

H10 175 The Michigan Department of Public Health should disseminate H10 176 information about effective alcohol and other drug treatment H10 177 programs for women.

H10 178 Exhibit

H10 179 Early Childhood Development

H10 180 Introduction

H10 181 Charge to the Committee

H10 182 The Early Childhood Development Committee of the Governor's H10 183 Task Force on Drug-Exposed Infants originally described its task as H10 184 "the careful consideration of, and the formulation of H10 185 recommendations for the population of children between the ages of H10 186 0 and six years who have been prenatally exposed to drugs, or H10 187 exposed to drugs in the environment." This approach, H10 188 however, posed at least one major problem to committee members: H10 189 many, and probably most, prenatally drug-exposed infants will not H10 190 be detected using current screening mechanisms. Correspondingly, H10 191 many children who were not prenatally drug-exposed are in need of H10 192 services. Therefore, the committee expanded its charge to include H10 193 all infants in need of intervention, with special emphasis placed H10 194 on the identification of and intervention with those infants known H10 195 to have been prenatally drug-exposed.

H10 196 Statement of the Problem

H10 197 The issue addressed by the Governor's Task Force on H10 198 Drug-Exposed Infants is the syndrome of problems sustained by H10 199 infants as a consequence of maternal drug use during pregnancy. The H10 200 Governor's Office has charged this Task Force with the H10 201 responsibility of generating recommendations which will prevent and H10 202 ameliorate these problems, as well as to recommend effective H10 203 interventions for those children sustaining developmental H10 204 disabilities as a consequence of such exposure.

H10 205 A difficult problem the Early Childhood Development Committee H10 206 had to confront was the reality that - short of intensive and H10 207 unrealistically expensive (and often intrusive) screening H10 208 techniques - many drug-exposed newborns will go undetected. A 1989 H10 209 study indicates that hospitals assessing every pregnant woman and H10 210 newborn infant through rigorous detection procedures had an H10 211 incidence rate of drug-exposed infants three to five times greater H10 212 than hospitals utilizing more customary, less rigorous screening H10 213 techniques. (Chasnoff, 1989)

H10 214 Further, it became clear that there may be many drug-exposed H10 215 infants who for one reason or another may not have sustained any H10 216 early detectable negative consequences. Factors which may have a H10 217 bearing on detectable infant health problems attributable to H10 218 prenatal drug exposure include amount and duration of exposure, H10 219 drug/s of choice, nutrition, access to health care systems, H10 220 prenatal care and overall maternal health. A review of the H10 221 literature indicated abundant reports on the occurrence of H10 222 developmental delays and/or disabilities in this population. Ramer, H10 223 et al, revealed significantly smaller-sized fetuses in mothers H10 224 known to be heroin-addicted (1975), even when controlling for H10 225 prenatal care and nutrition. Babies born to methadone addicts were H10 226 found to have normal birthweights, but greater postnatal weight H10 227 loss due to hyperactivity and sleep disturbances (Householder, H10 228 1982). Neonatal drug withdrawal symptoms were noted in neonates of H10 229 heroin- and methadone-addicted mothers, with symptoms mainly H10 230 involving the central nervous and gastrointestinal systems. Such H10 231 symptoms included irritability, increased muscle tone, shrill H10 232 crying, inability to sleep, and hyperactive deep tendon reflexes. H10 233 "Uncoordinated and ineffective sucking and swallowing H10 234 reflexes, non-nutritive sucking, vomiting, diarrhea and progressive H10 235 weight loss were also noticed." (Dinges, 1980).

H10 236 Infants born to opiate addicts were found to be "highly H10 237 energetic, talkative, and easily distracted, with brief attention H10 238 spans" (Hutchings, 1982). Disturbances also included H10 239 immature object manipulation; and cognitive, speech, and perceptual H10 240 difficulties. The frustrating nature of these difficulties to the H10 241 drug-addicted mother and other family members may also place the H10 242 infant at high risk for child abuse (Bauman et al, 1986).

H10 243 Bauman and Levine (1986) found that children of H10 244 methadone-maintained mothers had a higher incidence of adverse H10 245 behavior such as yelling, whining, teasing, and physical abuse of H10 246 other children as compared with children of non-addicted mothers, H10 247 which they postulate may contribute to impairment. The same study H10 248 found that both the mothers and the children had lower intelligence H10 249 quotient scores when compared to children and their non-addicted H10 250 mothers; and that children of addicted mothers had a lower ability H10 251 to learn and to adapt to new situations. However, they found no H10 252 significant differences in the gross motor skills of these two H10 253 populations of children.

H10 254 Mayes, Granger, et. al. (1992), warn about the potential H10 255 dangers of arriving at premature conclusions about the severity and H10 256 universality of cocaine effects, which they caution "are in H10 257 themselves potentially harmful to children." H10 258 H11 1 <#FROWN:H11\>This is unfortunate, given that such expenditures H11 2 often have very high rates of return. For instance, the expected H11 3 return to efficient nonwage O&M in the irrigation sector in H11 4 Indonesia in the mid-1980s is estimated at 117 percent in Java and H11 5 90 percent off Java. A Bank report found that in the transport H11 6 sector, specific road improvements have an estimated return of 13 H11 7 rupiahs for each rupiah spent. These high economic returns often H11 8 justify a higher priority for expansion of maintenance expenditures H11 9 than for outlays for new construction in a number of countries. H11 10 Unfortunately, increases in nonwage O&M do not yield the political H11 11 dividends that new and visible capital investments do. Nor do H11 12 declines in their allocations have the same political costs as a H11 13 retrenchment in civil service employment, erosion of real salaries, H11 14 or elimination of subsidies. This expenditure category has thus H11 15 been cut along with capital investment, but unlike capital H11 16 investments, its starting point was unsatisfactorily low to begin H11 17 with (Heller 1977 and 1982).

H11 18 While countries exhibit pervasive difficulties in this area, H11 19 there are a few instances of progress. In Ghana, spending on H11 20 nonwage goods and services more than tripled in real terms from H11 21 1984 to 1989. Much of this increase has focused on health, H11 22 education, and agriculture, with allocations guided by newly H11 23 established government norms. The Bank actively facilitated this H11 24 process, through advice, technical assistance, and associated H11 25 conditionality in adjustment loans. In several cases - Bangladesh, H11 26 Indonesia, and Papua New Guinea, for example - the Bank has H11 27 encouraged the adoption of nonwage O&M strategies for such sectors H11 28 as roads, education, health, and agriculture. In Indonesia, road H11 29 maintenance was a problem for several years, but nonwage O&M H11 30 spending has recently been increased to more adequate levels.

H11 31 Most cases are less positive. In a set of country briefs on H11 32 adjustment lending countries in Sub-Saharan Africa, Bank staff H11 33 cited inadequate nonwage O&M as a key problem in the allocation of H11 34 public expenditures in seventeen of nineteen countries. Several H11 35 countries (Benin, Togo) had falling levels and shares of nonwage H11 36 O&M (SPA Working Group 1991). Some countries have experienced a H11 37 collapse of effective service delivery - schools without teaching H11 38 materials, health clinics without drugs and supplies, and H11 39 rehabilitated roads once again becoming impassable because of the H11 40 absence of subsequent maintenance. Inadequate nonwage O&M H11 41 expenditure has also brought about an alarming deterioration of H11 42 infrastructure assets, imposing high economic costs for road H11 43 transport. Country reports are replete with evidence on declining H11 44 allocations for nonwage O&M, the worsening wage-nonwage balance, H11 45 and the undesirable implications for the efficiency of government H11 46 infrastructure and services (box 3.4).

H11 47 The Bank's attention to nonwage O&M issues in adjustment H11 48 lending is relatively recent. Conditions on nonwage O&M feature in H11 49 only 8 percent of adjustment loans during 1979-85, increasing to 14 H11 50 percent in 1986-88 and then leaping to about one-third in 1989-90. H11 51 Greater emphasis has been placed on the adequacy on nonwage O&M H11 52 allocations in key sectors. Examples include allocating sufficient H11 53 funds for routine road maintenance for 1989-91 in Chad (Transport H11 54 Sector Loan 1989); making adequate nonwage O&M budget allocations H11 55 for irrigation, transport, and power in Nepal (1989); and H11 56 increasing allocations on nonwage expenditures for road H11 57 maintenance, agriculture, education, and health in Cameroon H11 58 (1989-92). But even more emphasis needs to be placed on the H11 59 adequacy of nonwage O&M for critical economic and social sector H11 60 programs. Conditionality can constitute a good mechanism for H11 61 bridging the deviation between economic benefits and political H11 62 indifference in this area.

H11 63 Subsidies and other current tansfers. Subsidies and H11 64 other current transfers include all unrequited, nonrepayable H11 65 government payments for current purposes. For fifteen intensive H11 66 adjustment lending countries (data were incomplete for Bolivia), H11 67 average spending under this category fell from 6.4 percent of GDP H11 68 in the first half of the 1980s to 5.7 percent in the second half. H11 69 All countries in this group except Pakistan registered a decline. H11 70 As a share of total expenditure net of interest payments, average H11 71 expenditure on subsidies and other current transfers fell from 31.9 H11 72 percent in the first half of the adjustment decade to 28.8 percent H11 73 in the second half. In four countries in the sample (Korea, H11 74 Pakistan, Thailand, and Uruguay), the budgetary share increased in H11 75 the second half of the 1980s.

H11 76 Bank involvement has focused on subsidies for key commodities H11 77 and on transfers to public enterprises. Many adjustment loans have H11 78 included conditions to cut subsidies - almost half the loans during H11 79 1979-85 and only slightly less than that in recent years. Many H11 80 conditions have focused on reducing or eliminating subsidies on H11 81 agricultural commodities and inputs, principally fertilizers. H11 82 Examples include eliminating subsidies for rice, wheat flour, and H11 83 fertilizers in Sri Lanka (Economic Reconstruction Credit, 1990), H11 84 reducing fertilizer subsidies by 15 percent in Ghana (SALII, 1989), H11 85 and reducing the ratio of budgetary subsidies to GDP during 1990-91 H11 86 in Mozambique (Economic Recovery Program, 1989). Further work in H11 87 this area needs to distinguish between types of subsidies H11 88 (generalized or targeted, production or consumption) and H11 89 alternative reforms supported by the Bank (such as elimination or H11 90 better targeting). For instance, in Venezuela's SAL and Jamaica's H11 91 Social Sector Development Project, sharp reductions in general H11 92 subsidies in the context of the adjustment program were accompanied H11 93 by targeted interventions to protect the poor.

H11 94 caption&box

H11 95 Changes in the functional composition of spending

H11 96 Expenditure shifts, in tandem with cuts, are critical for H11 97 improving economic performance and the quality of life. For H11 98 instance, rechanneling resources from nonproductive uses to social H11 99 sectors can enhance human capital for sustainable and equitable H11 100 growth and shield the poor during fiscal adjustment. For H11 101 twenty-four developing countries, Hicks (1991) analyzed expenditure H11 102 reductions during 1970-84 and concluded that governments facing H11 103 tough expenditure choices preserve present welfare and security H11 104 interests at the expense of longer-term capital investment and thus H11 105 long-term economic growth. Hicks found that during this period H11 106 social sectors and defense were relatively protected (elasticities H11 107 of these expenditures relative to total expenditure were less than H11 108 one), while economic infrastructure spending bore a larger burden H11 109 of the fiscal adjustments. The evidence for social and economic H11 110 infrastructure during adjustment is broadly consistent with these H11 111 findings (table 3.3). In addition, government expenditure on H11 112 industry and mining fell during adjustment in intensive adjustment H11 113 lending countries, suggesting a desirable reduction of the role of H11 114 the state in areas where the private sector has a comparative H11 115 advantage.

H11 116 Economic infrastructure spending. Both intensive H11 117 adjustment lending and non-adjustment lending countries cut the H11 118 share in GDP of expenditure on transport and communication (a proxy H11 119 for economic infrastructure spending) during the 1980s. A H11 120 comparison of pre- and postadjustment trends in each country shows H11 121 that economic infrastructure spending declined in eleven intensive H11 122 adjustment lending countries and increased in four. On average, H11 123 spending declined by 25 percentage points during the postadjustment H11 124 period. There is also evidence that in both the intensive H11 125 adjustment lending and the non-adjustment lending groups, the H11 126 budgetary share fell. The intensive adjustment lending countries, H11 127 however, cut spending less, on average, than the non-adjustment H11 128 lending countries.

H11 129 Although economic infrastructure expenditures in general have a H11 130 high proportion of capital expenditures, the fall in economic H11 131 infrastructure spending also reflects the decline in the materials, H11 132 supplies, and maintenance part of the nonwage O&M budget. This H11 133 decline has led to a deterioration of economic infrastructure in H11 134 many countries, most notably roads (see section on nonwage H11 135 operations and maintenance above).

H11 136 Social sector spending. Some critics of Bank- and H11 137 Fund-supported adjustment programs, including UNICEF, argue that H11 138 these programs have imposed fiscal austerity that has compressed H11 139 government spending on social services, particularly health and H11 140 education (Cornia, Jolly, and Stewart 1987). A breakdown of H11 141 government spending by function does not support this hypothesis H11 142 (table 3.3). There is no perceptible change in the ratio of central H11 143 government expenditure on education and health to GDP in both H11 144 intensive adjustment lending and non-adjustment lending countries H11 145 from the first half of the 1980s to the second half. But there is H11 146 evidence that the share of health and education in total public H11 147 expenditures increased slightly. The share of these expenditures in H11 148 government expenditure net of interest payments for the 16 H11 149 intensive adjustment lending countries increased marginally - from H11 150 23.5 percent in the first half of the 1980s to 25.1 percent in the H11 151 second half. During the same period, the non-adjustment lending H11 152 countries increased the share of health and education in total H11 153 expenditures net of interest from 20.4 to 22.8 percent. Social H11 154 expenditures include more than health and education, but we focus H11 155 on these two categories because they are the most commonly H11 156 important.

H11 157 Real per capita social spending also indicates the social H11 158 impact of adjustment lending. This measure gives an indication of H11 159 the real level of social services that countries provide. Real H11 160 social sector spending per capita on education and health by H11 161 central governments increased in the late 1980s in over 60 percent H11 162 of intensive adjustment lending countries but in only 42 percent of H11 163 non-adjustment lending countries. Among the low-income intensive H11 164 adjustment lending countries in the sample, real per capita H11 165 spending on education and health increased in Ghana, Kenya, and H11 166 Pakistan and declined in Bolivia and Malawi in the postadjustment H11 167 period. Moreover, the average increase in intensive adjustment H11 168 lending countries was greater than that in non-adjustment lending H11 169 countries in the sample (table 3.4).

H11 170 Interpretation of the aggregate evidence requires caution, H11 171 however. The indicators of social spending presented in tables 3.3 H11 172 and 3.4 do not support the hypothesis that government expenditures H11 173 in health and education subsectors declined under Bank-supported H11 174 adjustment programs. Beyond this, any meaningful assertion about H11 175 the social cost of adjustment or the effect of stabilization H11 176 programs on the poor requires a more detailed examination of H11 177 primary-level expenditures and efficiency (better delivery, H11 178 targeting, and cost recovery) in the social sectors. Expenditures H11 179 on primary and secondary education and on preventive health usually H11 180 have high returns and are central to increasing the productivity H11 181 and welfare of the poor. The problem is that cross-country data on H11 182 social sector expenditures generally are not sufficiently H11 183 disaggregated to address these questions.

H11 184 captions&tables

H11 185 An examination of individual country experiences suggests that H11 186 even though social sector expenditures may have been protected, H11 187 complacency is unwarranted. A few countries (for example, Chile, H11 188 Ghana, and Indonesia) have increased the relative share of H11 189 aggregate social sector expenditures as well as expenditures on H11 190 basic social services. In Ghana, the share of aggregate social H11 191 sector expenditures as well as that of primary education increased H11 192 - as a percentage of GDP and of total expenditures - in real terms H11 193 during the adjustment. A range of social indicators improved during H11 194 the adjustment period. In Indonesia, when expenditures were being H11 195 reduced between 1982 and 1987, expenditure shares of H11 196 poverty-related sectors - social sectors, agriculture, and H11 197 transfers to local governments for basic social services - were H11 198 increasing and large-scale capital investments in industry and H11 199 mining were deferred. In Chile, while the real level and shares of H11 200 education and health expenditures dropped, the private sector H11 201 expanded its role at the tertiary level. In addition, there were H11 202 increased allocations for primary education and improved targeting H11 203 in primary health care and nutrition programs, which permitted H11 204 continued progress in social indicators. Chile was thus able to H11 205 protect targeted and poverty-oriented expenditures despite fiscal H11 206 austerity.

H11 207 In some intensive adjustment lending countries, however, there H11 208 have been cutbacks in the levels and shares of social sector H11 209 expenditures during periods of austerity. Even when total social H11 210 expenditures have been protected, important intrasectoral H11 211 imbalances remained or got worse. Resources were concentrated at H11 212 tertiary levels, while allocations for basic social services H11 213 declined, despite poor social indicators. There were shortages of H11 214 critical complementary inputs, such as basic drugs, textbooks, and H11 215 supplies, while overstaffing continued (for instance, the H11 216 experience of Brazil - box 3.5). Similar problems can be seen in H11 217 many other intensive adjustment lending countries (box 3.6).

H11 218 On balance, restructuring social expenditures in favor of H11 219 primary education and health services and safety nets offers H11 220 substantial scope both for mitigating the costs of adjustment for H11 221 the poor and for improving their human capital and earning H11 222 potential in the long run. But such restructuring usually requires H11 223 sustained political will to reduce the allocation of social H11 224 expenditures for such items as universities and city hospitals that H11 225 benefit principally better-off segments of society.

H11 226 The role of the Bank's adjustment lending in restructuring H11 227 public expenditures to enhance efficiency and reduce poverty has H11 228 been limited, but it has received more attention in recent years in H11 229 the context of a renewed emphasis on poverty alleviation. H11 230 H12 1 <#FROWN:H12\>(3) National Defense Authorization Act for H12 2 Fiscal Years 1992 and 1993

H12 3 Partial text of Public Law 102-190 [H.R. 2100], 105 Stat. 1290, H12 4 approved December 5, 1991

H12 5 AN ACT To authorize appropriations for fiscal years 1992 and H12 6 1993 for military activities of the Department of Defense, for H12 7 military construction, and for defense activities of the Department H12 8 of Energy, to prescribe personnel strengths for such fiscal years H12 9 for the Armed Forces, and for other purposes.

H12 10 Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives H12 11 of the United States of America in Congress assembled,

H12 12 SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE.

H12 13 This Act may be cited as the 'National Defense Authorization H12 14 Act for Fiscal Years 1992 and 1993'.

H12 15 TITLE X - GENERAL PROVISIONS

H12 16 PART G - MISCELLANEOUS MATTERS

H12 17 SEC. 1095. IRAQ AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECURITY COUNCIL H12 18 RESOLUTION 687.

H12 19 (a) FINDING. - The Congress finds that the Government of Iraq H12 20 continues to violate United Nations Security Council Resolution H12 21 687, which required Iraq to submit within 15 days of its adoption H12 22 on April 3, 1991, a declaration of the locations, amounts, and H12 23 types of all weapons of mass destruction and to H12 24 "unconditionally accept the destruction, removal or H12 25 rendering harmless" of chemical weapons, biological H12 26 weapons, and missiles with a range greater than 150 kilometers and H12 27 the removal of nuclear weapons-usable material.

H12 28 (b) SENSE OF CONGRESS. - It is the sense of the Congress that H12 29 -

H12 30 (1) Iraq's noncompliance with United Nations Security Council H12 31 Resolution 687 constitutes a continuing threat to the peace, H12 32 security, and stability of the Persian Gulf region;

H12 33 (2) the President should consult closely with the partners of H12 34 the United States in the Desert Storm coalition and with the H12 35 members of the United Nations Security Council in order to present H12 36 a united front of opposition to Iraq's continuing noncompliance H12 37 with Security Council Resolution 687; and

H12 38 (3) the Congress supports the use of all necessary means to H12 39 achieve the goals of Security Council Resolution 687 as being H12 40 consistent with the Authorization for Use of Military Force Against H12 41 Iraq Resolution (Public Law 102-1).

H12 42 RESOLUTION 688

H12 43 (a) FINDING. - The Congress finds that the Government of Iraq, H12 44 through its ongoing suppression of the political opposition, H12 45 including Kurds and Shias, continues to violate the Universal H12 46 Declaration of Human Rights and United Nations Security Council H12 47 Resolution 688 which demanded that Iraq "ensure that the H12 48 human and political rights of all Iraqi citizens are H12 49 respected".

H12 50 (b) SENSE OF CONGRESS. - It is the sense of the Congress H12 51 that -

H12 52 (1) Iraq's noncompliance with United Nations Security Council H12 53 Resolution 688 constitutes a continuing threat to the peace, H12 54 security, and stability of the Persian Gulf region;

H12 55 (2) the President should consult closely with the partners of H12 56 the United States in the Desert Storm coalition and with the H12 57 members of the United Nations Security Council in order to present H12 58 a united front of opposition to Iraq's continuing non-compliance H12 59 with Security Council Resolution 688; and

H12 60 (3) the Congress supports the use of all necessary means to H12 61 achieve the goals of United Nations Security Council Resolution 688 H12 62 consistent with all relevant United Nations Security Council H12 63 Resolutions and the Authorization for Use of Military Force Against H12 64 Iraq Resolution (Public Law 102-1).

H12 65 (4) Persian Gulf Conflict Supplemental Authorization and H12 66 Personnel Benefits Act of 1991

H12 67 Partial text of Public Law 102-25 [S. 725], 105 Stat. 75, H12 68 approved April 6, 1991; as amended by Public Law 102-190 [National H12 69 Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Years 1992 and 1993; 105 Stat. H12 70 1508], 105 Stat. 1290, approved December 5, 1991; and Public Law H12 71 102-484 [National Defense Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 1993; H12 72 H.R. 5006], 106 Stat. 2315, approved October 23, 1992

H12 73 AN ACT Entitled the 'Persian Gulf Conflict Supplemental H12 74 Authorization and Personnel Benefits Act of 1991'.

H12 75 Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives H12 76 of the United States of America in Congress assembled,

H12 77 SECTION 1. SHORT TITLE

H12 78 This Act may be cited as the 'Persian Gulf Conflict H12 79 Supplemental Authorization and Personnel Benefits Act of 1991'.

H12 80 SEC. 2. TABLE OF CONTENTS<*_>three-stars<*/>

H12 81 SEC. 3. DEFINITIONS

H12 82 For the purposes of this Act:

H12 83 (1) The term 'Operation Desert Storm' means operations of H12 84 United States Armed Forces conducted as a consequence of the H12 85 invasion of Kuwait by Iraq (including operations known as Operation H12 86 Desert Shield, Operation Desert Storm, and Operation Provide H12 87 Comfort).

H12 88 (2) The term 'incremental costs associated with Operation H12 89 Desert Storm' means costs referred to in section 251(b)(2)(D)(ii) H12 90 of the Balanced Budget and Emergency Deficit Control Act of 1985 (2 H12 91 U.S.C. 901(b)(2)(D)(ii)).

H12 92 (3) The term 'Persian Gulf conflict' means the period beginning H12 93 on August 2, 1990, and ending thereafter on the date prescribed by H12 94 Presidential proclamation or by law.

H12 95 (4) The term 'congressional defense committees' has the meaning H12 96 given that term in section 3 of the National Defense Authorization H12 97 Act for Fiscal Year 1991 (Public Law 101-510; 104 Stat. 1498).

H12 98 SEC. 4. CONSTRUCTION WITH PUBLIC LAW 101-510.

H12 99 Any authorization of appropriations, or authorization of the H12 100 transfer of authorizations of appropriations, made by this Act is H12 101 in addition to the authorization of appropriations, or the H12 102 authority to make transfers, provided in the National Defense H12 103 Authorization Act for Fiscal Year 1991 (Public Law 101-510).

H12 104 TITLE I - AUTHORIZATION OF FISCAL YEAR 1991 SUPPLEMENTAL H12 105 APPROPRIATIONS FOR OPERATION DESERT STORM

H12 106 SEC. 101. FUNDS IN THE DEFENSE COOPERATION ACCOUNT

H12 107 (a) AUTHORIZATION OF APPROPRIATION. - During fiscal years 1991, H12 108 1992, and 1993, there is authorized to be appropriated to the H12 109 Department of Defense current and future balances in the Defense H12 110 Cooperation Account established under section 2608 of title 10, H12 111 United States Code.

H12 112 (b) USE OF FUNDS. - Amounts appropriated pursuant to subsection H12 113 (a) shall be available only for -

H12 114 (1) transfer by the Secretary of Defense to fiscal years 1991, H12 115 1992, and 1993 appropriation accounts of the Department of Defense H12 116 or Coast Guard for incremental costs associated with Operation H12 117 Desert Storm; and

H12 118 (2) replenishment of the Persian Gulf Regional Defense Fund H12 119 created under section 102.

H12 120 SEC. 102. PERSIAN GULF REGIONAL DEFENSE FUND

H12 121 (a) ESTABLISHMENT OF ACCOUNT. - There is established in the H12 122 Treasury of the United States a working capital account for the H12 123 Department of Defense to be known as the 'Persian Gulf Regional H12 124 Defense Fund'.

H12 125 (b) AUTHORIZATION OF APPROPRIATIONS. - During fiscal years 1991 H12 126 and 1992, there is authorized to be appropriated to the Persian H12 127 Gulf Regional Defense Fund the sum of $15,000,000,000.

H12 128 (c) USE OF FUNDS. - Funds appropriated pursuant to subsection H12 129 (b) shall be available only for transfer by the Secretary of H12 130 Defense to fiscal years 1991, 1992, and 1993 appropriation accounts H12 131 of the Department of Defense or Coast Guard for the incremental H12 132 costs associated with Operation Desert Storm. Such funds may be H12 133 used for that purpose only to the extent that funds are not H12 134 available in the Defense Cooperation Account for transfer for such H12 135 incremental costs.

H12 136 (d) REPLENISHMENT OF ACCOUNT. - Amounts transferred from the H12 137 Persian Gulf Regional Defense Fund shall be replenished from funds H12 138 available in the Defense Cooperation Account to the extent that H12 139 funds are available in the Defense Cooperation Account. Whenever H12 140 the balance in the Persian Gulf Regional Defense Fund is less than H12 141 the amount appropriated to that account pursuant to this section, H12 142 the Secretary shall transfer from the Defense Cooperation Account H12 143 such funds as become available to the account to replenish the H12 144 Persian Gulf Regional Defense Fund before making any transfer of H12 145 such funds under sections 101 and 102.

H12 146 (e) REVERSION OF BALANCE UPON TERMINATION OF ACCOUNT. - Any H12 147 balance in the Persian Gulf Regional Defense Fund at the time of H12 148 the termination of the account shall revert to the general fund of H12 149 the Treasury.

H12 150 SEC. 103. ADDITIONAL TRANSFER AUTHORITY

H12 151 The amount of the transfer authority provided in section 1401 H12 152 of Public Law 101-510 is hereby increased by the amount of such H12 153 transfers as the Secretary of Defense makes pursuant to law (other H12 154 than Public Law 101-511) to make adjustments among amounts provided H12 155 in titles I and II of Public Law 101-511 due to incremental costs H12 156 associated with Operation Desert Storm.

H12 157 SEC. 104. ADMINISTRATION OF TRANSFERS

H12 158 A transfer made under the authority of section 101 or 102 H12 159 increases by the amount of the transfer the amount authorized for H12 160 the account to which the transfer is made.

H12 161 SEC. 105. NOTICE TO CONGRESS OF TRANSFERS

H12 162 (a) NOTICE-AND-WAIT. - A transfer may not be made under section H12 163 101 or 102 until the seventh day after the congressional defense H12 164 committees receive a report with respect to that transfer under H12 165 subsection (b).

H12 166 (b) CONTENT OF REPORT. - A report under subsection (a) shall H12 167 include the following:

H12 168 (1) A certification by the Secretary of Defense that the amount H12 169 or amounts proposed to be transferred will be used only for H12 170 incremental costs associated with Operation Desert Storm.

H12 171 (2) A statement of each account to which the transfer is H12 172 proposed to be made and the amount proposed to be transferred to H12 173 such account.

H12 174 (3) A description of the programs, projects, and activities for H12 175 which funds proposed to be transferred are proposed to be used.

H12 176 (4) In the case of a transfer from the Persian Gulf Regional H12 177 Defense Fund established under section 102, an explanation of the H12 178 reasons why funds are not available in the Defense Cooperation H12 179 Account for such transfer.

H12 180 SEC. 106. MONTHLY REPORTS ON TRANSFERS

H12 181 Not later than seven days after the end of each month in fiscal H12 182 years 1991, 1992, and 1993, the Secretary of Defense shall submit H12 183 to the congressional defense committees and the Comptroller<&|>sic! H12 184 General of the United States a detailed report on the cumulative H12 185 total amount of the transfers made under the authority of this H12 186 title through the end of that month.

H12 187 TITLE II - WAIVER OF PERSONNEL CEILINGS AFFECTED BY H12 188 OPERATION DESERT STORM

H12 189 SEC. 203. AUTHORIZATION FROM DEFENSE COOPERATION ACCOUNT

H12 190 (a) AUTHORIZATION. - In addition to authorizations under H12 191 section 101, there is hereby authorized to be appropriated from the H12 192 Defense Cooperation Account such sums as may be necessary for H12 193 increases in military personnel costs for fiscal years 1991 through H12 194 1995 resulting from the exercise of the authorities provided in H12 195 section 201. Such increases in costs are incremental costs H12 196 associated with Operation Desert Storm.

H12 197 (b) USE OF FUNDS. - Funds appropriated to the Persian Gulf H12 198 Regional Defense Fund pursuant to section 102(b) may be used for H12 199 the purposes described in subsection (a) to the extent provided in H12 200 section 102(c).

H12 201 (c) REPORTING. - Funds obligated for the purposes described in H12 202 subsection (a) shall be included in the reports required by section H12 203 106.

H12 204 SEC. 204. CONFORMING REPEAL

H12 205 Section 1117 of the National Defense Authorization Act for H12 206 Fiscal Year 1991 (Public Law 101-510; 104 Stat. 1637) is H12 207 repealed.

H12 208 TITLE IV - REPORTS ON FOREIGN CONTRIBUTIONS AND THE COSTS H12 209 OF OPERATION DESERT STORM

H12 210 SEC. 401. REPORTS ON UNITED STATES COSTS IN THE PERSIAN GULF H12 211 CONFLICT AND FOREIGN CONTRIBUTIONS TO OFFSET SUCH COSTS

H12 212 (a) REPORTS REQUIRED. - The Director of the Office of H12 213 Management and Budget shall prepare, in accordance with this H12 214 section, periodic reports on the incremental costs associated with H12 215 Operation Desert Storm and on the amounts of contributions made to H12 216 the United States by foreign countries to offset those costs. The H12 217 Director shall prepare the reports in consultation with the H12 218 Secretary of Defense, the Secretary of State, the Secretary of the H12 219 Treasury, and other appropriate Government officials.

H12 220 (b) COSTS OF OPERATION DESERT STORM. -

H12 221 (1) PERIOD COSTS AND CUMULATIVE COSTS. - Each report prepared H12 222 under subsection (a) shall specify -

H12 223 (A) the incremental costs associated with Operation Desert H12 224 Storm that were incurred during the period covered by the report; H12 225 and

H12 226 (B) the cumulative total of such costs, by fiscal year, from H12 227 August 1, 1990, to the end of the period covered by the report.

H12 228 (2) NONRECURRING COSTS AND COSTS OFFSET. - In specifying the H12 229 incremental costs associated with Operation Desert Storm that were H12 230 incurred during the period covered by a report and the total of H12 231 such costs, the Director shall separately identify those costs that H12 232 -

H12 233 (A) are nonrecurring costs;

H12 234 (B) are offset by in-kind contributions; or

H12 235 (C) are offset (or proposed to be offset) by the realignment, H12 236 reprogramming, or transfer of funds appropriated for activities H12 237 unrelated to the Persian Gulf conflict.

H12 238 (c) SPECIFIC COST AREAS. - Each report prepared under H12 239 subsection (a) on the incremental costs associated with Operation H12 240 Desert Storm shall specify an allocation of the total amount of H12 241 such costs among the military departments, the Defense Agencies of H12 242 the Department of Defense, and the Office of the Secretary of H12 243 Defense, by category, including the following categories:

H12 244 H13 1 <#FROWN:H13\>"(1) IN GENERAL. - If the H13 2 taxpayer's principal residence or any of its contents is H13 3 compulsorily or involuntarily converted as a result of a H13 4 Presidentially declared disaster -

H13 5 "(A) TREATMENT OF INSURANCE PROCEEDS. -

H13 6 "(i) EXCLUSION FOR UNSCHEDULED PERSONAL PROPERTY. - H13 7 No gain shall be recognized by reason of the receipt of any H13 8 insurance proceeds for personal property which was part of such H13 9 contents and which was not scheduled property for purposes of such H13 10 insurance.

H13 11 "(ii) OTHER PROCEEDS TREATED AS COMMON FUND. - In the H13 12 case of any insurance proceeds (not described in clause (1)) for H13 13 such residence or contents -

H13 14 "(I) such proceeds shall be treated as received for the H13 15 conversion of a single item of property, and

H13 16 "(II) any property which is similar or related in service or H13 17 use to the residence so converted (or contents thereof) shall be H13 18 treated for purposes of subsection (a)(2) as property similar or H13 19 related in service or use to such single item of property.

H13 20 "(B) EXTENSION OF REPLACEMENT PERIOD. - Subsection H13 21 (a)(2)(B) shall be applied with respect to any property so H13 22 converted by substituting "4 years" for "2 H13 23 years".

H13 24 "(2) PRESIDENTIALLY DECLARED DISASTER. - For purposes H13 25 of this subsection, the term 'Presidentially declared disaster' H13 26 means any disaster which, with respect to the area in which the H13 27 residence is located, resulted in a subsequent determination by the H13 28 President that such area warrants assistance by the Federal H13 29 Government under the Disaster Relief and Emergency Assistance H13 30 Act.

H13 31 "(3) PRINCIPAL RESIDENCE. - For purposes of this H13 32 subsection, the term 'principal residence' has the same meaning as H13 33 when used in section 1034, except that no ownership requirement H13 34 shall be imposed."

H13 35 (b) EFFECTIVE DATE. - The amendment made by H13 36 subsection (a) shall apply to property compulsorily or H13 37 involuntarily converted as a result of disasters for which the H13 38 determination referred to in section 1033(h)(2) of the Internal H13 39 Revenue Code of 1986 (as added by this section) is made on or after H13 40 September 1, 1991, and to taxable years ending on or after such H13 41 date.<*_>bullet<*/>

H13 42 By Mr. AKAKA:

H13 43 S.3124. A bill to amend the Consolidated Farm and Rural H13 44 Development Act and the Farm Credit Act of 1971 to establish a H13 45 program to aid beginning farmers and ranchers, to improve the H13 46 operation of the Farmers Home Administration, and for other H13 47 purposes; to the Committee on Agriculture, Nutrition, and H13 48 Forestry.

H13 49 FARMING OPPORTUNITY ACT

H13 50 <*_>bullet<*/>Mr. AKAKA. Mr. President, today I am introducing H13 51 the Farming Opportunity Act, a bill to target credit assistance to H13 52 those who need it most - beginning farmers.

H13 53 Anyone familiar with farming should be alarmed by the dramatic H13 54 decline in the number of farmers and the advancing age of our farm H13 55 population. Last month the Census Bureau announced that the average H13 56 age of our farmers continues to grow older and that farm population H13 57 has once again declined.

H13 58 The average farmer is 52 years of age, compared to an average H13 59 of 33 years for nonfarmers. Today, there are twice as many farmers H13 60 over the age of 60 as there are below the age of 35. As our aging H13 61 farm population retires, we must ask ourselves: Where will the next H13 62 generation of farmers come from?

H13 63 Clearly we are not doing enough to attract rural youth to H13 64 farming. All too often, young people with farm backgrounds don't H13 65 follow in their parents' footsteps. Often this occurs at their H13 66 parents' urging. Farming simply has too many barriers to remain H13 67 attractive to young people.

H13 68 Gone are the days when, if you had land, labor, and a little H13 69 cash, you could make a go at farming. Modern farms are capital H13 70 intensive businesses. Ask struggling young farmers about the H13 71 greatest challenge they face, and the near-universal response you H13 72 will hear is "access to credit."

H13 73 The Federal Government simply has not done enough to help H13 74 beginning farmers establish themselves or remain in business. In H13 75 part, this is because the Farmers Home Administration has forsaken H13 76 its central mission of extending credit to beginning farmers until H13 77 their operations can become viable. The legislation I introduce H13 78 today is a companion measure to H.R. 2401, introduced by H13 79 Representative PENNY, and is designed to redirect the lending H13 80 priorities of the Farmers Home Administration.

H13 81 Under this bill, a new FmHA loan program would be established H13 82 to assist persons interested in pursuing farming, ranching and H13 83 aquaculture as their primary occupation. It specifically targets H13 84 the beginning farmer - individuals who have not previously operated H13 85 a farm or have operated farms for less <}_><-|>then<+|>than<}/> 5 H13 86 years.

H13 87 To relieve<&|>sic! assistance under the Farming Opportunity H13 88 Act, an applicant must agree to participate in loan assessment, H13 89 borrower training and financial management programs under the H13 90 Department of Agriculture. An applicant must be able to demonstrate H13 91 that after 10 years the farming operation will be viable without H13 92 further FmHA loans. Finally, the measure creates a special H13 93 downpayment loan program so that these farmers can achieve the H13 94 dream of owning their own farm.

H13 95 Nowhere would such a program have greater benefit H13 96 <}_><-|>that<+|>than<}/> in Hawaii. Due to a number of recent H13 97 developments, we have an abundance of idle farmland and a growing H13 98 rural labor pool.

H13 99 Last Friday, the big island's second largest sugar plantation, H13 100 Mauna Kea Agribusiness, announced that it would cease farming H13 101 sugarcane. Beginning in November, nearly 9,000 acres of caneland H13 102 will be converted to other agricultural uses.

H13 103 One-third of the land producing sugarcane 20 years ago is no H13 104 longer being cultivated today. By the time that Mauna Kea's sugar H13 105 operations have come to an end, Hawaii's cane acreage will have H13 106 declined by 85,000 acres. If past experience is a guide, only 12 H13 107 percent will be planted in other crops.

H13 108 There is an ample supply of good farmland in Hawaii. In H13 109 addition to the changes planned by Mauna Kea Sugar, there is H13 110 evidence that additional farm acreage may be available soon. As a H13 111 means of raising capital in order to reduce its debt, the big H13 112 island's Hamakua Sugar Co. has announced plans to sell nearly 2,000 H13 113 acres at Laupahoehoe. The land will be subdivided into small H13 114 agricultural lots and offered for sale to current and former H13 115 Hamakua employees, and to nearby residents.

H13 116 In another development, the 9,600-acre Mauna Kea Ranch was H13 117 recently subjected to a foreclosure sale. While the new landowner H13 118 has not announced its<&|>sic! intentions about the use of this H13 119 property, ranching or agriculture appears to be the only H13 120 conceivable land use. Further reductions in Hawaii's sugar acreage H13 121 remain a possibility, as the Hawaiian sugar industry gets caught in H13 122 a squeeze between static or declining sugar prices and higher H13 123 production costs.

H13 124 Rising unemployment, especially on the neighbor islands, means H13 125 that there is a labor pool capable of becoming the next generation H13 126 of Hawaii's farmers. On the big island, unemployment is 3.1 percent H13 127 above the statewide average. Molokai is 4.3 percent above the State H13 128 average, while Maui's unemployment is 1.3 percent above the State H13 129 as a whole.

H13 130 The neighbor island economy has been hard hit by a downturn H13 131 <}_><-|>is<+|>in<}/> sugar and tourism. The Farming Opportunity Act H13 132 can offer a shot in the arm for our lagging economy. Many sugar H13 133 workers have spent their lives in agriculture, and I want to ensure H13 134 that they can continue to find employment in farming.

H13 135 Agriculture has always been the economic backbone of rural H13 136 Hawaii. The decline of sugar means that we must turn to other crops H13 137 if we are to preserve the economic health of the neighbor islands. H13 138 The best way to achieve this transition is to promote new ventures H13 139 in diversified agriculture by targeting credit assistance to H13 140 beginning farmers.

H13 141 There is no magic answer to the problems that precipitated H13 142 Mauna Kea's decline. But I am committed to finding solutions that H13 143 will maintain a strong and healthy economy in rural Hawaii.

H13 144 Fortunately, Hawaii has an abundance of good agricultural land H13 145 as well as ambitious young people capable of farming successfully. H13 146 What is lacking is a credit program specifically designed for the H13 147 needs of beginning farmers. Through the Farming Opportunity Act, we H13 148 can establish a new generation of farmers who will produce H13 149 diversified crops that are in demand in mainland and overseas H13 150 markets.

H13 151 Mr President, I ask unanimous consent that a copy of the bill H13 152 be printed in the RECORD at the conclusion of my statement.

H13 153 There being no objection, the bill was ordered to be printed in H13 154 the RECORD, as follows:

H13 155 S. 3124

H13 156 Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives H13 157 of the United States of America in Congress assembled,

H13 158 SECTION. 1. SHORT TITLE; TABLE OF CONTENTS.

H13 159 (a) SHORT TITLE. - This Act may be cited as the H13 160 'Farming Opportunity Act of 1992'.

H13 161 (b) TABLE OF CONTENTS. - The table of contents of H13 162 this Act is as follows.

H13 163 Sec. 1. Short title; short title.

H13 164 Sec. 2. Limitation on aggregate indebtedness.

H13 165 Sec. 3. Federal-State beginning farmer partnership.

H13 166 Sec. 4. Beginning farmer and rancher program.

H13 167 Sec. 5. Graduation of borrowers with operating loans or H13 168 guarantees to private commercial credit.

H13 169 Sec. 6. Time period within which county committees are required H13 170 to meet to consider applications for farm ownership and operating H13 171 loans and guarantees and beginning farmer plans.

H13 172 Sec. 7. Period for certification of eligibility for loans.

H13 173 Sec. 8. Processing of applications for farm operating loans.

H13 174 Sec. 9. Simplified application for guaranteed loans of $50,000 H13 175 or less.

H13 176 Sec. 10. Graduation of seasoned direct loan borrowers to the H13 177 loan guarantee program.

H13 178 Sec. 11. Debt service margin requirements.

H13 179 Sec. 12. Targeting of loans to members of groups whose members H13 180 have been subjected to gender prejudice.

H13 181 Sec. 13. Recordkeeping of loan success rates by gender.

H13 182 Sec. 14. Effective date.

H13 183 SEC. 2. LIMITATION ON AGGREGATE INDEBTEDNESS.

H13 184 The first sentence of section 305 of the Consolidated Farm and H13 185 Rural Development Act (7 U.S.C. 1925) is amended by striking H13 186 "and 310D" and inserting "310D, and H13 187 310E".

H13 188 SEC. 3. FEDERAL-STATE BEGINNING FARMER PARTNERSHIP.

H13 189 (a) COORDINATION OF ASSISTANCE FOR ELIGIBLE BEGINNING H13 190 FARMERS AND RANCHERS. - Section 309 of the Consolidated Farm H13 191 and Rural Development Act (7 U.S.C. 1929) is amended by adding at H13 192 the end the following new subsection:

H13 193 "(i)(1) Within 60 days after any State expresses to the H13 194 Secretary, in writing, a desire to coordinate the provision of H13 195 financial assistance to eligible beginning farmers and ranchers in H13 196 the state, the Secretary and the State shall conclude a joint H13 197 memorandum of understanding that shall govern how the Secretary and H13 198 the State are to coordinate the assistance.

H13 199 "(2) The memorandum of understanding shall provide that if a H13 200 State beginning farmer program makes a commitment to provide an H13 201 eligible beginning farmer or rancher (as defined in section H13 202 310E(e)) with financing to establish or maintain a viable farming H13 203 or ranching operation, the Secretary shall, subject to applicable H13 204 law, normal loan approval criteria, and the availability of funds, H13 205 provide that farmer or rancher with -

H13 206 "(A) a downpayment loan under section 310(E);

H13 207 "(B) a guarantee of the financing provided by the State H13 208 program; or

H13 209 "(C) such a loan and such a guarantee.

H13 210 "(3) The Secretary may not charge any person any fee with H13 211 respect to the provision of any guarantee under this subsection.

H13 212 "(4) As used in paragraph (1), the term 'State beginning farmer H13 213 program' means any program that is -

H13 214 "(A) carried out by, or under contract with, a State; and

H13 215 "(B) designed to assist persons in obtaining the financial H13 216 assistance necessary to enter agriculture and establish viable H13 217 farming or ranching operations.".

H13 218 (b) ADVISORY COMMITTEE. -

H13 219 (1) ESTABLISHMENT; PURPOSE. - Within 18 months after H13 220 the date of the enactment of this Act, the Secretary of Agriculture H13 221 shall establish an advisory committee, to be known as the 'Advisory H13 222 Committee on Beginning Farmers and Ranchers', which shall provide H13 223 advice to the Secretary on -

H13 224 (A) the development of the program of coordinated assistance to H13 225 eligible beginning farmers and ranchers under section 300(1) of the H13 226 Consolidated Farm and Rural Development Act (as added by subsection H13 227 (a) of this section);

H13 228 (B) ways to maximize the number of new farming and ranching H13 229 opportunities created through the program;

H13 230 (C) ways to encourage States to participate in the program,

H13 231 (D) the administration of the program; and

H13 232 (E) other methods of creating new farming or ranching H13 233 opportunities.

H13 234 (2) MEMBERSHIP. - The Secretary shall appoint the members H13 235 of the Advisory Committee which shall include representatives from H13 236 the following:

H13 237 (A) The Farmers Home Administration.

H13 238 H14 1 <#FROWN:H14\>2. CHARACTERISTICS OF POVERTY IN AFRICA

H14 2 2.1. Definition and Causes of African Poverty

H14 3 2.1.1. What Is Poverty?

H14 4 Poverty is the state of deprivation of fundamental human needs H14 5 and expectations. Among these are the desire for sufficient food H14 6 and water, adequate shelter, good health, long life, knowledge, and H14 7 the capacity to provide materially for oneself and one's family H14 8 through productive endeavor. Poverty is, thus, far more than lack H14 9 of income, although that is how it is typically measured. It is H14 10 rather the absence of basic human progress, without which the H14 11 concept of social and economic development becomes a mockery.

H14 12 Poverty may be defined relatively and absolutely. Relative H14 13 poverty refers to comparative measures of deprivation between H14 14 groups within one country or cross-nationally. Absolute poverty H14 15 attempts to define a minimum standard of material acquisition below H14 16 which one is poor anywhere in the world. The absolute poverty line H14 17 is normally that income required to secure a basic nutritional H14 18 intake (2,250 calories per day) and other necessities (Lipton, H14 19 1988). The World Bank has estimated this consumption-based poverty H14 20 line to lie between $275 and $370 per person per year, according to H14 21 country context (World Bank, 1990a).

H14 22 The absolute poverty line in each country should be estimated H14 23 by calculating the cost of a basket of essential goods and H14 24 adjusting it to reflect real purchasing power with respect to other H14 25 countries. The number of poor households in a country can then be H14 26 expressed as a proportion of total population. This headcount H14 27 index, however, fails to indicate the degree to which the poor fall H14 28 below the poverty line. The poverty gap measures the income H14 29 necessary to bring the poor up to the poverty line. Nevertheless, H14 30 both the headcount and the poverty gap calculation fail to indicate H14 31 the distribution of inequality among the poor.

H14 32 Poverty lines adjusted for purchasing power are thus gross H14 33 measures of the number of poor in a country. Country-specific H14 34 poverty lines can only be a start in understanding the H14 35 characteristics and composition of poverty, with more detailed H14 36 analysis necessary for targeting programmes of poverty H14 37 reduction.

H14 38 2.1.2. The Nature of African Poverty

H14 39 Africa is among the poorest regions of the world, and the H14 40 number of poor is increasing rapidly. The number of persons with H14 41 less than $370 income per year increased by about two-thirds H14 42 between 1970 and 1985 and is expected to increase from 180 million H14 43 in 1985 (47 percent of the population) to 265 million by the year H14 44 2000.

H14 45 If current trends continue, the African poor, constituting 16 H14 46 percent of the world's destitute in 1985, will comprise 30 percent H14 47 of the total by the year 2000 (Lele and Adu-Nyako, 1991). Other H14 48 estimates of African poverty are worse and probably reflect an H14 49 unrealistically high absolute poverty level. The ILO, for example, H14 50 estimates that the number of absolute poor in Africa had already H14 51 reached 270 million by 1985, about half the total population; by H14 52 1995 this number is expected to reach nearly 400 million (UNDP, H14 53 1990).

H14 54 Poverty in Africa is still primarily a rural phenomenon, H14 55 despite the increasing presence of slums around rapidly growing H14 56 cities. Reflecting the generally dismal conditions of rural life, H14 57 urbanization has been rapidly increasing throughout Africa and has H14 58 been growing faster than in other regions of the world. From an H14 59 urban population of 14 percent in 1965, the towns and cities of H14 60 Africa expanded to 28 percent of the total population in 1985 and H14 61 continued to grow at over 6 percent per year throughout the 1980s. H14 62 Migration to cities has tended to be primarily a male phenomenon, H14 63 leading to heightened impoverishment of rural areas and rapidly H14 64 growing number of female-headed rural families, especially in H14 65 Southern and Eastern Africa.

H14 66 Although varying from country to country, the overall H14 67 population growth rate for Africa is about 3.1 percent a year, H14 68 while per capita agricultural production has declined for more than H14 69 a decade. In some countries, population doubled between 1965 and H14 70 1987. During the same period real GNP per capita declined from $400 H14 71 to §330 (excluding Nigeria).

H14 72 From 1970 to 1985, agricultural production rose on average only H14 73 1.4 percent per year, half the population growth rate. In spite of H14 74 rising food imports, malnutrition has become endemic in many H14 75 countries.

H14 76 Malnutrition and low income contribute strongly to the short H14 77 life expectancy of Africans, currently about 54 years compared to H14 78 62 for all developing countries. The child mortality rate of 196 H14 79 per 1,000 is second only to India (200) among the regions of the H14 80 world. Primary school enrollments are the lowest in the world, H14 81 averaging 56 percent, and are strongly linked to high infant and H14 82 child mortality and morbidity rates.

H14 83 The lack of reliable data makes detailed accounting of the poor H14 84 impossible at present. Few countries can do more than estimate the H14 85 number of absolute poor and their location. However, for countries H14 86 with good data, the pattern of severely worsening poverty in Africa H14 87 holds across the continent (World Bank, 1990a). In Tanzania, real H14 88 rural living standards fell at an average annual rate of 2.5 H14 89 percent between 1969 and 1983. Real urban wages declined by 65 H14 90 percent during the same period, and real private consumption per H14 91 person has dropped 43 percent since 1973. In Nigeria, consumption H14 92 fell by 7 percent a year during the early 1980s and living H14 93 standards were lower in the mid-1980s than in the 1950s. In Ghana, H14 94 nearly 60 percent of the population in 1985 lived on less than $370 H14 95 per year, while in Botswana this figure was almost 50 percent, in H14 96 spite of a near 9 percent a year economic growth rate since 1965. H14 97 In contrast, Morocco counted only 34 percent of its population H14 98 below the poverty line in 1984, down from 43 percent in 1970 (World H14 99 Bank, 1990a).

H14 100 2.1.3. Causes of African Poverty

H14 101 The origins of widespread poverty in Africa are rooted in the H14 102 economic dislocation and political balkanization brought on by H14 103 European colonialism. Since the end of colonialism, the following H14 104 factors have limited African progress in achieving broad-based H14 105 economic development, and have resulted in stagnant growth and H14 106 declining per capita incomes (Dumont and Mottin, 1980):

H14 107 <*_>bullet<*/>Persistence in following inappropriate H14 108 development models based on an emphasis on capital-intensive, H14 109 industrial sector investment at the expense of labor-intensive H14 110 agricultural-led growth. This has resulted in neglect of H14 111 rural areas in favor of urban zones, and a massive rural-to-urban H14 112 exodus;

H14 113 <*_>bullet<*/>Overemphasis on public sector H14 114 interventions in economic activities more efficiently H14 115 performed by the private sector. Not only has this hindered private H14 116 sector development, but it has also retarded development of public H14 117 capacity to work effectively in areas that are appropriate for H14 118 government intervention (such as the legal system, education, H14 119 health, and agricultural research);

H14 120 <*_>bullet<*/>Failure to recognize the informal H14 121 sector as a legitimate engine of economic growth. Although H14 122 several governments have become more enlightened in recent years, H14 123 many are still more concerned with policing informal sector H14 124 participants than in seeking strategies for assisting them to H14 125 improve the performance of their enterprises;

H14 126 <*_>bullet<*/>Over-reliance on projects, donors, and H14 127 foreign assistance that has resulted in too many poorly H14 128 conceived and supervised projects, bloated recurrent costs, and H14 129 inconsistent development strategies as governments depend more on H14 130 outsiders than their own citizens to make crucial public policy and H14 131 investment decisions;

H14 132 <*_>bullet<*/>Neglect of subsistence food crops H14 133 through lack of research and extension of appropriate production H14 134 and processing technologies;

H14 135 <*_>bullet<*/>Unfavorable trends in the terms of H14 136 trade as many African agricultural and mineral exports have H14 137 declined in price at the same time that import costs have risen, H14 138 most notably for oil; and

H14 139 <*_>bullet<*/>Insufficient concern with environmental H14 140 degradation as population growth combined with expansion of H14 141 areas cleared for agriculture and fuelwood gathering have imperiled H14 142 sustainable development.

H14 143 Historical poverty in Africa has been perpetuated in recent H14 144 years by slow economic growth coupled with rapid population H14 145 increases. African GDP growth slowed during the 1980s to 0.3 H14 146 percent during the period 1980-1986 and even declined by 1.1 H14 147 percent in 1987. Since 1988 growth rates have turned positive again H14 148 but remain modest.

H14 149 Much of the stagnation in economic growth revolved around the H14 150 inability of agriculture to outperform population increase, itself H14 151 primarily a reflection of low productivity and poor national H14 152 policies. Exports, which could have spurred real growth, were H14 153 hindered in most countries by overvalued exchange rates, lack of H14 154 price incentives to producers, and export taxes. Poor governmental H14 155 agriculture policies, in fact, seem to have been as important in H14 156 promoting agricultural decline in Africa as the general reversal of H14 157 commodity terms of trade during the 1970s and their stagnation in H14 158 the 1980s. This trend has been compounded by competition from Asian H14 159 and Latin American countries, whose share of agricultural exports H14 160 has expanded rapidly in the last decade.

H14 161 Slow growth of export-oriented agriculture has been accompanied H14 162 by a similar stagnation of smallholder food crop production and H14 163 productivity since the 1960s. This neglect of smallholder H14 164 agricultural development has operated in favor of H14 165 import-substituting industrialization. Although some countries were H14 166 successful in promoting exports for national growth (for example, H14 167 C<*_>o-circ<*/>te d'Ivoire, Cameroon, and Kenya), most were not. In H14 168 general, exploitation of natural forest or mineral resources and H14 169 capital-intensive, protected infant industries created pockets of H14 170 prosperity, yet bypassed the bulk of the population.

H14 171 In retrospect, it appears that African countries would have H14 172 been far more successful at reducing poverty and stimulating H14 173 economic growth had they focused on attaining an appropriate policy H14 174 environment and stimulating investment in smallholder agriculture H14 175 and health and education, while developing carefully their H14 176 comparative advantage in higher-value export crops. A broad-based, H14 177 small-farm approach could have stimulated family savings and H14 178 on-farm investment leading to increased food crop productivity and H14 179 diversification into specialized export crops. This could have H14 180 produced in many countries an economic transformation to H14 181 postsubsistence agriculture, while at the same time guaranteeing H14 182 increased food self-reliance.

H14 183 Social services and infrastructure investment spurred by the H14 184 apparent commodity export boom of the early 1970s, was replaced by H14 185 the mid-1980s by enormous debt service obligations and H14 186 macroeconomic adjustment programmes. This debt burden has increased H14 187 significantly since the mid-1970s; by 1987, debt outstanding was H14 188 nearly $129 billion, up from only $20 billion in 1975. By 1986, H14 189 debt service represented about 45 percent of African export H14 190 earnings, effectively stifling much potential for renewed economic H14 191 growth.

H14 192 In many countries, salaries now constitute an unacceptably high H14 193 share of government expenditures (70-85 percent), while essential H14 194 investment has dwindled to less than replacement levels. Social H14 195 indicators in many countries of Africa have stagnated or even H14 196 declined (except for immunization rates in some countries) during H14 197 the 1980s, and subsidized services remain untargeted on the poor H14 198 and tend to be disproportionately captured by the wealthier H14 199 classes. Primary education, sanitation and potable water services, H14 200 and basic health care have not been provided by African governments H14 201 at levels sufficient to match population growth, because of the H14 202 crowding-out effect of salary expenditures for oversized parastatal H14 203 and government bureaucracies, urban social services and H14 204 infrastructure, and more recently debt service obligations.

H14 205 2.2. Who Are the Poor?

H14 206 Comparatively speaking, most African populations are poor by H14 207 world standards. Moreover, the United Nations Development Programme H14 208 (UNDP) distinguishes various categories of poor: the chronic poor H14 209 at the margin of society, constantly suffering from deprivation; H14 210 the borderline poor, who are occasionally poor during the year H14 211 because of employment insecurity; and the newly poor, victims of H14 212 budgetary austerity under structural adjustment (UNDP, 1990). These H14 213 distinctions are important in the targeting of poverty reduction H14 214 actions within the context of an overall poverty reduction strategy H14 215 for the African Development Bank.

H14 216 The concern here is to identify the absolute poor, that is that H14 217 portion of the population in various countries with income per H14 218 person too low to afford 2,250 calories per day or basic H14 219 nutritional needs (Lipton, 1988). Although varying substantially H14 220 from country to country, a generally accepted per capita income H14 221 level for assuring nutritional adequacy is about $370 - adjusted H14 222 for purchasing power parity. This line is, of course, arbitrary and H14 223 represents a proxy indicator for serious material deprivation.

H14 224 The identification of an even lower level of poverty based on H14 225 an annual income of $275 per capita defines the extremely poor, or H14 226 'ultra-poor.' Both levels define poverty in absolute terms compared H14 227 to relative income levels based on country income or consumption H14 228 deciles or quintiles. H14 229 H15 1 <#FROWN:H15\>1. INTRODUCTION

H15 2 The United States Department of Energy's (DOE) Office of H15 3 Civilian Radioactive Waste Management (OCRWM) has prepared this H15 4 draft Strategy for parties with an interest in spent nuclear fuel H15 5 and high-level radioactive waste transportation activities. The H15 6 purpose of the Strategy is to inform the public what steps DOE will H15 7 take to ultimately develop an implementation plan to provide H15 8 funding and technical assistance to States and Indian Tribes as H15 9 required by Section 180(c) of the Nuclear Waste Policy Act, as H15 10 amended (NWPA). A schedule of when the steps will take place is H15 11 included.

H15 12 1.1 Purpose

H15 13 The NWPA directs DOE to dispose of the spent nuclear fuel H15 14 generated by commercial nuclear power facilities and high-level H15 15 radioactive waste from defense facilities. OCRWM was established to H15 16 carry out this mission. OCRWM is developing a transportation system H15 17 to support shipping of spent nuclear fuel to a Monitored H15 18 Retrievable Storage (MRS) facility, and spent nuclear fuel and H15 19 high-level radioactive waste to a final disposal repository.

H15 20 A 1987 amendment to the NWPA added Section 180(c) which states H15 21 that DOE:

H15 22 ...shall provide technical assistance and funds to H15 23 States for training for public safety officials of appropriate H15 24 units of local government and Indian Tribes through whose H15 25 jurisdiction the Secretary [of Energy] plans to transport spent H15 26 nuclear fuel or high-level radioactive waste .... Training shall H15 27 cover procedures required for safe routine transportation of these H15 28 materials, as well as procedures for dealing with emergency H15 29 response situations.

H15 30 Passage of Section 180(c) committed OCRWM to provide funding H15 31 for training and technical assistance for public safety officials. H15 32 OCRWM stated it will use a phased approach to deliver the H15 33 assistance. In the 1991 Draft Mission Plan Amendment, OCRWM H15 34 committed to define workable mechanisms for administering technical H15 35 assistance. Assistance will initially be for shipments to an MRS, H15 36 if an MRS site has been identified. OCRWM will begin providing H15 37 training assistance between 1993 and 1995 to jurisdictions along H15 38 the initial corridors from the utilities to an MRS; and make H15 39 adjustments and support retraining as needed, after 1995.

H15 40 This draft strategy represents a five-step process to meet the H15 41 requirements of Section 180(c). The steps are: (1) continue current H15 42 efforts with the interested groups to identify and discuss funding H15 43 and technical assistance issues; (2) develop a Policy Options Paper H15 44 to identify possible Section 180(c) implementation processes; (3) H15 45 issue a policy statement identifying the option selected; (4) issue H15 46 a plan detailing the implementation process; and (5) initiate H15 47 funding for 'training assistance.' For brevity, the term 'training H15 48 assistance' is used to mean 'technical assistance and funds to H15 49 States for training for public safety officials of appropriate H15 50 units of local government and Indian Tribes through whose H15 51 jurisdiction the Secretary [of Energy] plans to transport spent H15 52 nuclear fuel or high-level radioactive waste.'

H15 53 A notice of the availability of this draft for review by H15 54 Federal agencies, States, Indian Tribes, and interested parties H15 55 will be published in the Federal Register. The comments H15 56 received will be fully considered and will be reflected, where H15 57 appropriate, in the final strategy. All comments will be catalogued H15 58 and their disposition explained in writing.

H15 59 1.2 Scope

H15 60 This document presents the five-step process for OCRWM to H15 61 develop an implementation plan to meet the requirements of Section H15 62 180(c). The introductory section includes information on the H15 63 purpose of the Strategy; the legal requirements of the NWPA with H15 64 respect to technical assistance and funding to train transportation H15 65 corridor and host governments for safe routine transportation and H15 66 emergency response, and the relevant sections of the Hazardous H15 67 Materials Transportation Uniform Safety Act of 1990 (HMTUSA); H15 68 planning principles that address or incorporate recommendations H15 69 repeated most often by interested parties; and a proposed H15 70 schedule.

H15 71 The subsequent section, Issue Identification as an Interactive H15 72 Process, describes the methods and means OCRWM has employed to H15 73 ensure that all interested and potentially affected parties can H15 74 have an appropriate predecisional role in the development of H15 75 Section 180(c) policy. The three remaining sections delineate the H15 76 steps to provide training assistance.

H15 77 Accompanying the Strategy are lists of definitions and acronyms H15 78 in common usage throughout the document, and general references.

H15 79 1.3 Legal Requirements

H15 80 The NWPA contains provisions regarding technical assistance and H15 81 funding for training relating to transportation for both host and H15 82 corridor jurisdictions. Assistance provisions mandated by Section H15 83 180(c) apply to corridor States and Indian Tribes through whose H15 84 jurisdictions spent fuel and high-level waste are transported to an H15 85 MRS or repository. For corridor Indian Tribes H15 86 <}_><-|>though<+|>through<}/> whose jurisdictions DOE will H15 87 transport spent nuclear fuel and high-level waste, DOE will provide H15 88 direct funding to Indian Tribes as sovereign Nations.

H15 89 For a State or Indian Tribe that will host a repository, H15 90 Section 116(c) provides for financial assistance to the State, and H15 91 Section 118(b) insures financial assistance to an Indian Tribe, to H15 92 participate in "activities required by Sections 116 and 117 H15 93 or authorized by written agreement entered into pursuant to H15 94 subsection 117(c)." Section 117(c) of the NWPA states that H15 95 OCRWM will work with a State [or Indian Tribe] where a repository H15 96 is being constructed and with "the units of general local H15 97 government in the vicinity of the repository site, in resolving the H15 98 offsite concerns ... arising from accidents, necessary road H15 99 upgrading and access to the site, ongoing emergency preparedness H15 100 and emergency response, monitoring of transportation of high-level H15 101 radioactive waste and spent nuclear fuel..." under written H15 102 agreement.

H15 103 For a State or Indian Tribe who will host an MRS facility, H15 104 Section 149 of the NWPA extends the same "provisions of H15 105 Section 116(c) or 118(b) with respect to grants, technical H15 106 assistance, and other financial assistance...to the state, to H15 107 affected Indian Tribes and to affected units of local H15 108 government...in the same manner as for a repository."

H15 109 Section 403(d)(1) and (2) of the NWPA provides that training H15 110 assistance for an MRS or repository host State or Indian Tribe H15 111 would be through an agreement submitted by the Nuclear Waste H15 112 Negotiator to Congress "...and shall contain such H15 113 provisions as are necessary to preserve any right to participation H15 114 or compensation of such State, unit of local government, or Indian H15 115 Tribe under Sections 116(c), 117, and 118(b)."

H15 116 If DOE is unable to reach any agreement with the repository or H15 117 MRS host State or Indian Tribe under these sections, DOE shall H15 118 develop a policy to provide training assistance for emergency H15 119 response and safe routine transportation for a host State or Indian H15 120 Tribe within the scope of Section 180(c) training assistance.

H15 121 The recently passed HMTUSA amended the Hazardous Materials H15 122 Transportation Act of 1974. HMTUSA has emergency response and H15 123 Federal inspection provisions that have potential implications for H15 124 the technical assistance and funding required by Section 180(c).

H15 125 Section 17 of HMTUSA authorizes Federal funding for: 1) H15 126 planning grants to States to develop emergency response plans; 2) H15 127 training grants to States and Indian Tribes for training official H15 128 personnel in hazardous materials emergency response; 3) curriculum H15 129 development by a Federal committee to develop a list of courses, H15 130 recommend courses of study and minimum hours of instruction, and H15 131 develop appropriate emergency response training and planning for H15 132 non-Federal Government and Tribal employees under other Federal H15 133 grant programs; and 4) monitoring and technical assistance through H15 134 the Federal Emergency Management Agency, in coordination with four H15 135 other agencies including DOE, for non-Federal Government and Tribal H15 136 emergency response training and planning. HMTUSA also requires that H15 137 Federal departments, agencies, and instrumentalities coordinate to H15 138 minimize duplication of effort and expense in all emergency H15 139 response and preparedness training programs.

H15 140 Section 16 of HMTUSA directs the Secretary of Transportation H15 141 (DOT) to employ 30 additional hazardous materials inspectors, H15 142 including 10 of whom are to focus on promoting safety in the H15 143 transportation of radioactive materials.

H15 144 In order to ensure cooperation between DOT and DOE in H15 145 implementing both Section 180(c) and the relevant sections of H15 146 HMTUSA, DOE is represented on the HMTUSA Interagency Coordination H15 147 Group (ICG), and will coordinate with the ICG through the DOE H15 148 State, Tribal, and Local Working Group on Transportation Emergency H15 149 Preparedness.

H15 150 1.4 Planning Principles

H15 151 In carrying out the requirements to provide technical H15 152 assistance and funds for training, OCRWM is committed to an open H15 153 dialogue with all interested parties. Interested parties have H15 154 repeatedly requested that OCRWM include the following in its H15 155 implementation of Section 180(c). OCRWM is committed to fulfilling H15 156 these requests.

H15 157 <*_>bullet<*/>OCRWM will strive to develop a program with H15 158 enough flexibility to accommodate the wide variety of State, H15 159 Tribal, and local assistance needs.

H15 160 <*_>bullet<*/>OCRWM training assistance will be integrated into H15 161 current established Federal, State, and Tribal training assistance H15 162 structures.

H15 163 <*_>bullet<*/>OCRWM will integrate its Section 180(c) planning H15 164 with current DOT HMTUSA planning functions and rulemakings, where H15 165 possible.

H15 166 <*_>bullet<*/>OCRWM will seek input from the diverse and H15 167 broadly representative sources using a cooperative approach.

H15 168 <*_>bullet<*/>OCRWM recognizes that diverse interested groups H15 169 can make contributions to the decision-making process. OCRWM will H15 170 seek input in particular from representatives of transportation H15 171 corridor jurisdictions who will be directly impacted by NWPA H15 172 shipments.

H15 173 1.5 Schedule

H15 174 A proposed schedule for OCRWM to provide training assistance H15 175 for public officials is shown in Figure 1. The Section 180(c) H15 176 strategy will be flexible enough to accommodate changes in OCRWM H15 177 program schedule. Opportunities for ample interaction and H15 178 predecisional input from interested parties and the public have H15 179 been factored into the schedule. Current planning assumes that H15 180 OCRWM will accept spent fuel for shipping to an MRS in 1998. Prior H15 181 to 1994, OCRWM should be able to predict whether an MRS will be H15 182 available to receive shipments, and thus plan for training to H15 183 begin. Training assistance will depend on the location of an MRS H15 184 facility and the spent fuel acceptance schedule.

H15 185 2. ISSUE IDENTIFICATION: AN INTERACTIVE PROCESS

H15 186 Section 180(c) training assistance is of particular interest to H15 187 the State, Tribal, and local governments. OCRWM has utilized a H15 188 cooperative approach to identify, discuss, and resolve planning H15 189 issues to provide a viable training assistance program strategy.

H15 190 2.1 Activities to Date

H15 191 After the enactment of the NWPA in 1982, OCRWM initiated a H15 192 dialogue with interested parties to identify and resolve issues H15 193 related to OCRWM shipment planning. Interested parties included H15 194 Federal, State, and Tribal governments; the nuclear power H15 195 utilities; the transportation industry; special interest groups; H15 196 the media; and the public. OCRWM was able to use these interactions H15 197 to identify issues and formalize a resolution process. OCRWM H15 198 published its Transportation Institutional Plan (TIP) in H15 199 1986. The TIP identified emergency response, inspection, and H15 200 enforcement issues, and provided a foundation for issue discussion H15 201 and resolution processes that proved instrumental to developing H15 202 this Strategy document.

H15 203 The process to evaluate and resolve issues comprises continued H15 204 identification, coordination, research, and resolution of issues H15 205 using a combination of DOE policies and studies, work with regional H15 206 and national groups of States, Indian Tribes and technical H15 207 organizations, and interactions with interested parties.

H15 208 With the passage of Section 180(c) in 1987, the commitments H15 209 OCRWM had initiated regarding emergency response, inspection, and H15 210 enforcement, became mandates. OCRWM began planning to provide H15 211 training assistance, and resolve issues discussed in the TIP. As H15 212 stated above, issues regarding emergency response, inspection, H15 213 enforcement, and the implementation of Section 180(c) were H15 214 identified through a variety of program activities with interested H15 215 parties. These issues as stated in the TIP and discussed at TCG H15 216 meetings include OCRWM's need to:

H15 217 <*_>bullet<*/>Define roles and responsibilities

H15 218 <*_>bullet<*/>Define potential emergency situations

H15 219 <*_>bullet<*/>Define the appropriate emergency actions to be H15 220 taken by the first responders

H15 221 <*_>bullet<*/>Develop a set of inspection criteria

H15 222 <*_>bullet<*/>Develop a system for inspections

H15 223 <*_>bullet<*/>Determine training needs by assessing existing H15 224 training programs

H15 225 <*_>bullet<*/>Determine the definition of assistance

H15 226 <*_>bullet<*/>Determine eligibility for assistance

H15 227 <*_>bullet<*/>Assess potential funding and assistance H15 228 mechanisms

H15 229 <*_>bullet<*/>Explore the desirability of a training H15 230 certification or standards process

H15 231 <*_>bullet<*/>Determine an approach to the timing of training H15 232 assistance

H15 233 Additional issues may be identified through the resolution H15 234 process and through interactions with interested parties.

H15 235 2.2 Issue Resolution Mechanisms

H15 236 OCRWM and the interested parties are working together to H15 237 develop an efficient plan to provide training assistance to States, H15 238 Indian Tribes, and local governments. Some of the mechanisms that H15 239 currently provide forums for communication, issue identification H15 240 and resolution, and policy development include: OCRWM cooperative H15 241 agreements with national, regional, and technical groups; the H15 242 Transportation Coordination Group (TCG); the HMTUSA Interagency H15 243 Coordination Group; the Federal Radiological Preparedness H15 244 Coordinating Committee; and the Commercial Vehicle Safety H15 245 Alliance.

H15 246 Working groups are a significant communication mechanism. An H15 247 informal working group met following a TCG meeting in July 1989, to H15 248 discuss a rough outline of this strategy document. H15 249 H16 1 <#FROWN:H16\>It is equally clear that a State might temper such an H16 2 'any county' rule to the extent a reasonable assessment of H16 3 defendants' interests so justified.

H16 4 Here, Montana has decided that the any-county rule should give H16 5 way to a single-county rule where a defendant resides in Montana, H16 6 arguably on the reasonable ground that a defendant should not be H16 7 subjected to a plaintiff's tactical advantage of forcing a trial H16 8 far from the defendant's residence. At the same time, Montana has H16 9 weighed the interest of a defendant who does not reside in Montana H16 10 differently, arguably on the equally reasonable ground that for H16 11 most nonresident defendants the inconvenience will be great whether H16 12 they have to defend in, say, Billings or Havre. See Power H16 13 Manufacturing Co. v. Saunders, 274 U.S. 490, 498 (1927) H16 14 (Holmes, J., dissenting). Montana could thus have decided that a H16 15 nonresident defendant's interest in convenience is too slight to H16 16 outweigh the plaintiff's interest in suing in the forum of his H16 17 choice.

H16 18 Burlington does not, indeed, seriously contend that such a H16 19 decision is constitutionally flawed as applied to individual H16 20 nonresident defendants. Nor does it argue that such a rule is H16 21 unconstitutional even when applied to corporate defendants without H16 22 a fixed place of business in Montana. Burlington does claim, H16 23 however, that the rule is unconstitutional as applied to a H16 24 corporate defendant like Burlington that not only has its home H16 25 office in some other State or country, but also has a place of H16 26 business in Montana that would qualify as its 'principal place of H16 27 business' if it were a Montana corporation.

H16 28 Burlington's claim fails. Montana could reasonably have H16 29 determined that a corporate defendant's home office is generally of H16 30 greater significance to the corporation's convenience in litigation H16 31 than its other offices, that foreign corporations are unlikely to H16 32 have their principal offices in Montana, and that Montana's H16 33 domestic corporations will probably keep headquarters within the H16 34 State. We cannot say, at least not on this record, that any of H16 35 these assumptions is irrational. Cf. G. D. Searle & Co. H16 36 v. Cohn, 455 U.S. 404, 410 (1982); Metropolitan Casualty H16 37 Ins. Co. v. Brownell, 294 U.S. 580, 585 (1935). And upon H16 38 them Montana may have premised the policy judgment, which we find H16 39 constitutionally unimpeachable, that only the convenience to a H16 40 corporate defendant of litigating in the county containing its home H16 41 office is sufficiently significant to outweigh a plaintiff's H16 42 interest in suing in the county of his choice.

H16 43 Of course Montana's venue rules would have implemented that H16 44 policy judgment with greater precision if they had turned on the H16 45 location of a corporate defendant's principal place of business, H16 46 not on its State of incorporation. But this is hardly enough to H16 47 make the rules fail rational-basis review, for "rational H16 48 distinctions may be made with substantially less than mathematical H16 49 exactitude." New Orleans v. Dukes, 427 U.S. H16 50 297, 303 (1976); see Hughes v. Alexandria Scrap H16 51 Corp., 426 U.S. 794, 814 (1976); Lindsley v. Natural H16 52 Carbonic Gas Co., 220 U.S. 61, 78 (1911). Montana may H16 53 reasonably have thought that the location of a corporate H16 54 defendant's principal place of business would not be as readily H16 55 verifiable as its State of incorporation, that a rule hinging on H16 56 the former would invite wasteful sideshows of venue litigation, and H16 57 that obviating the sideshows would be worth the loss in precision. H16 58 These possibilities, of course, put Burlington a far cry away from H16 59 the point of discharging its burden of showing that the H16 60 underinclusiveness and overinclusiveness of Montana's venue rules H16 61 is so great that the rules can no longer be said rationally to H16 62 implement Montana's policy judgment. See, e.g., Brownell, H16 63 supra, at 584. Besides, Burlington, having headquarters H16 64 elsewhere, would not benefit even from a scheme based on domicile, H16 65 and is therefore in no position to complain of Montana's using H16 66 State of incorporation as a surrogate for domicile. See H16 67 Roberts & Schaefer Co. v. Emmerson, 271 U.S. 50, H16 68 53-55 (1926); cf. United States v. Raines, 362 U.S. H16 69 17, 21 (1960).

H16 70 Burlington is left with the argument that Power H16 71 Manufacturing Co. v. Saunders, supra, controls this H16 72 case. But it does not. In Saunders, we considered Arkansas' H16 73 venue rules, which restricted suit against a domestic corporation H16 74 to those counties where it maintained a place of business, 274 H16 75 U.S., at 491-492, but exposed foreign corporations to suit in any H16 76 county, id. at 492. We held that the distinction lacked a H16 77 rational basis and therefore deprived foreign corporate defendants H16 78 of the equal protection of the laws. Id., at 494. The H16 79 statutory provision challenged in Saunders, however, applied H16 80 only to foreign corporations authorized to do business in Arkansas, H16 81 ibid., so that most of the corporations subject to its H16 82 any-county rule probably had a place of business in Arkansas. In H16 83 contrast, most of the corporations subject to Montana's any-county H16 84 rule probably do not have their principal place of business in H16 85 Montana. Thus, Arkansas' special rule for foreign corporations was H16 86 tailored with significantly less precision than Montana's, and, on H16 87 the assumption that Saunders is still good law, see H16 88 American Motorists Ins. Co. v. Starnes, 425 U.S. H16 89 637, 645, n. 6 (1976), its holding does not invalidate Montana's H16 90 venue rules.

H16 91 In sum, Montana's venue rules can be understood as rationally H16 92 furthering a legitimate state interest. The judgment of the Supreme H16 93 Court of Montana is accordingly

H16 94 Affirmed.

H16 95 UNITED STATES v. ALVAREZ-MACHAIN

H16 96 CERTIORARI TO THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS FOR THE NINTH H16 97 CIRCUIT

H16 98 No. 91-712. Argued April 1, 1992 -Decided June 15, 1992

H16 99 Respondent, a citizen and resident of Mexico, was forcibly H16 100 kidnaped<&|>sic! from his home and flown by private plane to Texas, H16 101 where he was arrested for his participation in the H16 102 kidnaping<&|>sic! and murder of a Drug Enforcement Administration H16 103 (DEA) agent and the agent's pilot. After concluding that DEA agents H16 104 were responsible for the abduction, the District Court dismissed H16 105 the indictment on the ground that it violated the Extradition H16 106 Treaty between the United States and Mexico (Extradition Treaty or H16 107 Treaty), and ordered respondent's repatriation. The Court of H16 108 Appeals affirmed. Based on one of its prior decisions, the court H16 109 found that, since the United States had authorized the abduction H16 110 and since the Mexican Government had protested the Treaty H16 111 violation, jurisdiction was improper.

H16 112 Held: The fact of respondent's forcible abduction does not H16 113 prohibit his trial in a United States court for violations of this H16 114 country's criminal laws. Pp. 659-670.

H16 115 (a) A defendant may not be prosecuted in violation of the terms H16 116 of an extradition treaty. United States v. Rauscher, H16 117 119 U.S. 407. However, when a treaty has not been invoked, a court H16 118 may properly exercise jurisdiction even though the defendant's H16 119 presence is procured by means of a forcible abduction. Ker v. H16 120 Illinois, 119 U.S. 436. Thus, if the Extradition Treaty does H16 121 not prohibit respondent's abduction, the rule of Ker applies H16 122 and jurisdiction was proper. Pp. 659-662.

H16 123 (b) Neither the Treaty's language nor the history of H16 124 negotiations and practice under it supports the proposition that it H16 125 prohibits abductions outside of its terms. The Treaty says nothing H16 126 about either country refraining from forcibly abducting people from H16 127 the other's territory or the consequences if an abduction occurs. H16 128 In addition, although the Mexican Government was made aware of the H16 129 Ker doctrine as early as 1906, and language to curtail H16 130 Ker was drafted as early as 1935, the Treaty's current version H16 131 contains no such clause. Pp. 663-666.

H16 132 (c) General principles of international law provide no basis H16 133 for interpreting the Treaty to include an implied term prohibiting H16 134 international abductions. It would go beyond established precedent H16 135 and practice to draw such an inference form the treaty based on H16 136 respondent's argument that abductions are so clearly prohibited in H16 137 international law that there was no reason to include the H16 138 prohibition in the Treaty itself. It was the practice of nations H16 139 with regard to extradition treaties that formed the basis for this H16 140 Court's decision in Rauscher, supra, to imply a term in H16 141 the extradition treaty between the United States and England. H16 142 Respondent's argument, however, would require a much larger H16 143 inferential leap with only the most general of international law H16 144 principles to support it. While respondent may be correct that his H16 145 abduction was 'shocking' and in violation of general international H16 146 law principles, the decision whether he should be returned to H16 147 Mexico, as a matter outside the Treaty, is a matter for the H16 148 Executive Branch. Pp. 666-670.

H16 149 946 F. 2d 1466, reversed and remanded.

H16 150 REHNQUIST, C.J., delivered the opinion of the court, in which H16 151 WHITE; SCALIA; KENNEDY; SOUTER, and THOMAS, JJ., joined. STEVENS, H16 152 J., filed a dissenting opinion, in which BLACKMUN and O'CONNOR, H16 153 JJ., joined, post, p. 670.

H16 154 Solicitor General Starr argued the cause for the H16 155 United States. With him on the briefs were Assistant Attorney H16 156 General Mueller, Deputy Solicitor General Bryson, Michael R. H16 157 Dreeben, and Kathleen A. Felton.

H16 158 Paul L. Hoffman argued the cause for respondent. With H16 159 him on the brief were Ralph G. Steinhardt, Robin S. Toma, Mark H16 160 D. Rosenbaum, John A. Powell, Steven R. Shapiro, Kate Martin, H16 161 and Robert Steinberg.

H16 162 CHIEF JUSTICE REHNQUIST delivered the opinion of the Court.

H16 163 The issue in this case is whether a criminal defendant, H16 164 abducted to the United States from a nation with which it has an H16 165 extradition treaty, thereby acquires a defense to the jurisdiction H16 166 of this country's courts. We hold that he does not, and that he may H16 167 be tried in federal district court for violations of the criminal H16 168 law of the United States.

H16 169 Respondent, Humberto Alvarez-Machain, is a citizen and resident H16 170 of Mexico. He was indicted for participating in the kidnap and H16 171 murder of United States Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) H16 172 special agent Enrique Camarena-Salazar and a Mexican pilot working H16 173 with Camarena, Alfredo Zavala-Avelar. The DEA believes that H16 174 respondent, a medical doctor, participated in the murder by H16 175 prolonging Agent Camarena's life so that others could further H16 176 torture and interrogate him. On April 2, 190, respondent was H16 177 forcibly kidnaped<&|>sic! from his medical office in Guadalajara, H16 178 Mexico, to be flown by private plane to El Paso, Texas, where he H16 179 was arrested by DEA officials. The District Court concluded that H16 180 DEA agents were responsible for respondent's abduction, although H16 181 they were not personally involved in it. United States v. H16 182 Caro-Quintero, 745 F. Supp. 599, 602-604, 609 (CD Cal. H16 183 1990).

H16 184 Respondent moved to dismiss the indictment, claiming that his H16 185 abduction constituted outrageous governmental conduct, and that the H16 186 District Court lacked jurisdiction to try him because he was H16 187 abducted in violation of the extradition treaty between the United H16 188 States and Mexico. Extradition Treaty, May 4, 1978, [1979] United H16 189 States-United Mexican States, 31 U.S.T. 5059, T.I.A.S. No. 9656 H16 190 (Extradition Treaty or Treaty). The District Court rejected the H16 191 outrageous governmental conduct claim, but held that it lacked H16 192 jurisdiction to try respondent because his abduction violated the H16 193 Extradition Treaty. The District Court discharged respondent and H16 194 ordered that he be repatriated to Mexico. 745 F. Supp., at 614.

H16 195 The Court of Appeals affirmed the dismissal of the indictment H16 196 and the repatriation of respondent, relying on its decision in H16 197 United States v. Verdugo-Urquidez, 939 F. 2d 1341 H16 198 (CA9 1991), cert. pending, No. 91-670. 946 F. 2d 1466 (1991). In H16 199 Verdugo, the Court of Appeals held that the forcible abduction H16 200 of a Mexican national with the authorization or participation of H16 201 the United States violated the Extradition Treaty between the H16 202 United States and Mexico. Although the Treaty does not expressly H16 203 prohibit such abductions, the Court of Appeals held that the H16 204 'purpose' of the Treaty was violated by a forcible abduction, 939 H16 205 F. 2d, at 1350, which, along with a formal protest by the offended H16 206 nation, would give a defendant the right to invoke the Treaty H16 207 violation to defeat jurisdiction of the District Court to try him. H16 208 The Court of Appeals further held that the proper remedy for such a H16 209 violation would be dismissal of the indictment and repatriation of H16 210 the defendant to Mexico.

H16 211 In the instant case, the Court of Appeals affirmed the District H16 212 Court's finding that the United States had authorized the abduction H16 213 of respondent, and that letters from the Mexican Government to the H16 214 United States Government served as an official protest of the H16 215 Treaty violation. Therefore, the Court of Appeals ordered that the H16 216 indictment against respondent be dismissed and that respondent be H16 217 repatriated to Mexico. 946 F. 2d, at 1467. We granted certiorari, H16 218 502 U.S. 1024 (1992), and now reverse.

H16 219 H17 1 <#FROWN:H17\>The fact of respondent's forcible abduction does not H17 2 therefore prohibit his trial in a court in the United States for H17 3 violations of the criminal laws of the United States.

H17 4 The judgment of the Court of Appeals is therefore reversed, and H17 5 the case is remanded for further proceedings consistent with this H17 6 opinion.

H17 7 So ordered.

H17 8 JUSTICE STEVENS, with whom JUSTICE BLACKMUN and JUSTICE H17 9 O'CONNOR join, dissenting.

H17 10 The Court correctly observes that this case raises a question H17 11 of first impression. See ante, at 659. The case is unique for H17 12 several reasons. It does not involve an ordinary abduction by a H17 13 private kidnaper, or bounty hunter, as in Ker v. H17 14 Illinois, 119 U.S. 436 (1886); nor does it involve the H17 15 apprehension of an American fugitive who committed a crime in one H17 16 State and sought asylum in another, as in Frisbie v. H17 17 Collins, 342 U.S. 519 (1952). Rather, it involves this H17 18 country's abduction of another country's citizen; it also involves H17 19 a violation of the territorial integrity of that other country, H17 20 with which this country has signed an extradition treaty.

H17 21 A Mexican citizen was kidnaped in Mexico and charged with a H17 22 crime committed in Mexico; his offense allegedly violated both H17 23 Mexican and American law. Mexico has formally demanded on at least H17 24 two separate occasions that he be returned to Mexico and has H17 25 represented that he will be prosecuted and, if convicted, punished H17 26 for his offense. It is clear that Mexico's demand must be honored H17 27 if this official abduction violated the 1978 Extradition Treaty H17 28 between the United States and Mexico. In my opinion, a fair reading H17 29 of the treaty in light of our decision in United States H17 30 v. Rauscher, 119 U.S. 407 (1886), and applicable principles of H17 31 international law, leads inexorably to the conclusion that the H17 32 District Court, United States v. Caro-Quintero, 745 H17 33 F. Supp. 599 (CD Cal. 1990), and the Court of Appeals for the Ninth H17 34 Circuit, 946 F. 2d 1466 (1991) (per curiam), correctly H17 35 construed that instrument.

H17 36 I H17 37 The extradition treaty with Mexico is a comprehensive document H17 38 containing 23 articles and an appendix listing the extraditable H17 39 offenses covered by the agreement. The parties announced their H17 40 purpose in the preamble: The two governments desire "to H17 41 cooperate more closely in the fight against crime and, to this end, H17 42 to mutually render better assistance in matters of H17 43 extradition." From the preamble, through the description of H17 44 the parties' obligations with respect to offenses committed within H17 45 as well as beyond the territory of a requesting party, the H17 46 delineation of the procedures and evidentiary requirements for H17 47 extradition, the special provisions for political offenses and H17 48 capital punishment, and other details, the Treaty appears to have H17 49 been designed to cover the entire subject of extradition. Thus, H17 50 Article 22, entitled 'Scope of Application,' states that the H17 51 "Treaty shall apply to offenses specified in Article 2 H17 52 committed before and after this Treaty enters into force," H17 53 and Article 2 directs that "[e]xtradition shall take place, H17 54 subject to this Treaty, for willful acts which fall within any of H17 55 [the extraditable offenses listed in] the clauses of the H17 56 Appendix." Moreover, as noted by the Court, ante, at H17 57 663, Article 9 expressly provides that neither contracting party is H17 58 bound to deliver up its own nationals, although it may do so in its H17 59 discretion, but if it does not do so, it "shall submit the H17 60 case to its competent authorities for purposes of H17 61 prosecution."

H17 62 Petitioner's claim that the Treaty is not exclusive, but H17 63 permits forcible governmental kidnaping, would transform these, and H17 64 other, provisions into little more than verbiage. For example, H17 65 provisions requiring "sufficient" evidence to grant H17 66 extradition (Art. 3), withholding extradition for political or H17 67 military offenses (Art. 5), withholding extradition when the person H17 68 sought has already been tried (Art. 6), withholding extradition H17 69 when the statute of limitations for the crime has lapsed (Art. 7), H17 70 and granting the requested State discretion to refuse to extradite H17 71 an individual who would face the death penalty in the requesting H17 72 country (Art. 8), would serve little purpose if the requesting H17 73 country could simply kidnap the person. As the Court of Appeals for H17 74 the Ninth Circuit recognized in a related case, "[e]ach of H17 75 these provisions would be utterly frustrated if a kidnapping were H17 76 held to be a permissible course of governmental conduct." H17 77 United States v. Verdugo-Urquidez, 939 F. 2d 1341, H17 78 1349 (1991). In addition, all of these provisions "only H17 79 make sense if they are understood as requiring each treaty H17 80 signatory to comply with those procedures whenever it wishes to H17 81 obtain jurisdiction over an individual who is located in another H17 82 treaty nation." Id., at 1351.

H17 83 It is true, as the Court notes, that there is no express H17 84 promise by either party to refrain from forcible abductions in the H17 85 territory of the other nation. See ante, at 664, 665-666. H17 86 Relying on that omission, the Court, in effect, concludes that the H17 87 Treaty merely creates an optional method of obtaining jurisdiction H17 88 over alleged offenders, and that the parties silently reserved the H17 89 right to resort to self-help whenever they deem force more H17 90 expeditious than legal process. If the United States, for example, H17 91 thought it more expedient to torture or simply to execute a person H17 92 rather than to attempt extradition, these options would be equally H17 93 available because they, too, were not explicitly prohibited by the H17 94 Treaty. That, however, is a highly improbable interpretation of a H17 95 consensual agreement, which on its face appears to have been H17 96 intended to set forth comprehensive and exclusive rules concerning H17 97 the subject of extradition. In my opinion, "the manifest H17 98 scope and object of the treaty itself," Rauscher, 119 H17 99 U.S., at 422, plainly imply a mutual undertaking to respect the H17 100 territorial integrity of the other contracting party. That opinion H17 101 is confirmed by a consideration of the "legal H17 102 context" in which the Treaty was negotiated. Cannon v. H17 103 University of Chicago, 441 U.S. 677, 699 (1979).

H17 104 II H17 105 In Rauscher, the Court construed an extradition treaty H17 106 that was far less comprehensive than the 1978 Treaty with Mexico. H17 107 The 1842 treaty with Great Britain determined the boundary between H17 108 the United States and Canada, provided for the suppression of the H17 109 African slave trade, and also contained one paragraph authorizing H17 110 the extradition of fugitives "in certain cases." 8 H17 111 Stat. 576. In Article X, each nation agreed to "deliver up H17 112 to justice all persons" properly charged with any one of H17 113 seven specific crimes, including murder. 119 U.S., at 421. After H17 114 Rauscher had been extradited for murder, he was charged with the H17 115 lesser offense of inflicting cruel and unusual punishment on a H17 116 member of the crew of a vessel on the high seas. Although the H17 117 treaty did not purport to place any limit on the jurisdiction of H17 118 the demanding State after acquiring custody of the fugitive, this H17 119 Court held that he could not be tried for any offense other than H17 120 murder. Thus, the treaty constituted the exclusive means by which H17 121 the United States could obtain jurisdiction over a defendant within H17 122 the territorial jurisdiction of Great Britain.

H17 123 The Court noted that the treaty included several specific H17 124 provisions, such as the crimes for which one could be extradited, H17 125 the process by which the extradition was to be carried out, and H17 126 even the evidence that was to be produced, and concluded that H17 127 "the fair purpose of the treaty is, that the person shall H17 128 be delivered up to be tried for that offence and for no H17 129 other." Id., at 423. The Court reasoned that it did H17 130 not make sense for the treaty to provide such specifics only to H17 131 have the person "pas[s] into the hands of the country which H17 132 charges him with the offence, free from all the positive H17 133 requirements and just implications of the treaty under which the H17 134 transfer of his person takes place." Id., at 421. To H17 135 interpret the treaty in a contrary way would mean that a country H17 136 could request extradition of a person for one of the seven crimes H17 137 covered by the treaty, and then try the person for another crime, H17 138 such as a political crime, which was clearly not covered by the H17 139 treaty; this result, the Court concluded, was clearly contrary to H17 140 the intent of the parties and the purpose of the treaty.

H17 141 Rejecting an argument that the sole purpose of Article X was to H17 142 provide a procedure for the transfer of an individual from the H17 143 jurisdiction of one sovereign to another, the Court stated:

H17 144 No such view of solemn public treaties between the H17 145 great nations of the earth can be sustained by a tribunal called H17 146 upon to give judicial construction to them.

H17 147 The opposite view has been attempted to be maintained in this H17 148 country upon the ground that there is no express limitation in the H17 149 treaty of the right of the country in which the offence was H17 150 committed to try the person for the crime alone for which he was H17 151 extradited, and that once being within the jurisdiction of that H17 152 country, no matter by what contrivance or fraud or by what pretence H17 153 of establishing a charge provided for by the extradition treaty he H17 154 may have been brought within the jurisdiction, he is, when here, H17 155 liable to be tried for any offence against the laws as though H17 156 arrested here originally. This proposition of the absence of H17 157 express restriction in the treaty of the right to try him for other H17 158 offences than that for which he was extradited, is met by the H17 159 manifest scope and object of the treaty itself. Id., H17 160 at 422.

H17 161 Thus, the Extradition Treaty, as understood in the context of H17 162 cases that have addressed similar issues, suffices to protect the H17 163 defendant from prosecution despite the absence of any express H17 164 language in the Treaty itself purporting to limit this Nation's H17 165 power to prosecute a defendant over whom it had lawfully acquired H17 166 jurisdiction.

H17 167 Although the Court's conclusion in Rauscher was supported H17 168 by a number of judicial precedents, the holdings in these cases H17 169 were not nearly as uniform as the consensus of international H17 170 opinion that condemns one nation's violation of the territorial H17 171 integrity of a friendly neighbor. It is shocking that a party to an H17 172 extradition treaty might believe that it has secretly reserved the H17 173 right to make seizures of citizens in the other party's territory. H17 174 Justice Story found it shocking enough that the United States would H17 175 attempt to justify an American seizure of a foreign vessel in a H17 176 Spanish port:

H17 177 But, even supposing, for a moment, that our laws had H17 178 required an entry of The Apollon, in her transit, does it follow H17 179 that the power to arrest her was meant to be given, after she had H17 180 passed into the exclusive territory of a foreign nation? We think H17 181 not. It would be monstrous to suppose that our revenue H17 182 officers were authorized to enter into foreign ports and H17 183 territories, for the purpose of seizing vessels which had offended H17 184 against our laws. It cannot be presumed that congress would H17 185 voluntarily justify such a clear violation of the laws of H17 186 nations. The Apollon, 9 Wheat. 362, 370-371 H17 187 (1824) (emphasis added).

H17 188 The law of nations, as understood by Justice Story in 1824, has H17 189 not changed. Thus, a leading treatise explains:

H17 190 A State must not perform acts of sovereignty in the H17 191 territory of another State.

H17 192 It is ... a breach of International Law for a State to send its H17 193 agents to the territory of another State to apprehend persons H17 194 accused of having committed a crime. Apart from other satisfaction, H17 195 the first duty of the offending State is to hand over the person in H17 196 question to the State in whose territory he was H17 197 apprehended. 1 Oppenheim's International Law 295, and n. 1 H17 198 (H. Lauterpacht 8th ed. 1955).

H17 199 Commenting on the precise issue raised by this case, the chief H17 200 reporter for the American Law Institute's Restatement of Foreign H17 201 Relations used language reminiscent of Justice Story's H17 202 characterization of an official seizure in a foreign jurisdiction H17 203 as "monstrous":

H17 204 When done without consent of the foreign government, H17 205 abducting a person from a foreign country is a gross violation of H17 206 international law and gross disrespect for a norm high in the H17 207 opinion of mankind. It is a blatant violation of the territorial H17 208 integrity of another state; it eviscerates the extradition system H17 209 (established by a comprehensive network of treaties involving H17 210 virtually all states).

H17 211 H17 212 H17 213 H18 1 <#FROWN:H18\>Topics of Discussion for President's Trip to H18 2 Europe

H18 3 Secretary Baker

H18 4 Opening statement at news conference, the White House, H18 5 Washington, DC, July 1, 1992

H18 6 Ladies and gentlemen, let me quickly outline some of the H18 7 specific topics that the President will be looking to discuss on H18 8 his visits to Warsaw, Munich, and Helsinki.

H18 9 In Warsaw, the President will attend the repatriation of the H18 10 remains of Poland's pre-communist Prime Minister, Paderewski; a H18 11 symbolic return to an independent Poland. The President will H18 12 reaffirm America's strong support for democracy and economic H18 13 freedom in Poland and in Central and Eastern Europe, as a whole. He H18 14 will want to discuss the reform process with President Walesa and H18 15 explore some new ways that Poland and the international community H18 16 can work together to advance these courageous reforms. He will then H18 17 be in a position to share these ideas with his G-7 [Group of Seven H18 18 industrialized nations] colleagues.

H18 19 From Warsaw, the President will travel to Munich, of course, H18 20 for the G-7 summit. We hope that this summit will send a pro-growth H18 21 message that will reinforce the recoveries already underway in H18 22 several G-7 economies, including our own.

H18 23 The President's meeting with [Japanese] Prime Minister H18 24 Miyazawa, today, allows us to exchange perspectives on the topic of H18 25 growth a few days in advance.

H18 26 The President will also use the opportunity of the Munich H18 27 meeting to determine what further actions may be necessary to cope H18 28 with the humanitarian tragedy in Sarajevo. Our view is that we H18 29 should work with our friends and allies, particularly in the UN H18 30 Security Council, to see that relief supplies are delivered.

H18 31 At Munich, the leaders of the G-7 will also be meeting with H18 32 [Russian] President Yeltsin as a signal of their strong support for H18 33 Russia's bold reforms.

H18 34 Building on the Washington summit, President Bush will want to H18 35 continue his dialogue with President Yeltsin on further developing H18 36 our political partnership. He will also want to hear an update on H18 37 the state of Russia's reform program, and he will discuss how we H18 38 can work together to move forward with assistance from the IMF H18 39 [International Monetary Fund], the World Bank, and bilateral H18 40 assistance.

H18 41 Finally, as an important item on their collective agenda, the H18 42 G-7 leaders will discuss with President Yeltsin the steps we can H18 43 take to improve the safety of Soviet-designed nuclear reactors H18 44 throughout Eurasia.

H18 45 The final stop on the trip will be Helsinki, where the H18 46 President will be attending the summit meeting of the Conference on H18 47 Security and Cooperation in Europe -CSCE. In 1975, the first H18 48 Helsinki summit - Helsinki I - launched the CSCE and promoted the H18 49 values and the process that helped transform the shape of Europe H18 50 and end the Cold War.

H18 51 If Helsinki I helped usher in the final act of a divided H18 52 Europe, Helsinki II must help set the stage for a democratic H18 53 Eurasia by equipping CSCE to address more effectively the momentous H18 54 opportunities and challenges that we face today.

H18 55 In particular, CSCE is considering developing enhanced H18 56 capacities for conflict prevention and crisis management through H18 57 such steps as annual human rights meetings and a CSCE peace-keeping H18 58 role that would draw on the capacities of organizations like the H18 59 North Atlantic Treaty Organization, the North Atlantic Cooperation H18 60 Council, and the Western European Union.

H18 61 In addition, in Helsinki, we will lay the foundation for a H18 62 stable new European security order by encouraging the quick entry H18 63 into force of the CFE [Conventional Armed Forces in Europe] H18 64 Treaty.<*_>black-square<*/>

H18 65 H18 66 US Policy Toward UNESCO

H18 67 John R. Bolton, Assistant Secretary for International H18 68 Organization Affairs

H18 69 Statement before the Subcommittees on International Operations H18 70 and on Human Rights and International Organizations of the House H18 71 Foreign Affairs Committee and the Subcommittee on Environment of H18 72 the House Science, Space, and Technology Committee, Washington, DC, H18 73 June 25, 1992

H18 74 I appreciate the opportunity to appear before you to discuss H18 75 our policy toward UNESCO [UN Educational, Scientific and Cultural H18 76 Organization]. It is particularly timely to do so in the context of H18 77 the recently completed GAO [General Accounting Office] report on H18 78 the organization's management, administrative, budgetary, and H18 79 personnel practices.

H18 80 It has been 7 1/2 years since the United States withdrew from H18 81 UNESCO because of the organization's excessive politicization, poor H18 82 management, and runaway budgets. Since then, we have been working H18 83 with our allies, with the Secretariat, and with Director General H18 84 Mayor to promote reform. We have maintained a presence at UNESCO H18 85 through our Observer Mission, have attended every meeting of the H18 86 organization's governing bodies, and have made voluntary H18 87 contributions of approximately $2 million per year in support of H18 88 selected activities in which we continue to participate.

H18 89 We are, consequently, pleased to note that the GAO report H18 90 concludes that initial progress has been made in implementing H18 91 management reforms. We have reviewed the report and find it a H18 92 useful assessment of UNESCO's management practices. The report H18 93 states that it is too soon to judge the effectiveness of some H18 94 reforms. Knute Hammarskjold and Peter Wilenski, authors of a 1989 H18 95 study on UNESCO's management, said much the same thing last January H18 96 in a follow-up report on the implementation of their H18 97 recommendations: "Extensive progress in reform has been H18 98 made on a broad front but has not yet taken root...."

H18 99 The GAO report states that UNESCO has not solved long-standing H18 100 problems with consultants and program evaluation. It makes 12 H18 101 formal recommendations that address policies for decentralization H18 102 of activities and resources, program evaluation, procedures for the H18 103 use and control of supplementary staff, budget techniques, and H18 104 payroll controls. These recommendations and the other suggestions H18 105 made throughout the text provide helpful guidelines and a benchmark H18 106 for further progress.

H18 107 As we noted in the State Department comments included as an H18 108 appendix to the report, each of the recommendations is consistent H18 109 with goals sought by the Department of State for several years. In H18 110 this regard, we believe that our policy of insistence on real H18 111 change at UNESCO - before any consideration of re-entry into the H18 112 organization - has been a significant factor in motivating its H18 113 member states, governing bodies, and the Secretariat, itself, to H18 114 achieve the progress noted in the report.

H18 115 In contrast to this progress, there are other areas of UNESCO H18 116 policy which still deeply concern us. Particularly troubling was a H18 117 UNESCO mission to Iraq in February, reportedly undertaken in H18 118 cooperation with the UNDP [UN Development Program], to assess the H18 119 situation of education. While sympathetic to humanitarian H18 120 initiatives that meet essential medical and nutritional needs, we H18 121 are not inclined to stretch "essential civilian H18 122 needs" discussed in UN Security Council Resolution 687 to H18 123 repairing or replacing school buildings. Last August, the UN H18 124 Sanctions Committee informed UNESCO that it was unable to reach H18 125 agreement on the appropriateness of such a mission, and UNESCO H18 126 wisely canceled its plans to send an assessment team to Iraq.

H18 127 In September, the UNESCO Executive Board deferred, sine H18 128 die, consideration of any discussion of the situation of the H18 129 educational and cultural institutions in Iraq. In November, our H18 130 Mission to the United Nations informed the UNESCO representative H18 131 that we were not sympathetic to another UNESCO initiative to send a H18 132 mission to Iraq to assess the status of schools and cultural sites. H18 133 Nonetheless, a UNESCO/UNDP team spent 2 weeks in Iraq during the H18 134 month of February. In a March 3 letter to Director General Mayor, H18 135 the Kuwaiti Permanent Delegate to UNESCO expressed his surprise H18 136 that UNESCO would undertake such a mission in the light of the H18 137 board decision and the UN sanctions regime. The Director General H18 138 responded that the mission was undertaken in consultation with the H18 139 UN Interagency Humanitarian Program and did not contravene H18 140 Resolution 687. The officer-in-charge of the Office of the H18 141 Executive Delegate for Humanitarian Assistance indicated that the H18 142 Director General did not consult his office prior to making a H18 143 decision to send a mission to Iraq. We believe the action was H18 144 ill-advised, potentially detrimental to the sanctions regime, and H18 145 inconsistent with the spirit, if not the letter, of the Executive H18 146 Board decision to postpone consideration of the status of Iraqi H18 147 educational institutions.

H18 148 Turning once more to the GAO report, we believe that particular H18 149 attention should be given to the recommendation on better H18 150 application of the rules on the use of supplementary staff and fee H18 151 contracts to control the contract authorization procedure more H18 152 effectively and make it more transparent and uniform. This is of H18 153 considerable import in that supplementary staff costs and fee H18 154 contracts amounted to nearly $70 million during the 1990-91 H18 155 biennium. GAO found considerable gaps and inconsistencies in data H18 156 on supplementary staff. This raised doubts "about whether H18 157 UNESCO uses too many supplementary staff or validly employs H18 158 them." We endorse the Hammarskjold-Wilenski recommendations H18 159 that call for the introduction of a consistent and fair promotion H18 160 system based on merit, a better career development system, and H18 161 equal opportunity for women.

H18 162 The report underscores the need for significantly better H18 163 program evaluation. We concur and believe considerable improvement H18 164 in this area is needed if further program concentration is to be H18 165 achieved, as recommended in the report. Impact evaluations are H18 166 particularly wanting, both in number and in quality. GAO notes that H18 167 UNESCO has conducted only 16 impact evaluations since 1986, H18 168 covering only 8% of its activities, and that the appropriate H18 169 methodologies, in some instances, were not employed even for this H18 170 limited selection. Moreover, while guidelines exist for impact H18 171 evaluation, there is no overall plan to ensure that a reasonable H18 172 and representative selection of programs will be evaluated.

H18 173 Regarding decentralization, there is reason for concern at the H18 174 report's observation that 73% of UNESCO's total staff of 2,697 H18 175 persons is located in Paris and that the ratio of headquarters to H18 176 field staff has not varied since 1984. The report notes that a H18 177 higher proportion of funds are expended in the field than would be H18 178 expected by the distribution of staff; 44% of the 1990-91 regular H18 179 and extra-budgetary budgets was expended in the field. This, H18 180 however, is the same percentage as in 1988. Clearly, it is time for H18 181 the organization to develop the systematic approach to H18 182 decentralization mandated by the Executive Board at its November H18 183 1991 session.

H18 184 In conclusion, we concur with the GAO report's view that H18 185 initial progress has been made in implementing management reforms H18 186 at UNESCO. Based on the report's conclusions and the observations H18 187 of the Hammarskjold/ Wilenski report of last January, however, we H18 188 believe that much remains to be done and that what has been H18 189 accomplished needs to settle in and be institutionalized. We will H18 190 have more to say on this in the report on UNESCO that Congress has H18 191 asked us to submit later this summer. Finally, we will continue to H18 192 implement fully our current policy and work with UNESCO's governing H18 193 bodies, other governments, and the Director General to effect H18 194 further reform along the lines recommended in the GAO report. At H18 195 present, we do not believe the changes adopted warrant opening the H18 196 question of whether to rejoin the organization, at an expenditure H18 197 of approximately $55 million per year.<*_>black-square<*/>

H18 198 H18 199 US Policy Toward Iraq and the Role of the CCC Program, H18 200 1989-90

H18 201 Lawrence S. Eagleburger, Deputy Secretary of State

H18 202 Statement before the House Committee on Banking, Finance, and H18 203 Urban Affairs, Washington, DC, May 21, 1992

H18 204 Mr. Chairman and members of the committee, I plan this morning H18 205 to do my best to set the record straight on the US Government's H18 206 policy toward Iraq during the latter half of the 1980s and in 1990 H18 207 and to place in context the role of the Commodity Credit H18 208 Corporation (CCC) program. I intend to make clear that the H18 209 Administration followed a prudent policy toward Iraq at the time - H18 210 including the management of the CCC program - even though we, and H18 211 other governments, were ultimately unable to restrain Saddam H18 212 Hussein.

H18 213 In explaining US policy, I also plan to address many of the H18 214 factual and legal misstatements currently being put forth by H18 215 members of this committee. Quite frankly, the selective disclosure, H18 216 out of context, of classified documents has led -knowingly or H18 217 otherwise - to distortions of the record, half truths, and outright H18 218 falsehoods, all combined into spurious conspiracy theories and H18 219 charges of a 'coverup.' For those interested in the truth, let me H18 220 make the following 10 points:

H18 221 First, neither the Agriculture Department's investigation H18 222 of the Commodity Credit Corporation program, nor the US Attorney's H18 223 investigation of BNL [Banca Nazionale del Lavoro]-Atlanta has, to H18 224 date, established diversion to third countries of commodities sold H18 225 to Iraq or Iraqi misuse of the CCC program to purchase military H18 226 weapons.

H18 227 H19 1 <#FROWN:H19\>Combating Drug Money-Laundering

H19 2 The Problem

H19 3 In 1990, the Financial Action Task Force (FATF), an ad hoc H19 4 organization of 26 countries that have significant financial H19 5 centers, estimated worldwide proceeds from the production, H19 6 trafficking, and consumption of illicit drugs at more than $300 H19 7 billion.

H19 8 The Response

H19 9 In recent years, it became clear that campaigns against H19 10 money-laundering are an important tool to destabilize H19 11 drug-trafficking organizations.

H19 12 In 1988, nearly 100 governments approved the UN Convention H19 13 Against Trafficking in Illicit Narcotics and Dangerous Drugs, which H19 14 requires signatories to criminalize money-laundering and remove H19 15 bank secrecy barriers that inhibit criminal investigations. The H19 16 1989 economic summit, held in Paris, established the FATF to H19 17 develop recommendations for action.

H19 18 In 1990, the FATF endorsed 40 countermeasures, which it H19 19 recommended to governments throughout the world, calling for:

H19 20 <*_>bullet<*/> The criminalization of money-laundering;

H19 21 <*_>bullet<*/> Removal of legislative barriers to H19 22 investigations;

H19 23 <*_>bullet<*/> Reporting suspicious transactions;

H19 24 <*_>bullet<*/> Regulating non-bank as well as banking H19 25 institutions; and

H19 26 <*_>bullet<*/> Rendering assistance to other governments on H19 27 financial investigations.

H19 28 FATF recommends that each of the 26 participating governments H19 29 adopt and implement legislation to enforce these countermeasures. H19 30 They further recommend that, through an outreach program already H19 31 involving governments in Latin America, the Caribbean, Africa, the H19 32 Middle East, and Asia, participating governments seek concurring H19 33 legislation among all possible governments whose financial systems H19 34 are considered vulnerable to exploitation by traffickers.

H19 35 To bolster this effort, the 26 FATF members have agreed to H19 36 mutual evaluation, in which teams comprised of experts from other H19 37 member countries will assess each government on progress. This H19 38 commitment to examination, in addition to submitting annual H19 39 self-evaluations, has given the FATF greater political credibility. H19 40 The organization has established a secretariat through the H19 41 Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development in Paris.

H19 42 The European Community (EC) adopted a policy directive to guide H19 43 its 12 members in the implementation of the UN convention, going H19 44 beyond the convention in some key aspects - notably the requirement H19 45 for mandatory reporting by banks of suspicious transactions. The EC H19 46 is one of two regional members of FATF and works closely with that H19 47 body. A new convention, drafted by the Council of Europe, addresses H19 48 the critical issue of cooperation on asset forfeiture, which is H19 49 essential given the multiplicity of financial transactions that H19 50 today's traffickers are initiating through professional money H19 51 managers across the globe.

H19 52 The Future

H19 53 Money-launderers are using increasingly complex schemes to H19 54 avoid detection, such as employing a wide variety of monetary H19 55 instruments, non-bank financial institutions, and corporate shells H19 56 for placing money. The United States and other financial center H19 57 countries have changed strategies to counter these innovations.

H19 58 list

H19 59 The United States supports Colombian Government efforts to H19 60 target money managers. Raids on the Cali cocaine organization, for H19 61 example, resulted in the arrests of six leading managers and H19 62 seizures of millions in assets. These raids also yielded 300,000 H19 63 documents, which provide important new insights into how and where H19 64 money is laundered. The United States plans similar cooperation H19 65 with other governments in South America and Asia, the results of H19 66 which should force traffickers to increasingly expose their assets H19 67 by constant movements that should result in more seizures and H19 68 arrests.

H19 69 In 1992, FATF is focusing on non-bank institutions, while also H19 70 targeting corporate criminal liability and strengthening asset H19 71 forfeiture and seizure provisions.

H19 72 The Caribbean Group is expected to adopt more than 60 measures H19 73 unique to its region, and governments in Latin America and the H19 74 Caribbean are expected to take the first steps to implement model H19 75 legislation recommended by the Organization of American States. H19 76 Similar efforts will begin in other regions.<*_>black-square<*/>

H19 77 Controlling Chemicals Used in Drug Trafficking

H19 78 Chemicals are necessary for the production of cocaine, heroin, H19 79 and synthetic drugs. In order to curb drug production, the United H19 80 States is working to deny traffickers access to these chemicals.

H19 81 The extensive and competitive international commerce in H19 82 chemicals, however, complicates the design and adoption of H19 83 effective regulations to prevent diversion. Such regulations must H19 84 control the entire chain of a chemical transaction, from chemical H19 85 manufacturers through intermediaries to ultimate users, while not H19 86 unduly burdening legitimate commerce. They must be adopted by all H19 87 major chemical manufacturing and trading countries, in addition to H19 88 drug producing countries, to prevent traffickers from switching to H19 89 unregulated sources of supply.

H19 90 The 1988 UN Convention Against Illicit Traffic in Narcotic H19 91 Drugs and Psychotropic Substances outlines procedures for H19 92 controlling 12 of the most important drug-related chemicals. The H19 93 United States, other Western Hemisphere countries, and the European H19 94 Community (EC) have been leaders in adopting laws and regulations H19 95 incorporating them.

H19 96 The 1988 US Chemical Diversion and Trafficking Act placed 20 H19 97 chemicals under government control. In 1990, the Organization of H19 98 American States (OAS) adopted 'Model Regulations to Control H19 99 Precursor Chemicals and Chemical Substances, Machines and H19 100 Materials' which are forming the basis for chemical control H19 101 regulations in many OAS countries. They call for the regulation of H19 102 36 chemicals. The EC has adopted community-wide chemical control H19 103 regulations based on the 1988 UN convention to control chemical H19 104 trade with non-EC countries.

H19 105 Nevertheless, chemicals essential to the production of illicit H19 106 drugs are getting through for two basic reasons: the absence of H19 107 universal, uniform regulations; and the inability of many countries H19 108 to effectively implement their chemical control laws because they H19 109 do not have the regulatory infrastructure and trained personnel to H19 110 do so.

H19 111 We are attacking the problem on two fronts. Experience H19 112 demonstrates that the most effective chemical control action is H19 113 that taken by the exporting country prior to the exportation of H19 114 regulated chemicals. The United States chairs the G-7 Chemical H19 115 Action Task Force (CATF) which includes 26 other major chemical H19 116 manufacturing countries, drug manufacturing countries, and H19 117 concerned international organizations; the CATF has developed H19 118 comprehensive recommendations for chemical control, building on H19 119 procedures in the 1988 UN convention.

H19 120 list

H19 121 The extensive discussion in five meetings during 1990-91 on H19 122 these recommendations demonstrated to the CATF members that H19 123 chemical control is not only desirable but feasible and provided H19 124 uniform procedures to be incorporated in a chemical control regime. H19 125 The recommendations include five basic chemical control procedures H19 126 to be adopted at the national level to prevent diversion and the H19 127 addition of 10 chemicals to the 12 in the 1988 UN convention.

H19 128 These multilateral initiatives are being supplemented by US H19 129 Government bilateral initiatives targeted at the major cocaine H19 130 producing countries. We have chemical control agreements with H19 131 Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Panama, and Peru to facilitate the H19 132 exchange of information to determine the legitimacy of chemical H19 133 sales between our countries. The United States is funding chemical H19 134 control training through the UN Drug Control Program and the OAS H19 135 for the chemical and drug producing countries of Latin America. In H19 136 1991, national training workshops were conducted in Bogota, Mexico H19 137 City, Quito, and Santiago. The US Drug Enforcement Administration H19 138 conducts much of the training.

H19 139 The model regulatory regimes and chemical control training are H19 140 providing the foundation for enhanced international cooperation H19 141 between enforcement agencies of major chemical and drug producing H19 142 countries. Our chemical control objective is to extend adoption of H19 143 compatible chemical control regimes through the CATF to those H19 144 countries that do not have them, while enforcement agencies work to H19 145 improve cooperation within existing regulatory frameworks. The H19 146 ultimate objective is to make diversion control a standard part of H19 147 any transaction involving a drug-related H19 148 chemical.<*_>black-square<*/>

H19 149 Coca Production And the Environment

H19 150 The Problem

H19 151 Cocaine production causes serious - often irreparable - damage, H19 152 since coca is grown and processed in some of the world's most H19 153 fragile ecological zones. Coca farmers and the so-called chemists H19 154 who process the raw product for export irreversibly damage jungle H19 155 forests, soils, and waterways. The populations of the primary H19 156 Andean coca regions in Peru, Bolivia, and Colombia - largely H19 157 migrants who have come specifically to grow coca - have almost no H19 158 regard for the 'eyebrow of the jungle' region where the tributaries H19 159 of the Amazon begin.

H19 160 Although the US drug war seeks mainly to halt the devastation H19 161 caused by drugs to citizens and communities, the United States also H19 162 wants to stop environmental destruction. American drug users help H19 163 finance the environmental degradation, and the increasing number of H19 164 drug users in Europe, in neighboring Latin American countries that H19 165 serve as narcotics pipelines, and in the producer countries H19 166 themselves add to the market.

H19 167 Coca growers and processors damage the environment in three H19 168 ways:

H19 169 Deforestation. Deforestation increases erosion and soil H19 170 runoff, depletes soil nutrients, and decreases biological H19 171 diversity. As heavy rains erode the thin topsoil of the fields, H19 172 growers often must abandon their parcels to prepare new plots. H19 173 Traffickers also destroy jungle forests to build landing strips and H19 174 laboratories. A smoky haze covers much of the Huallaga Valley H19 175 throughout August and September as farmers slash and burn forests H19 176 to create new fields for coca production; much of the H19 177 coca-producing land is cut out of nature preserves and national H19 178 forests.

H19 179 Scientists in Peru report the irretrievable loss of plant and H19 180 animal species due to clearance of large areas of the country's H19 181 most biologically diverse region. Besides the 171,000 hectares of H19 182 coca cultivated in Bolivia and Peru, producers of illicit drugs H19 183 have deforested as much as 1 million hectares of fragile jungle H19 184 forest lands in the Amazon region.

H19 185 Use of Herbicides, Pesticides, and Fertilizers in Coca H19 186 Growing. Seeking to maximize their incomes and largely H19 187 ignorant about chemicals, coca growers dump great quantities of H19 188 strong pesticides, weedkillers, and fertilizers on their crops. H19 189 Peruvian environmentalists estimate that coca growers use 1.5 H19 190 million liters of paraquat each year in the Upper Huallaga Valley H19 191 alone. These chemicals saturate the soil and contaminate waterways, H19 192 poisoning the water system and destroying the species that depend H19 193 upon it. Although the extent of damage is still unknown, Latin H19 194 American environmentalists believe that the contamination is H19 195 spreading into adjacent ecological zones.

H19 196 Toxic Chemicals From Cocaine Processing. Cocaine H19 197 processing laboratories disposing of huge amounts of toxic H19 198 chemicals into nearby streams and rivers have killed several fish H19 199 species in Peru. Scientists estimate that pollution in Peru's H19 200 Amazon feeder rivers from Peruvian processing included, in 1 year, H19 201 the discharge of:

H19 202 <*_>bullet<*/> 57 million liters of kerosene - the equivalent H19 203 of one supertanker;

H19 204 <*_>bullet<*/> 22 million liters of sulfuric acid;

H19 205 <*_>bullet<*/> 16,000 metric tons of lime;

H19 206 <*_>bullet<*/> 3,000 metric tons of carbide;

H19 207 <*_>bullet<*/> 6 million liters of acetone;

H19 208 <*_>bullet<*/> 6 million liters of toluene; and

H19 209 <*_>bullet<*/> 10,000 tons of toilet paper.

H19 210 US Strategy

H19 211 Successful drug control strategies must weigh environmental as H19 212 well as social and economic effects. Since manual eradication of H19 213 coca bushes is very difficult, dangerous work and because of H19 214 environmental concerns about chemical eradication, the United H19 215 States - in consultation with Andean nations - is pursuing a H19 216 three-fold strategy.

H19 217 1. In Peru and Colombia - limit forced eradication to coca H19 218 seedbeds to reduce the spread of cultivation, while working with H19 219 local authorities and grower organizations to promote voluntary H19 220 eradication. (Some forced eradication of mature coca plants H19 221 continues in Bolivia, primarily in public areas such as national H19 222 parks.)

H19 223 2. Support alternative economic opportunities, crop H19 224 substitution, and other programs to provide growers with another H19 225 way to earn a living and escape from dependence on criminal H19 226 organizations.

H19 227 3. Attack the trafficker organizations by intercepting H19 228 their aircraft, seizing their assets, destroying their drug H19 229 production facilities, and reducing their supplies of chemical H19 230 inputs to stem their earnings.<*_>black-square<*/>

H19 231 Bolivia H19 232 US-Bolivian Relations

H19 233 Traditionally, the United States and Bolivia have enjoyed good, H19 234 friendly relations. Our goals in Bolivia are similar to those that H19 235 the current government has set for itself: to strengthen democracy, H19 236 institutionalize economic reforms, and eliminate narcotics H19 237 trafficking. The United States has a longstanding aid relationship H19 238 with Bolivia. Between 1945 and 1991, US economic assistance totaled H19 239 more than $1.6 billion.

H19 240 Bolivia is an active participant in regional organizations such H19 241 as the Organization of American States (OAS) and the Rio Group. The H19 242 country has a good human rights record and has created a legal H19 243 framework to encourage foreign private investment. The United H19 244 States has modest trade with Bolivia and is negotiating a bilateral H19 245 investment treaty.

H19 246 Since taking office in August 1989, President Jaime Paz Zamora H19 247 has met twice with President Bush. Vice President Quayle visited H19 248 the Bolivian capital, La Paz, in the fall of 1989.

H19 249 Political Conditions

H19 250 Bolivia is close to completing a decade of democratic H19 251 government. Since 1982, it has had two peaceful democratic H19 252 transitions. The Administration of President Paz Zamora is now in H19 253 its third year of its 4-year term. He has been a moderate, H19 254 pragmatic president. H19 255 H20 1 <#FROWN:H20\>The specific question raised by corporate integration H20 2 is whether the current distinction in the treatment of corporate H20 3 equity investments by tax-exempt entities (which bear the H20 4 corporate, but not the shareholder level tax) versus corporate debt H20 5 investments (which bear neither corporate nor debtholder level tax) H20 6 should be retained or decreased. An integration system best H20 7 fulfills its goals if it provides uniform treatment of debt and H20 8 equity investments by tax-exempt investors. Equating the tax H20 9 treatment of debt and equity will require either an increase or H20 10 decrease in the taxes on corporate capital supplied by tax-exempt H20 11 investors or the introduction of a separate tax on investment H20 12 income of these investors. As Section 6.D discusses, such a tax H20 13 could be designed to maintain the current level of tax on income H20 14 from corporate capital supplied by tax-exempt investors while H20 15 equalizing the treatment of debt and equity.

H20 16 6.B DISTORTIONS UNDER CURRENT LAW

H20 17 Current law encourages tax-exempt investors, like taxable H20 18 investors, to invest in debt rather than equity. Only two types of H20 19 income from capital supplied to corporations by tax-exempt entities H20 20 are actually tax-exempt. Interest paid by corporations is both H20 21 deductible by the corporate payor<&|>sic! and exempt from tax in H20 22 the hands of the tax-exempt recipient. Corporate preference income H20 23 distributed to tax-exempt shareholders also is exempt from tax at H20 24 both the corporate and the shareholder level. Non-preference income H20 25 is taxed at the corporate level, but is not taxed at the H20 26 shareholder level whether it is received by the exempt investor as H20 27 capital gains from the sale of shares or as dividends from H20 28 distributions. Thus, under current law, corporate income paid to H20 29 tax-exempt investors in the form of interest is not taxed at either H20 30 the corporate or investor level, while non-preference income H20 31 retained or distributed to tax-exempt shareholders is subject to H20 32 tax at the corporate level.

H20 33 Current law does not, however, encourage tax-exempt investors H20 34 to invest in equity of noncorporate rather than corporate H20 35 businesses, because, in both cases, the income is subject to one H20 36 level of tax. While corporate income (other than preference income) H20 37 allocable to tax-exempt shareholders is subject to tax at the H20 38 corporate level, the noncorporate unrelated business income of H20 39 tax-exempt investors generally is subject to UBIT. For tax-exempt H20 40 investors who invest in equity, current law generally also does not H20 41 affect their preferences for distributed or retained earnings. H20 42 Because corporate income (other than preference income) is subject H20 43 to current corporate level tax and both distributed and retained H20 44 earnings are exempt from tax at the shareholder level, a tax-exempt H20 45 shareholder has no tax incentive to prefer distributed earnings H20 46 over retained earnings.

H20 47 6.C NEUTRALITY UNDER AN INTEGRATED TAX SYSTEM

H20 48 Because of the asymmetric treatment of debt and equity H20 49 investments by tax-exempt entities under current law, an integrated H20 50 system can achieve neutrality between debt and equity investments H20 51 for tax-exempt investors only by either decreasing the tax burden H20 52 on equity income or increasing the tax burden on interest. A H20 53 straightforward decrease in the tax burden on equity investments H20 54 might be accomplished by removing the corporate level tax on H20 55 earnings distributed as dividends to tax-exempt investors. A H20 56 deduction for corporate dividends, for example, would achieve this H20 57 result. The contrary approach might subject interest income on H20 58 corporate debt earned by tax-exempt investors to one level of tax H20 59 (at either the corporate or the investor level).

H20 60 The first approach, taxing neither dividends nor interest paid H20 61 to tax-exempt investors, would lose substantial amounts of tax H20 62 revenue relative to current law. Extending the benefits of H20 63 integration to tax-exempt investors would add costs of H20 64 approximately $29 billion annually under distribution-related H20 65 integration and approximately $42 billion annually under H20 66 shareholder allocation. This revenue loss would increase the costs H20 67 of integration and would require offsetting increases in other H20 68 taxes or in tax rates, which might create or increase other H20 69 distortions. This approach also would distort the choice between H20 70 corporate and noncorporate investment for tax-exempt investors if H20 71 UBIT remained in place for noncorporate investment. If corporate H20 72 dividends were tax-exempt at both the corporate and investor level, H20 73 while earnings from businesses conducted directly or in partnership H20 74 form were subject to UBIT, a tax-exempt investor would always H20 75 prefer corporate dividends. Indeed, anti-abuse rules might be H20 76 required to preclude tax-exempt organizations from avoiding UBIT H20 77 altogether simply by incorporating their unrelated businesses.

H20 78 The second approach, taxing both interest and dividends at a H20 79 single rate, would reduce the current advantage of tax-exempt H20 80 investors relative to taxable investors. Tax-exempt investors would H20 81 no longer enjoy an after-tax return on a given corporate equity or H20 82 debt investment higher than that available to taxable investors. H20 83 The principal advantage of this approach is that it would equate H20 84 the treatment of debt and equity while maintaining the neutrality H20 85 between corporate and noncorporate equity for tax-exempt H20 86 investors.

H20 87 6.D GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

H20 88 This Report recommends that a level of taxation at least equal H20 89 to the current taxation of corporate equity income allocated to H20 90 investments by the tax-exempt sector be retained under integration. H20 91 The dividend exclusion prototype, described in Chapter 2, H20 92 essentially continues present law treatment of tax-exempt investors H20 93 under an integrated tax system, so fully-taxed corporate profits H20 94 would continue to bear one level of tax and preference income would H20 95 not be taxed at either the corporate or shareholder level. A H20 96 similar result can be accomplished under an imputation credit H20 97 system of integration, but a dividend deduction system would H20 98 eliminate the current corporate level tax on distributed earnings H20 99 on equity capital supplied by tax-exempt investors. Under the H20 100 shareholder allocation prototype described in Chapter 3, taxes are H20 101 collected at the corporate level on corporate income allocable to H20 102 investment by tax-exempt shareholders and no refund is provided to H20 103 nontaxable shareholders.

H20 104 Maintaining one level of tax on equity investments by H20 105 tax-exempt entities would promote one of the primary goals of H20 106 integration: achieving tax neutrality for all investors between H20 107 corporate and noncorporate investments. This choice is consistent H20 108 with a move to integration for taxable shareholders, because H20 109 choosing to reduce the double tax burden on corporate income H20 110 distributed to taxable investors does not necessarily dictate a H20 111 commensurate reduction in the tax burden on tax-exempt investors. H20 112 Finally, continuing to tax equity investments by the tax-exempt H20 113 sector avoids the revenue loss that would result if such H20 114 investments were completely tax-exempt. Increasing other tax rates H20 115 to compensate for such a revenue loss would entail other H20 116 inefficiencies.

H20 117 Some countries that have adopted integration have chosen to tax H20 118 separately corporate and other income allocable to tax-exempt H20 119 investors. For example, in moving to an integrated corporate tax, H20 120 Australia and New Zealand imposed a tax on the income of pension H20 121 funds, thus reducing the number of tax-exempt investors. In both H20 122 countries, the remaining tax-exempt investor base, such as H20 123 charities, is small. Australia imposed a 15 percent tax on H20 124 investment income earned by pension funds and made available the H20 125 full 39 percent imputation credit from dividends as a nonrefundable H20 126 offset. Australia did not project collecting more than a token H20 127 amount of tax from this tax on investment income: it devised the H20 128 mechanism to remove distortions between investing in domestic H20 129 corporations (which pay Australian tax) and investing in foreign H20 130 corporations (which generally do not). The new Australian system H20 131 also removes distortions between investing in equity and investing H20 132 in debt. New Zealand went further and repealed entirely the tax H20 133 exemption of pension funds; they now function basically as taxable H20 134 savings accounts. Under the U.K. distribution-related integration H20 135 system, the corporate level tax is not completely eliminated, with H20 136 the consequence that income distributed to tax-exempt shareholders H20 137 bears some tax burden.

H20 138 This Report also encourages an effort to achieve uniform tax H20 139 treatment of corporate debt and equity investments by tax-exempt H20 140 investors. Because of the important role played by the tax-exempt H20 141 sector in the capital markets, failing to create neutrality for H20 142 debt and equity investments by the tax-exempt sector would limit H20 143 the extent to which integration could achieve tax neutrality H20 144 between the two kinds of investments. This is achieved under CBIT H20 145 by treating tax-exempt shareholders and debtholders generally like H20 146 other suppliers of corporate capital, with tax imposed at the H20 147 corporate level.

H20 148 One potential alternative approach would tax all corporate and H20 149 noncorporate income allocable to investment by the tax-exempt H20 150 sector at a rate lower than the rate applicable to taxable H20 151 investors. Such a tax on the investment income, including dividends H20 152 and interest income, received by tax-exempt entities could be set H20 153 to achieve overall revenues equivalent to those currently borne by H20 154 corporate capital supplied by the tax-exempt sector. Under the H20 155 imputation credit prototype discussed in Chapter 11, for example, H20 156 imputation credits for corporate taxes paid would be allowed to H20 157 tax-exempt shareholders. To the extent that the credit rate exceeds H20 158 the tax rate on investment income, the excess credits could be used H20 159 to offset tax on interest or other investment income. In addition H20 160 to the substantial advantage of equating the tax treatment of debt H20 161 and equity held by such investors, such an approach would allow H20 162 tax-exempt investors to use shareholder level credits for corporate H20 163 taxes paid to the same extent as taxable shareholders. By doing so, H20 164 this approach would limit both portfolio shifts and other tax H20 165 planning techniques that might otherwise be induced by efforts to H20 166 distinguish among taxable and tax-exempt investors in integrating H20 167 the corporate income tax. A revenue neutral rate for such a system H20 168 would be in the range of 6 to 8 percent depending on the prototype. H20 169 This would approximate the current law corporate tax burden on H20 170 investments by tax-exempt shareholders.

H20 171 CHAPTER 7:

H20 172 TREATMENT OF FOREIGN INCOME AND SHAREHOLDERS

H20 173 7.A INTRODUCTION

H20 174 International issues are important in designing an integrated H20 175 tax system because there is substantial investment by U.S. persons H20 176 in foreign countries (outbound investment) and investment by H20 177 foreign persons in the United States (inbound investment). At the H20 178 end of 1990, private U.S. investors owned direct investments abroad H20 179 with a market value of $714 billion, and $910 billion in foreign H20 180 portfolio investment, while private foreign investors owned $530 H20 181 billion in direct investment in the United States and $1.34 H20 182 trillion in U.S. portfolio investment. U.S. investors received a H20 183 total of $54.4 billion income from their direct investments abroad H20 184 in 1990, and $65.7 billion of income from their foreign portfolio H20 185 investments, while foreign investors received $1.8 billion from H20 186 their direct investments in the United States in 1990 and $78.5 H20 187 billion from their U.S. portfolio investments.

H20 188 The income from transnational investments may be taxed by both H20 189 the country in which the investment is made (the host or source H20 190 country) and the country of residence of the investor (the H20 191 residence country). The United States uses two primary instruments H20 192 for mitigating the potential problem of double taxation: the H20 193 foreign tax credit and bilateral income tax treaties entered into H20 194 between the United States and about 40 other countries.

H20 195 Taxation of foreign investment by U.S. investors. The H20 196 United States taxes the worldwide income of its residents. The U.S. H20 197 tax on income earned by U.S. corporations or individuals through H20 198 foreign corporations is generally deferred until such income is H20 199 repatriated through dividend or interest payments to U.S. H20 200 shareholders or creditors.

H20 201 The United States allows taxpayers to claim a foreign tax H20 202 credit for qualifying foreign income taxes paid (the direct foreign H20 203 tax credit). Current law also allows corporate taxpayers that H20 204 receive dividends (or include Subpart F income) from at least H20 205 10-percent owned foreign subsidiaries to claim a foreign tax credit H20 206 for a ratable portion of the qualifying foreign taxes paid by the H20 207 subsidiary on the income from which the dividends are paid (the H20 208 indirect foreign tax credit). The portion of the foreign taxes H20 209 which taxpayers may claim as an indirect credit is proportional to H20 210 the fraction of the earnings of the foreign subsidiary distributed H20 211 or deemed distributed. The dividend income for U.S. tax purposes is H20 212 grossed up by the amount of the direct and indirect credits H20 213 claimed. The indirect foreign tax credit, like the dividends H20 214 received deduction available domestically, prevents multiple H20 215 taxation of corporate profits at the corporate level.

H20 216 The Code limits the maximum foreign tax credit to prevent the H20 217 foreign tax credit from offsetting taxes on domestic source income. H20 218 Separate limitations apply to several different kinds of foreign H20 219 source income (baskets) in order to restrict the use of foreign tax H20 220 credits from high-taxed foreign source income against low-taxed H20 221 foreign source income. H20 222 H21 1 <#FROWN:H21\>Radio Address to the Nation on Domestic H21 2 Reforms

H21 3 March 28, 1992

H21 4 Good morning:

H21 5 Many have called the 20th century the American Century. The H21 6 question before us today is about the next century, looking just a H21 7 few years ahead.

H21 8 Let me tell you a story that will help shape that century, a H21 9 story you probably haven't heard about. It's about a battle between H21 10 those who want to change things and those who want to protect the H21 11 status quo. And in this battle those who support change are telling H21 12 those who want to stand pat: lead, follow, or get out of the H21 13 way.

H21 14 Wednesday, those words were heard loud and clear. I'm talking H21 15 about how the Democratic Congress couldn't muster a two-thirds H21 16 majority; incredibly, couldn't even get a majority to override my H21 17 veto of the liberals' latest tax increase. This story you haven't H21 18 heard about is also unheard of. Only twice before in the last 60 H21 19 years has the House failed to muster a simple majority to override H21 20 a veto.

H21 21 Congressional liberals suffered this defeat for a simple H21 22 reason: Americans measure progress in people helped, not dollars H21 23 spent. And that's why I'm going to continue the fight to keep a lid H21 24 on Federal spending. It's also why I ask Senator McCain of Arizona H21 25 and Congressman Harris Fawell of Illinois to formally introduce H21 26 legislation to endorse the 68 rescissions I announced last week to H21 27 cut nearly $4 billion in waste from a bloated Federal Budget.

H21 28 Unlike liberal Democrats, given our big deficit, I don't think H21 29 the Federal Government can afford to fund prickly pear research or H21 30 study asparagus yield declines. Those who reject these pork barrel H21 31 projects will stand with me and the American taxpayer. Those who H21 32 support them will have to explain in November why the public H21 33 interest has been denied.

H21 34 If enough members demand it, Congress must vote on each of H21 35 these bills, yes or no, up or down. I'm going to work with those H21 36 who want the Congress to be accountable and fight those who will H21 37 try to block our initiatives through parliamentary gimmicks. I know H21 38 that Government is too big and spends too much. And now let's see H21 39 where Congress stands. Stay tuned, keep listening. We'll find out H21 40 who really wants to cut spending and who just wants to keep the H21 41 pork.

H21 42 In a world more driven by economic competition than ever H21 43 before, the challenge I am referring to is crucial to our future. I H21 44 mean reform of the American Government. During the last decade, one H21 45 institution after another has looked within itself, decided on H21 46 improvements, and acted to fix its problems and reflect its H21 47 principles. Our task now is to bring that process of reform to the H21 48 United States Government. All of us know Government's problem, too H21 49 often it is not accountable, not effective, not efficient. It's not H21 50 even compassionate. Only by changing it can we protect America's H21 51 general interest against selfish, special interests.

H21 52 My rescissions will help knock out one part of the special H21 53 interest problem at work in Congress today, but the changes I want H21 54 are even bigger. I want to end the PAC contributions which are H21 55 corrupting our system. I want to place term limits on Congress, and H21 56 I want to lead the American people in making changes that will make H21 57 the 21st century another American Century.

H21 58 One challenge is to make our people educated, literate, and H21 59 motivated to keep learning. And that's why I'm trying to reform our H21 60 education system from top to bottom.

H21 61 Our people must have a sense of well-being about their health H21 62 and that of their children and families. My health care reform plan H21 63 will guarantee them access to the finest health care system in the H21 64 world and make that care affordable.

H21 65 And next, help me return our civil justice system to its H21 66 original purpose: dispense justice with civility. Eighteen million H21 67 lawsuits a year are choking us, costing individuals and businesses H21 68 billions, a tremendous drag on our morale as well as our H21 69 economy.

H21 70 And in the next century, as we look at the likely economic H21 71 competition as well as the likely opportunities, they will be H21 72 beyond our borders. That means we must open up more foreign markets H21 73 to sell our goods and our services and to sustain and create jobs H21 74 for our people.

H21 75 Reform of Government, education, health care, our legal system, H21 76 opening markets abroad: addressing these issues is fundamental to H21 77 America's future. Already America has changed the world. Today I'm H21 78 asking you to help me change America. If Congress won't change, H21 79 we'll have to change the Congress. The battle has been joined, and H21 80 it's your future that we're fighting for.

H21 81 Thank you for your support. And may God bless the United States H21 82 of America.

H21 83 Note: This address was recorded at 10:30 a.m. on March 27 H21 84 in the Oval Office at the White House for broadcast after 9 a.m. on H21 85 March 28.

H21 86 Remarks to State Attorneys General

H21 87 March 30, 1992

H21 88 Well, may I salute Ken Eikenberry and Jeff Amestoy and all the H21 89 State attorney generals, and salute also - whoops, there he is down H21 90 there - our own Bill Barr, who I think is doing an outstanding job. H21 91 And I know he's working closely with everybody in this room.

H21 92 Bill has his forces moving out on several fronts, from tort H21 93 reform to relief of prison overcrowding. We've also started what we H21 94 call the Weed and Seed initiative, our plan to get the roots, rip H21 95 them out of the inner-city violence, and then plant seeds H21 96 of hope with more educational opportunity, with more job training, H21 97 with a new approach to health care. And then we are going to keep H21 98 hammering away on the need for enterprise zones. This plan joins H21 99 Federal, State, and local forces to go after and to take back our H21 100 hardest-hit neighborhoods. They're crucial missions, and I am H21 101 determined to see them achieved and let nothing stand in the H21 102 way.

H21 103 The efforts of the Justice Department help shape the kind of H21 104 legacy that we leave for future generations. And our children must H21 105 inherit a society that is safe, is sane and just. And I've also H21 106 spoken of other meaningful legacies like jobs and a world at peace H21 107 and certainly, strong families. The American heritage which I H21 108 describe is one where children can sit on their porch without the H21 109 fear of getting caught in an ugly crossfire, where decent people H21 110 don't have to hide behind locked doors while gangs roam the H21 111 streets, where the message is clear: when it comes to the law, if H21 112 you're going to take liberties, you're going to lose your own, H21 113 you're going to pay.

H21 114 We cannot pass this legacy onto our children tomorrow unless we H21 115 start going after tough crime legislation today. And for 3 years H21 116 running, we have called on the Congress to pass a tough crime bill. H21 117 We've pushed hard. Many of you have been at our side in trying to H21 118 get something done. I want a bill that won't tie the hands of the H21 119 honest cops in trying to get their jobs done, one that shows less H21 120 sympathy for the criminals and certainly more for the victims of H21 121 crime. And most of all, I want to get a crime bill that I can H21 122 sign.

H21 123 But law and order mean more than just safe streets and bigger H21 124 prisons. Reforming the system also means going after public H21 125 corruption in our cities and our States, the rot that eats away at H21 126 our institutions and at our trust. Over the past 3 years, this H21 127 administration has moved aggressively to hunt down corruption and H21 128 stop it dead in its tracks.

H21 129 For the record, in '89 and '90 alone the Department secured H21 130 over 2,200 convictions, 2,200 in public corruption cases. Judges, H21 131 legislators, and law enforcement officials, part-time crooks, H21 132 full-time fakes: Nobody is immune. And this kind of crime does H21 133 society real harm because these swindlers aren't satisfied merely H21 134 with making crime pay; they stick the taxpayer with the tab. And H21 135 millions and millions of hard-earned tax dollars are disappearing H21 136 from public treasuries every single year and showing up in H21 137 corruption's back pocket. And this is money that could be building H21 138 roads or balancing budgets. I am preaching to the choir on this H21 139 subject because you all are out there on the cutting edge, on the H21 140 front line all the time, trying to do something about the H21 141 problem.

H21 142 But the problem is greater than a few individuals who stopped H21 143 caring. The problem is a system that has stopped working. And the H21 144 old bureaucratic system of big Government has ground to a halt. And H21 145 it's not accountable; it is not effective; and it is not efficient. H21 146 It's not even compassionate. And the chronic problems we see today H21 147 are sad proof that the old approaches are producing new H21 148 failures.

H21 149 So in this election year, it's understandable, I'm sure, that H21 150 we hear a lot of talk about change. You all have been fighting for H21 151 change; I think I have. And yes, the time has come for change, H21 152 far-reaching, fundamental reform. That's the kind of change that H21 153 his country needs in the fighting-crime field. Not just in fighting H21 154 crime, incidentally, and not just in Government but all across the H21 155 board.

H21 156 And that's why I've - proposing school choice reform - just H21 157 finished almost an hour meeting with our Secretary of Education on H21 158 that one. So the choices about education can be made from the H21 159 kitchen table, not from the halls of bureaucracy. Where it's been H21 160 tried, it has been effective in improving the schools that are not H21 161 chosen as well as those that are.

H21 162 And I've proposed a health care reform to improve access for H21 163 those who need it the most. Legal reform, we need your help on. H21 164 We've got good proposals up there on Capitol Hill. Our legal reform H21 165 is shaped so that Americans can start solving their problems face H21 166 to face instead of lawyer to lawyer. I'm amazed at the number, the H21 167 great increase in lawsuits that is really putting a damper on so H21 168 many aspects in our society.

H21 169 The kind of change that I'm describing is hard. It has its H21 170 enemies, and the battle lines have been drawn: the allies of change H21 171 versus the defenders of the status quo. So, I want to make it very H21 172 clear which side I'm on; I know which side many of you are on.

H21 173 So, let the cynics say that this is only a fight for the next H21 174 election. We know it's a battle for the next generation. And I'm H21 175 very glad you all are here. And what we'll do is go over here, and H21 176 I'd love to have suggestions from you as to how we might be doing H21 177 our job better down here. And of course, I'd be glad to take H21 178 questions and if they're technical, I'll kick them off to perhaps H21 179 the most able Attorney General a guy could hope to have with H21 180 him.

H21 181 Thank you all very much.

H21 182 Note: The President spoke at 10:36 a.m. in the Roosevelt H21 183 Room at the White House. In his remarks, he referred to Kenneth O. H21 184 Eikenberry, attorney general of Washington, and Jeffrey L. Amestoy, H21 185 attorney general of Vermont.

H21 186 Exchange With Reporters Prior to a Meeting With President H21 187 George Vassiliou of Cyprus

H21 188 March 30, 1992

H21 189 Cyprus

H21 190 Q. President Vassiliou, are you going to ask the United H21 191 States to pressure Mr. Denktash to make some progress?

H21 192 President Vassiliou. Well, I am grateful to the H21 193 President for his support for a solution of the Cyprus problem, and H21 194 I'm sure that the fact that he's meeting here, with him in an H21 195 election campaign period, is the best proof of his interest. And H21 196 I'm grateful.

H21 197 President Bush. I am interested, and I just hope we H21 198 can help. Our Ambassador's been wonderful and tried, a special H21 199 Ambassador, but now he's going on to greater pursuits. But we can't H21 200 let him get too far away because he's very interested in all of H21 201 that. No, but we'll talk about it, and I think your visit up there H21 202 in New York probably is very important. I hope the new H21 203 Secretary-General is energized. H21 204 H22 1 <#FROWN:H22\>PART ONE

H22 2 GENERAL PART

H22 3 Chapter One

H22 4 Objectives

H22 5 Article 101: Establishment of the Free Trade Area

H22 6 The Parties to this Agreement, consistent with Article XXIV of H22 7 the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, hereby H22 8 establish a free trade area.

H22 9 Article 102: Objectives

H22 10 1. The objectives of this Agreement, as elaborated more H22 11 specifically through its principles and rules, including national H22 12 treatment, most-favored-nation treatment and transparency, are H22 13 to:

H22 14 (a) eliminate barriers to trade in, and facilitate the H22 15 cross-border movement of, goods and services between the H22 16 territories of the Parties;

H22 17 (b) promote conditions of fair competition in the free trade H22 18 area;

H22 19 (c) increase substantially investment opportunities in the H22 20 territories of the Parties;

H22 21 (d) provide adequate and effective protection and enforcement H22 22 of intellectual property rights in each Party's territory;

H22 23 (e) create effective procedures for the implementation and H22 24 application of this Agreement, for its joint administration and for H22 25 the resolution of disputes; and

H22 26 (f) establish a framework for further trilateral, regional and H22 27 multilateral cooperation to expand and enhance the benefits of this H22 28 Agreement.

H22 29 2. The Parties shall interpret and apply the provisions of this H22 30 Agreement in the light of its objectives set out in paragraph 1 and H22 31 in accordance with applicable rules of international law.

H22 32 Article 103: Relation to Other Agreements

H22 33 1. The Parties affirm their existing rights and obligations H22 34 with respect to each other under the General Agreement of H22 35 Tariffs and Trade and other agreements to which such Parties H22 36 are party.

H22 37 2. In the event of any inconsistency between this Agreement and H22 38 such other agreements, this Agreement shall prevail to the extent H22 39 of the inconsistency, except as otherwise provided in this H22 40 Agreement.

H22 41 Article 104: Relation to Environmental and Conservation H22 42 Agreements

H22 43 1. In the event of any inconsistency between this Agreement and H22 44 the specific trade obligations set out in:

H22 45 (a) the Convention on International Trade in Endangered H22 46 Species of Wild Fauna and Flora, done at Washington, March 3, H22 47 1973, as amended June 22, 1979,

H22 48 (b) the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the H22 49 Ozone Layer, done at Montreal, September 16, 1987, as amended H22 50 June 29, 1990,

H22 51 (c) the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary H22 52 Movements of Hazardous Wastes and Their Disposal, done at H22 53 Basel, March 22, 1989, on its entry into force for Canada, Mexico H22 54 and the United States, or

H22 55 (d) the agreements set out in Annex 104.1,

H22 56 such obligations shall prevail to the extent of the H22 57 inconsistency, provided that where a Party has a choice among H22 58 equally effective and reasonably available means of complying with H22 59 such obligations, the Party chooses the alternative that is the H22 60 least inconsistent with the other provisions of this Agreement.

H22 61 2. The Parties may agree in writing to modify Annex 104.1 to H22 62 include any amendment to an agreement referred to in paragraph 1, H22 63 and any other environmental or conservation agreement.

H22 64 Article 105: Extent of Obligations

H22 65 The Parties shall ensure that all necessary measures are taken H22 66 in order to give effect to the provisions of this Agreement, H22 67 including their observance, except as otherwise provided in this H22 68 Agreement, by state and provincial governments.

H22 69 Annex 104.1

H22 70 Bilateral and Other Environmental and Conservation H22 71 Agreements

H22 72 1. The Agreement Between the Government of Canada and the H22 73 Government of the United States of America Concerning the H22 74 Transboundary Movement of Hazardous Waste, signed at Ottawa, H22 75 October 28, 1986.

H22 76 2. The Agreement Between the United States of America and H22 77 the United Mexican States on Cooperation for the Protection and H22 78 Improvement of the Environment in the Border Area, signed at H22 79 La Paz, Baja California Sur, August 14, 1983.

H22 80 Chapter Two

H22 81 General Definitions

H22 82 Article 201: Definitions of General Application

H22 83 1. For purposes of this Agreement, unless otherwise H22 84 specified:

H22 85 Commission means the Free Trade Commission established H22 86 under Article 2001(1) (The Free Trade Commission);

H22 87 Customs Valuation Code means the Agreement on H22 88 Implementation of Article VII of the General Agreement on Tariffs H22 89 and Trade, including its interpretative notes;

H22 90 days means calendar days, including weekends and H22 91 holidays;

H22 92 enterprise means any entity constituted or organized under H22 93 applicable law, whether or not for profit, and whether H22 94 privately-owned or governmentally-owned, including any corporation, H22 95 trust, partnership, sole proprietorship, joint venture or other H22 96 association;

H22 97 enterprise of a Party means an enterprise constituted H22 98 or organized under the law of a Party;

H22 99 existing means in effect on the date of entry into force H22 100 of this Agreement;

H22 101 Generally Accepted Accounting Principles means the H22 102 recognized consensus or substantial authoritative support in the H22 103 territory of a Party with respect to the recording of revenues, H22 104 expenses, costs, assets and liabilities, disclosure of information H22 105 and preparation of financial statements. These standards may be H22 106 broad guidelines of general application as well as detailed H22 107 standards, practices and procedures;

H22 108 goods of a Party means domestic products as these are H22 109 understood in the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade H22 110 or such goods as the Parties may agree, and includes originating H22 111 goods of that Party;

H22 112 Harmonized System (HS) means the Harmonized Commodity H22 113 Description and Coding System, and its legal notes, as adopted H22 114 and implemented by the Parties in their respective tariff laws;

H22 115 measure includes any law, regulation, procedure, H22 116 requirement or practice;

H22 117 national means a natural person who is a citizen or H22 118 permanent resident of a Party and any other natural person referred H22 119 to in Annex 201.1;

H22 120 originating means qualifying under the rules of origin set H22 121 out in Chapter Four (Rules of Origin);

H22 122 person means a natural person or an enterprise;

H22 123 person of a Party means a national, or an enterprise H22 124 of a Party;

H22 125 Secretariat means the Secretariat established under H22 126 Article 2002(1) (The Secretariat);

H22 127 state enterprise means an enterprise that is owned, H22 128 or controlled through ownership interests, by a Party; and

H22 129 territory means for a Party the territory of that Party as H22 130 set out in Annex 201.1.

H22 131 2. For purposes of this Agreement, unless otherwise specified, H22 132 a reference to a state or province includes local governments of H22 133 that state or province.

H22 134 Annex 201.1

H22 135 Country-Specific Definitions

H22 136 For purposes of this Agreement, unless otherwise specified:

H22 137 national also includes:

H22 138 (a) with respect to Mexico, a national or a citizen according H22 139 to Articles 30 and 34, respectively, of the Mexican Constitution; H22 140 and

H22 141 (b) with respect to the United States, "national of the H22 142 United States" as defined in the existing provisions of the H22 143 Immigration and Nationality Act;

H22 144 territory means:

H22 145 (a) with respect to Canada, the territory to which its customs H22 146 laws apply, including any areas beyond the territorial seas of H22 147 Canada within which, in accordance with international law and its H22 148 domestic law, Canada may exercise rights with respect to the seabed H22 149 and subsoil and their natural resources;

H22 150 (b) with respect to Mexico,

H22 151 (i) the states of the Federation and the Federal District,

H22 152 (ii) the islands, including the reefs and keys, in adjacent H22 153 seas,

H22 154 (iii) the islands of Guadalupe and Revillagigedo situated in H22 155 the Pacific Ocean,

H22 156 (iv) the continental shelf and the submarine shelf of such H22 157 islands, keys and reefs,

H22 158 (v) the waters of the territorial seas, in accordance with H22 159 international law, and its interior maritime waters,

H22 160 (vi) the space located above the national territory, in H22 161 accordance with international law, and

H22 162 (vii) any areas beyond the territorial seas of Mexico within H22 163 which, in accordance with international law, including the H22 164 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, and its H22 165 domestic law, Mexico may exercise rights with respect to the seabed H22 166 and subsoil and their natural resources; and

H22 167 (c) with respect to the United States,

H22 168 (i) the customs territory of the United States, which includes H22 169 the 50 states, the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico,

H22 170 (ii) the foreign trade zones located in the United States and H22 171 Puerto Rico, and

H22 172 (iii) any areas beyond the territorial seas of the United H22 173 States within which, in accordance with international law and its H22 174 domestic law, the United States may exercise rights with respect to H22 175 the seabed and subsoil and their natural resources.

H22 176 PART TWO

H22 177 TRADE IN GOODS

H22 178 Chapter Three

H22 179 National Treatment and Market Access for Goods

H22 180 Article 300: Scope and Coverage

H22 181 This Chapter applies to trade in goods of a Party, H22 182 including:

H22 183 (a) goods covered by Annex 300-A (Trade and Investment in the H22 184 Automotive Sector),

H22 185 (b) goods covered by Annex 300-B (Textile and Apparel Goods), H22 186 and

H22 187 (c) goods covered by another Chapter in this Part,

H22 188 except as provided in such Annex or Chapter.

H22 189 Section A - National Treatment

H22 190 Article 301: National Treatment

H22 191 1. Each Party shall accord national treatment to the goods of H22 192 another Party in accordance with Article III of the General H22 193 Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), including its H22 194 interpretative notes, and to this end Article III of the GATT and H22 195 its interpretative notes, or any equivalent provision of a H22 196 successor agreement to which all Parties are party, are H22 197 incorporated into and made part of this Agreement.

H22 198 2. The provisions of paragraph 1 regarding national treatment H22 199 shall mean, with respect to a state or province, treatment no less H22 200 favorable than the most favorable treatment accorded by such state H22 201 or province to any like, directly competitive or substitutable H22 202 goods, as the case may be, of the Party of which it forms a H22 203 part.

H22 204 3. Paragraphs 1 and 2 do not apply to the measures set out in H22 205 Annex 301.3.

H22 206 Section B - Tariffs

H22 207 Article 302: Tariff Elimination

H22 208 1. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, no Party may H22 209 increase any existing customs duty, or adopt any customs duty, on H22 210 an originating good.

H22 211 2. Except as otherwise provided in this Agreement, each Party H22 212 shall progressively eliminate its customs duties on originating H22 213 goods in accordance with its Schedule to Annex 302.2.

H22 214 3. On the request of any Party, the Parties shall consult to H22 215 consider accelerating the elimination of customs duties set out in H22 216 their Schedules. An agreement between two or more Parties to H22 217 accelerate the elimination of a customs duty on a good shall H22 218 supersede any duty rate or staging category determined pursuant to H22 219 their Schedules for such good when approved by each such Party in H22 220 accordance with its applicable legal procedures.

H22 221 4. Each Party may adopt or maintain import measures to allocate H22 222 in-quota imports made pursuant to a tariff rate quota set out in H22 223 Annex 302.2, provided that such measures do not have trade H22 224 restrictive effects on imports additional to those caused by the H22 225 imposition of the tariff rate quota.

H22 226 5. On written request of any Party, a Party applying or H22 227 intending to apply measures pursuant to paragraph 4 shall consult H22 228 to review the administration of those measures.

H22 229 Article 303: Restriction on Drawback and Duty Deferral H22 230 Programs

H22 231 1. Except as otherwise provided in this Article, no Party may H22 232 refund the amount of customs duties paid, or waive or reduce the H22 233 amount of customs duties owed, on a good imported into its H22 234 territory, on condition that the good is:

H22 235 (a) subsequently exported to the territory of another Party,

H22 236 (b) used as a material in the production of another good that H22 237 is subsequently exported to the territory of another Party, or

H22 238 (c) substituted by an identical or similar good used as a H22 239 material in the production of another good that is subsequently H22 240 exported to the territory of another Party,

H22 241 in an amount that exceeds the lesser of the total amount of H22 242 customs duties paid or owed on the good on importation into its H22 243 territory and the total amount of customs duties paid to another H22 244 Party on the good that has been subsequently exported to the H22 245 territory of that other Party.

H22 246 2. No Party may, on condition of export, refund, waive or H22 247 reduce:

H22 248 (a) an antidumping or countervailing duty that is applied H22 249 pursuant to a Party's domestic law and that is not applied H22 250 inconsistently with Chapter Nineteen (Review and Dispute Settlement H22 251 in Antidumping and Countervailing Duty Matters);

H22 252 (b) a premium offered or collected on an imported good arising H22 253 out of any tendering system in respect of the administration of H22 254 quantitative import restrictions, tariff rate quotas or tariff H22 255 preference levels;

H22 256 (c) a fee applied pursuant to section 22 of the U.S. H22 257 Agricultural Adjustment Act, subject to Chapter Seven H22 258 (Agriculture and Sanitary and Phytosanitary Measures); or

H22 259 (d) customs duties paid or owed on a good imported into its H22 260 territory and substituted by an identical or similar good that is H22 261 subsequently exported to the territory of another Party.

H22 262 H22 263 H23 1 <#FROWN:H23\>DEVELOPMENTS IN FEDERAL-STATE RELATIONS, H23 2 1990-91

H23 3 By John Kincaid

H23 4 The continuing federal fiscal crisis and the developing fiscal H23 5 crisis in state and local governments dominated intergovernmental H23 6 relations in 1990 and 1991 as the nation entered its deepest H23 7 recession since the early 1980s. On Jan. 1, 1991, The H23 8 Washington Post headlined a story, "Big Fiscal Woes H23 9 Await Governors in Northeast." As problems spread to more H23 10 states, the Post headlined an April story, "Recession, H23 11 Soaring Medicaid Costs Put the Squeeze on State Budgets." H23 12 By June 30, 1991 a Post headline read, "Facing Year of H23 13 Living Penuriously, States Slash Costs, Beef Up Taxes."

H23 14 Overall, state expenditures were $533.7 billion in fiscal 1991, H23 15 up 8.8 percent from the previous year. However, the average H23 16 general-fund balance for the 50 states at the end of fiscal 1991 H23 17 was 1.5 percent, the smallest since fiscal 1983 (Howard 1991, 18). H23 18 At the same time, about 34 states raised taxes. The total increase H23 19 was in the range of $14.4 billion to $16.2 billion - the largest H23 20 ever one-year increase (Gold 1991, 623-626).

H23 21 The results of these developments, wrote New York H23 22 Times columnist Russell Baker on July 9, 1991, are H23 23 "predictable: Hordes of governors, mayors and county H23 24 supervisors will be voted out of business in 1992. At the same H23 25 time, the usual 95 to 98 percent of Congress and President Bush H23 26 will enjoy re-election."

H23 27 By the end of the year, though, George Bush, who seemed H23 28 unbeatable after the American victory in the Gulf War in February H23 29 1991, was in trouble with voters because of the recession. Bush's H23 30 plunge in the polls was counterbalanced only by continued public H23 31 disdain for the Congress, a mood exacerbated in 1991 by the H23 32 Clarence Thomas-Anita Hill controversy before the Senate Judiciary H23 33 Committee and by revelations of bounced checks at the House bank H23 34 and unpaid bills at the House restaurant.

H23 35 The disarray in Washington increased the fiscal and policy H23 36 problems facing state and local officials. These officials H23 37 generally attributed their problems to: the deepening recession; H23 38 increasing demands and costs for social welfare; increasing federal H23 39 mandates and conditions of aid, especially in Medicaid; reductions H23 40 in federal aid; and adverse federal court decisions. Some critics H23 41 charged, though, that states were reaping the consequences of H23 42 profligate spending during the growth years of 1984-1989 (Moore H23 43 1991). State spending had increased by more than 100 percent during H23 44 the 1980s - above the rates of inflation and the increase in H23 45 federal spending.

H23 46 States also experienced pressures form the rising costs of: H23 47 health care, due partly to inflation, mandates, and long-term care H23 48 costs; education, due partly to reform efforts, teachers' lobbying H23 49 and rising enrollments; and corrections, due in part to federal H23 50 court orders, the drug war and mandatory sentencing policies. At H23 51 the same time, states were widely criticized in the media for H23 52 trying to balance their budgets on the backs of the poor, and by H23 53 other observers for slowing economic recovery by raising taxes and H23 54 cutting spending.

H23 55 Hence, for many state and local officials, 1991 ended on a sour H23 56 intergovernmental note. The mood was reflected in a commentary by H23 57 the executive director of the National Governors' Association, who H23 58 wrote that recovery from the 1991-1992 recession "will not H23 59 resemble the 1980s, when state revenues grew an average of 9 H23 60 percent a year throughout the decade and plenty of money was H23 61 available for new programs. Instead, the 1990s will be a period of H23 62 scarcity and adjustment." He added, "State H23 63 government will no longer have the fiscal capacity to assume H23 64 additional responsibilities from the federal and local governments. H23 65 Efforts to shift responsibilities to states will meet increased H23 66 resistance" (Scheppach 1991, 1-2).

H23 67 Public opinion

H23 68 The possible effects of these developments on public attitudes H23 69 toward the states were reflected in a 1991 national opinion poll H23 70 commissioned by the U.S. Advisory Commission on Intergovernmental H23 71 Relations (ACIR). The proportion of respondents saying that states H23 72 spend their tax dollars the most wisely of all governments in the H23 73 federal system dropped from 20 percent in 1990 to 14 percent in H23 74 1991. Those picking local government declined slightly, from 36 H23 75 percent to 35 percent, while respondents selecting the federal H23 76 government, actually increased slightly from 11 percent to 12 H23 77 percent. More dramatically, the percentage of Americans H23 78 volunteering that none of the three governments spends their tax H23 79 dollars wisely jumped from 19 percent to 27 percent.

H23 80 The proportion of respondents saying they get the "most H23 81 of their money" from state government declined from 23 H23 82 percent in 1989 to 22 percent in 1991. However, the percentage H23 83 dropped from 33 to 26 for the federal government while increasing H23 84 from 29 percent to 31 percent for local governments.

H23 85 The proportion of poll respondents who picked the state income H23 86 tax as "the worst tax" increased from 10 percent in H23 87 1989 to 12 percent in 1991. Those picking the state sales tax as H23 88 the worst increased from 18 percent to 19 percent, while those H23 89 selecting the federal income tax declined from 27 percent to 26 H23 90 percent, and the local property tax, from 32 percent to 30 H23 91 percent.

H23 92 Even so, when asked how well their state and the federal H23 93 government cooperate, 7 percent said "very well" H23 94 and 43 percent said "fairly well." When asked the H23 95 same of their state and local government, 9 percent said H23 96 "very well" and 50 percent said "fairly H23 97 well." Overall, these respondents seemed more up-beat about H23 98 federal-state cooperation than many activists in the H23 99 intergovernmental community, despite the fact that public H23 100 discontent with state governments appeared to have risen with the H23 101 downturn in the economy. The most negative public views of state H23 102 governments, and of federal-state and state-local cooperation, were H23 103 found in the Northeast (ACIR 1991).

H23 104 Public Pressure for Term Limits

H23 105 Another indicator of public discontent with state government, H23 106 as well as the U.S. Congress, was the term limitation movement. H23 107 Although a term-limit measure failed on the 1991 Washington state H23 108 ballot, such measures already had been approved in California, H23 109 Colorado and Oklahoma in 1990, and were advocated in about 35 other H23 110 states. In response, the National Conference of State Legislatures H23 111 began a public education campaign to improve public perceptions of H23 112 state legislatures.

H23 113 While the wisdom of term limits is certainly debatable, H23 114 attempts to limit the terms of members of Congress raise H23 115 constitutional questions. Many observers believe the states cannot H23 116 unilaterally limit the number of terms served by their H23 117 Congressional members. After all, the framers of the U.S. H23 118 Constitution rejected a term limit, and the term limit imposed on H23 119 presidents required a constitutional amendment.

H23 120 Yet, the situation with the Congress is different. Each member H23 121 represents one state or substate jurisdiction. No one state or H23 122 group of states could unilaterally limit presidential terms; but H23 123 the voters of each state, as a sovereign entity, are arguably free H23 124 to limit the number of terms served by their representatives in H23 125 Congress, just as they can limit the number of terms served by any H23 126 of their other elected officials. Although the U.S. Constitution H23 127 contains no term limit, neither does it explicitly prohibit a state H23 128 from setting a limit for its representatives. The Constitution H23 129 specifies only the length of terms to be served by Senate and House H23 130 members.

H23 131 Federal Turnovers v. State Turn-ups

H23 132 For most state officials during this period, term limits were H23 133 of less immediate concern than fiscal limits. States continued to H23 134 press the federal government for fiscal and economic relief and for H23 135 federal assumption of certain fiscal responsibilities, such as H23 136 long-term care under Medicaid. Some conflict also developed H23 137 among states, especially over the bailout of the savings and loan H23 138 industry. Officials in the Northeast and Midwest argued the bailout H23 139 is shifting funds from their coffers to states such as Texas, New H23 140 Mexico, Arizona, Alaska, Kansas and Louisiana - all net gainers of H23 141 bailout monies.

H23 142 In contrast to state emphases on fiscal 'turn-ups' and an H23 143 economic turnaround, President Bush proposed in his 1991 State of H23 144 the Union address to 'turn over' to the states $15 billion to $20 H23 145 billion of grant programs in a fully funded, consolidated block H23 146 grant, with essentially level funding guaranteed through fiscal H23 147 1996. Bush listed 11 examples of what could be turned over, and H23 148 said these programs were subject to 1,028 pages of regulation in H23 149 the Federal Register, requiring about 4.2 million hours H23 150 of paperwork per year. The programs included four in education; EPA H23 151 sewage construction grants; three in health and human services; two H23 152 in housing and urban development; and the Byrne Memorial State and H23 153 Local Law Enforcement Assistance Program.

H23 154 The proposal generally was well received by governors and state H23 155 legislators, but not by mayors and members of Congress. House H23 156 Majority Leader Richard A. Gephardt suggested, instead, that the H23 157 federal government increase by 2 percent the taxes on some H23 158 corporate income to fund state education programs. To qualify for H23 159 these bonus funds, states would be required to show that all H23 160 children entering first grade were recipients of prenatal and H23 161 well-baby care, nutrition screening, immunizations and early H23 162 childhood education. The proposal received little attention.

H23 163 City officials opposed Bush's proposal, primarily because the H23 164 examples included programs of direct interest to them, especially H23 165 the Community Development Block Grant, certain public housing H23 166 funds, low-income energy assistance and impact aid for local H23 167 schools. Robert M. Isaac, president of the U.S. Conference of H23 168 Mayors, said that states cannot be trusted with block grant monies. H23 169 He argued, for example, that under the Drug Abuse Act of 1986, H23 170 states disburse funds that are too late and too little for local H23 171 governments.

H23 172 Both the National Governors' Association and National H23 173 Conference of State Legislatures developed alternative proposals to H23 174 present to the White House in April 1991. Missouri Gov. John H23 175 Ashcroft, then vice-chairman of the National Governors' H23 176 Association, emphasized the flexibility afforded by block grants. H23 177 "A prime example of the lack of flexibility in H23 178 Missouri," he said, "is that social service H23 179 caseworkers must document by 15-minute intervals the time spent for H23 180 individual Medicaid, Aid to Families with Dependent Children, and H23 181 food stamp cases" (National Governors' Association 1991, H23 182 3). Both proposals allayed the major concerns of local officials by H23 183 excluding programs of vital interest to them (McDowell 1991, 8-11). H23 184 The National Governors' Association proposed to consolidate 42 H23 185 categorical programs and six loan and loan-guarantee programs into H23 186 a $15.2 billion block grant having eight functional components. The H23 187 National Conference of State Legislatures proposed to consolidate H23 188 about 85 categorical grants into 12 block grants falling into five H23 189 categories and funded at $21.2 billion.

H23 190 Virtually nothing was heard about the turnover until December H23 191 1991, when President Bush informed the National League of Cities H23 192 that he would announce a new turnover in his 1992 State of the H23 193 Union address. Bush proposed a consolidated block grant consisting H23 194 of 25 programs in: education (12 programs); environmental H23 195 protection (EPA's sewage construction program); health and human H23 196 services (Maternal and Child Health Block Grant, Social Services H23 197 Block Grant, and state administrative expenses for Medicaid, Aid to H23 198 Families with Dependent Children, and Food Stamps); justice (drug H23 199 control and juvenile justice); and four other programs (job H23 200 training for the homeless, Agriculture Stabilization and H23 201 Conservation Service cost share, community service employment for H23 202 older Americans, and the National and Community Services Act). The H23 203 proposed budget outlay was $14.6 billion for fiscal 1993, projected H23 204 to $15.7 billion in fiscal 1997. The 1992 proposal did reflect some H23 205 of the modifications that had been suggested by the National H23 206 Governors' Association and National Conference of State H23 207 Legislatures, and dropped most of the programs that had drawn the H23 208 strongest objections from local governments.

H23 209 The President said in the budget proposal that his goal was H23 210 "to move power and decision-making authority closer to the H23 211 people and allow state and local governments greater flexibility to H23 212 manage programs more efficiently and effectively. The proposed H23 213 block grant encourages the natural innovative powers of state and H23 214 local governments as laboratories of change." The proposal H23 215 contained a hold-harmless provision, transitional arrangements and H23 216 requirements for intended use reports and audits to ensure that H23 217 states spend the money for the intended purposes. State officials H23 218 appeared to be cautiously optimistic about the plan, though they H23 219 expressed concern about the prospects for passage and the fact that H23 220 "it mixes and matches entitlements and discretionary H23 221 programs" (Perlman 1992, 23).

H23 222 In light of the recession and the upcoming presidential H23 223 election, Bush's overall $1.52 trillion fiscal 1993 budget proposal H23 224 drew mixed reviews. H23 225 H24 1 <#FROWN:H24\>Fuels Used in Farming

H24 2 You may be eligible to claim a credit or refund of excise taxes H24 3 included in the price of fuel used on a farm for farming purposes, H24 4 if you are the owner, tenant, or operator of a farm. You may claim H24 5 only a credit for gasoline and special motor fuel used on a H24 6 farm for farming purposes. You may claim either a credit or refund H24 7 for diesel fuel and aviation fuel used on a farm for farming H24 8 purposes.

H24 9 A farm includes livestock (including feed yards for H24 10 fattening cattle), dairy, fish, poultry, fruit, fur-bearing H24 11 animals, truck farms, orchards, plantations, ranches, nurseries, H24 12 ranges, and structures such as greenhouses or horticultural H24 13 commodities. A fish farm is an area where fish are grown or raised H24 14 - not merely caught or harvested. The farm must be operated for H24 15 profit and located in any of the 50 States or the District of H24 16 Columbia.

H24 17 Farming purposes. Fuel is used on a farm for farming H24 18 purposes if it is used:

H24 19 1) To cultivate the soil, or to raise or harvest any H24 20 agricultural or horticultural commodity.

H24 21 2) To raise, shear, feed, care for, train or manage livestock, H24 22 bees, poultry, fur-bearing animals, or wildlife.

H24 23 3) To operate, manage, conserve, improve, or maintain your H24 24 farm, tools, or equipment.

H24 25 4) To handle, dry, pack, grade, or store any raw agricultural H24 26 or horticultural commodity (as provided below).

H24 27 5) To plant, cultivate, care for, or cut trees, or to prepare H24 28 (other than the sawing into lumber, the chipping or other milling) H24 29 trees for market, but only if the planting, etc., is incidental to H24 30 your farming operations (as provided below).

H24 31 Fuel is used on a farm for farming purposes when it is used by H24 32 you to handle, dry, pack, grade, or store a raw commodity, but only H24 33 if you produced more than one-half of the commodity which was so H24 34 treated during the tax year. Commodity refers to a single raw H24 35 product. For example, apples would be one commodity, and peaches H24 36 another. The more than one-half test applies separately to each H24 37 commodity.

H24 38 Fuel used in incidental tree operations on your farm may not be H24 39 included in a claim unless the operations are minor in nature when H24 40 compared to the total farming operations.

H24 41 Fuel used on a farm for farming purposes includes fuel used by H24 42 you as the owner, tenant, or operator, and fuel used by a neighbor H24 43 or a custom operator who performs services for you to cultivate the H24 44 soil, raise or harvest any agricultural or horticultural commodity, H24 45 or to raise, shear, feed, care for, train or manage livestock, H24 46 bees, poultry, fur-bearing animals, or wildlife.

H24 47 If you have a neighbor, custom operator, or any other person H24 48 perform any other services for you on your farm, no one H24 49 can claim the credit for fuel used on a farm for farming purposes H24 50 for these services.

H24 51 If there is doubt whether fuel was purchased by the owner, the H24 52 tenant, or the operator of a farm, determine who actually bore the H24 53 cost of the fuel. For example, if the owner of a farm and the H24 54 tenant share the cost of the fuel 50-50, then each can claim a H24 55 credit for the tax on one-half of the fuel used. Also, if you sell H24 56 fuel to a neighbor who uses it on a farm for farming purposes, your H24 57 neighbor (not you) can claim the credit on the fuel you sold, H24 58 because your neighbor bore the cost of the fuel.

H24 59 Cropdusting. The use of fuel in the aerial or other H24 60 application of fertilizers, pesticides, or other substances is a H24 61 use of fuel on a farm for farming purposes. You as the owner, H24 62 tenant, or operator, may claim the credit or refund. If you do not H24 63 file a claim, you may waive your right to the claim, and then the H24 64 claim can be made by the applicator. The applicator is treated as H24 65 having used the fuel on a farm for farming purposes.

H24 66 Waiver. To waive your right to the credit or refund, you H24 67 must:

H24 68 1) Execute in writing an irrevocable statement that you H24 69 knowingly give up your right to the credit or refund.

H24 70 2) Identify clearly the time period that the waiver covers. The H24 71 effective period of your waiver cannot extend beyond the last day H24 72 of your tax year.

H24 73 3) Sign the waiver before the applicator files his or her H24 74 claim. Once signed, the waiver cannot be revoked. You may authorize H24 75 an agent, such as a cooperative, to sign the waiver for you.

H24 76 4) Keep a copy of the waiver for your records and give a copy H24 77 of the signed waiver to the applicator. Do not send this H24 78 waiver to the Internal Revenue Service, unless requested to do H24 79 so.

H24 80 The waiver may be a separate document or it may appear on an H24 81 invoice or another document from the applicator. If the waiver H24 82 appears on an invoice or other document, it must be printed in a H24 83 section clearly set off from all other material, and it must be H24 84 printed in type sufficiently large to put you on notice that you H24 85 are waiving your right to the credit or refund. In addition, if the H24 86 waiver appears as part of an invoice or other document, it must be H24 87 written separately from any other item that requires your H24 88 signature.

H24 89 Sign a separate waiver for each tax year or part of a tax year H24 90 in which the fuel was used. If any part of the waiver period H24 91 extends beyond the end of the applicator's tax year, the applicator H24 92 must wait until the next tax year to claim the credit or refund for H24 93 that part.

H24 94 Fuel not used for farming. Fuel is not used for H24 95 farming purposes when used:

H24 96 Off the farm, such as on the highway or in H24 97 non-commercial aviation, even though the fuel is used in H24 98 transporting livestock, feed, crops, or equipment;

H24 99 For personal use, such as mowing the lawn;

H24 100 In processing, packaging, freezing, or canning operations; H24 101 or

H24 102 In the processing of crude gum into gum spirits of turpentine H24 103 or gum resin, or in the processing of maple sap into maple syrup or H24 104 maple sugar.

H24 105 Fuels Used in Commercial Fishing Boats

H24 106 You may be eligible to claim a credit or refund of excise tax H24 107 included in the price of fuel if you use the fuel in a boat used in H24 108 the fisheries or whaling business.

H24 109 Boats used in fishing include only watercraft used in taking, H24 110 catching, processing, or transporting fish, shellfish, or other H24 111 aquatic life for commercial purposes, such as selling or processing H24 112 the catch, on a specific trip basis. Both fresh and salt water H24 113 fisheries are included. Commercial fishing boats do not include H24 114 watercraft used on a specific trip for both sport fishing and H24 115 commercial fishing. For example, a boat is not engaged in H24 116 commercial fishing if on the same trip it is used for marlin sport H24 117 fishing and for catching tuna. Fuel used in aircraft to locate fish H24 118 is not fuel used in commercial fishing.

H24 119 Fuels Used in Off-Highway Business Use

H24 120 You may be eligible to claim a credit or refund of excise tax H24 121 included in the price of fuel if you used the fuel in an H24 122 off-highway business use.

H24 123 Off-highway business use is any use of fuel in a H24 124 trade or business or in any income-producing activity. The use must H24 125 not be in a highway vehicle registered for use on public highways H24 126 unless the vehicle is owned by the United States. If a vehicle H24 127 owned by the United States is registered for highway use, but is H24 128 not actually used on a public highway during the period for which H24 129 the claim is made, its use is still an off-highway business use. H24 130 Off-highway business use does not include any use in a H24 131 motorboat.

H24 132 Highway vehicle includes any self-propelled vehicle H24 133 designed to carry a load over public highways, whether or not also H24 134 designed to perform other functions.

H24 135 It does not matter if the vehicle is designed to perform a H24 136 highway transportation function for only a particular type of load, H24 137 such as passengers, furnishings, and personal effects (as in a H24 138 house, office, or utility trailer), or a special kind of cargo, H24 139 goods, supplies, or materials. It does not matter if machinery or H24 140 equipment is specially designed (and permanently mounted) to H24 141 perform some off-highway task unrelated to highway transportation H24 142 except to the extent discussed in the next paragraph. Examples of H24 143 vehicles that are designed to carry a load over public highways are H24 144 passenger automobiles, motorcycles, buses, highway-type trucks, and H24 145 truck tractors.

H24 146 Vehicles not considered highway vehicles. Generally, H24 147 the following kinds of vehicles are not considered highway H24 148 vehicles:

H24 149 1) Specially designed mobile machinery for nontransportation H24 150 functions. A self-propelled vehicle is not a highway vehicle if it H24 151 consists of a chassis that-

H24 152 Has permanently mounted to it machinery or equipment used to H24 153 perform certain operations (construction, manufacturing, drilling, H24 154 mining, timbering, processing, farming, or similar operations) if H24 155 the operation of the machinery or equipment is unrelated to H24 156 transportation on or off the public highways.

H24 157 Has been specially designed to serve only as a mobile carriage H24 158 and mount for the machinery or equipment, whether or not the H24 159 machinery or equipment is in operation, and

H24 160 Could not be used, because of its special design, as part of a H24 161 vehicle designed to carry any other load without substantial H24 162 structural modification.

H24 163 2) Vehicles designed for off-highway transportation. A H24 164 self-propelled vehicle is not a highway vehicle if-

H24 165 The vehicle is designed primarily to carry a specific kind of H24 166 load other than over the public highway for certain operations H24 167 (construction, manufacturing, mining, processing, farming, H24 168 drilling, timbering, or similar operations), and

H24 169 The vehicle's use of carrying this load over public highways is H24 170 substantially limited or impaired because of its design. To H24 171 determine if the vehicle is substantially limited or impaired, you H24 172 may take into account whether the vehicle may travel at regular H24 173 highway speeds, requires a special permit for highway use, or is H24 174 overweight, overheight, or overwidth for regular highway use.

H24 175 A public highway includes any road in the United H24 176 States that is no a private roadway. This includes federal, state, H24 177 county, and city roads and streets.

H24 178 Registered. A vehicle is considered registered when it is H24 179 registered or required to be registered for highway use under the H24 180 law of any state, the District of Columbia, or any foreign country H24 181 in which it is operated or situated.

H24 182 Any highway vehicle operated under a dealer's tag, license, or H24 183 permit is considered registered. A highway vehicle is not H24 184 considered registered solely because there has been issued a H24 185 special permit for operation of the vehicle at particular times and H24 186 under specified conditions.

H24 187 Fuels used in power take-offs. You are not allowed a H24 188 credit or refund for fuel used in the motor of a highway vehicle H24 189 that operates special equipment by means of a power take-off or H24 190 power transfer. It does not matter if the special equipment is H24 191 mounted on the vehicle. For example, there is no credit or refund H24 192 on gasoline used to operate the mixing unit on a concrete-mixer H24 193 truck when the mixing unit is operated by a power take-off from the H24 194 motor of the vehicle. Similarly, fuel used in the motor of a H24 195 registered fuel-oil delivery truck to operate the pump on the truck H24 196 for discharging the fuel into the customer's storage tank does not H24 197 qualify for a credit or refund of tax.

H24 198 If your registered highway vehicle is equipped with a separate H24 199 motor to operate the special equipment, such as a refrigeration H24 200 unit, pump, generator, or mixing unit, the fuel you use in the H24 201 separate motor qualifies. When fuel is drawn from the same tank H24 202 that supplies fuel for propelling the vehicle, you must figure the H24 203 quantity used in the separate motor operating the special H24 204 equipment. Your reasonable estimate of the amount of fuel used will H24 205 be accepted for a credit or a refund. The figure must be based, H24 206 however, on operating experience and supported by your records. H24 207 Devices to measure the number of miles the vehicle has traveled, H24 208 such as hubometers, may be used to figure the number of gallons of H24 209 fuel used to propel the vehicle. Add to this amount the fuel H24 210 consumed while idling or warming up the motor preparatory to H24 211 propelling the vehicle.

H24 212 H25 1 <#FROWN:H25\>Taking Stock: Community Development 25 Years H25 2 Later

H25 3 New York, N.Y. - Twenty-five years after the civil H25 4 rights movement and the war on poverty spawned a resurgence of H25 5 community efforts to combat poverty, representatives from seven of H25 6 the country's oldest community development corporations met at the H25 7 Ford Foundation to survey the road they had traveled.

H25 8 The first order of business was defining just what a community H25 9 development corporation is. Rocky Mitchell, president of the H25 10 Bedford Stuyvesant Restoration Corporation in Brooklyn, N.Y., said H25 11 the person best qualified to offer a definition in his organization H25 12 was the switchboard operator. "A couple of months H25 13 ago," said Mitchell, "someone from the community H25 14 called Restoration to report that the house next door to them was H25 15 on fire. I think that's an indication of how we're perceived by a H25 16 lot of people in the community."

H25 17 Mitchell's organization may not put out fires but, over the H25 18 last 25 years, it has performed enough services to be routinely H25 19 described as "the city hall of Bedford-Stuyvesant." H25 20 Everyone agreed that since their organizations were defined H25 21 primarily by the needs of the communities they served, there was no H25 22 'cookie-cutter' definition to their work, but 'city hall' seemed to H25 23 fit admirably well.

H25 24 The two-day conference, held in early November, marked the H25 25 first time the seven groups - known as 'mature' CDCs - had sat down H25 26 together around the same table. It was convened by the Foundation's H25 27 Urban Poverty program so that the organizations' leaders could H25 28 reflect on their shared experience and define the main issues H25 29 confronting them in the 1990s. Participating organizations were: H25 30 the Bedford Stuyvesant Restoration Corporation (BSRC); the Mexican H25 31 American Unity Council (MAUC), from San Antonio; Mississippi Action H25 32 for Community Education (MACE), from Jackson; the Spanish-Speaking H25 33 Unity Council (SSUC), from Oakland, Calif.; Watts Labor Community H25 34 Action Committee (WLCAC), from Los Angeles; New Community H25 35 Corporation (NCC), from Newark, N.J.; and Chicanos Por La Causa H25 36 (CPLC), from Phoenix, Ariz.

H25 37 All of the groups were organized in the 1960s, when the issues H25 38 of poverty and discrimination first burst onto the national agenda. H25 39 There was a clear need then for organizations that could combine H25 40 the technical and professional skills of a government agency with H25 41 the street wisdom, motivation, and local pride found in many H25 42 community-based groups.

H25 43 Such CDCs were part of a generation of neighborhood H25 44 organizations that played a pivotal role in the rebirth of urban H25 45 neighborhoods. Emphasizing self-determination and self-help, they H25 46 accepted as their mission the improvement of all aspects of a H25 47 community's life - physical, economic, and social.

H25 48 Over the years the CDCs represented at the conference had all H25 49 demonstrated the ability to manage large amounts of public and H25 50 private funds, often with great ingenuity, developing programs that H25 51 included job training, youth counseling, care for the elderly, H25 52 health services, housing rehabilitation, and commercial and H25 53 industrial development. In addition, the early CDCs served as the H25 54 training grounds for many local leaders.

H25 55 In spite of all they had accomplished, all of the groups H25 56 reported that their work had to be seen as a "holding H25 57 action." Without substantial public and private H25 58 reinvestment, it was felt that no single organization could reverse H25 59 a continuing pattern of decline in many of the nation's poor H25 60 neighborhoods.

H25 61 Moreover, during the 1980s they all had to learn to survive in H25 62 an era of drastically diminished support. Larry Farmer, the H25 63 president of Mississipi's MACE, articulated a feeling shared by H25 64 most of the other CDC leaders when he said, "All of us have H25 65 been living one step ahead of the sheriff for the last 10 years or H25 66 so."

H25 67 In his remarks to the conference, Ford Foundation President H25 68 Franklin Thomas, who had been BSRC's first president, serving for H25 69 ten years, recalled how tough it had been to get these H25 70 organizations going in the mid to late 1960s. "Some of H25 71 these cities were burning," he said, "and we were H25 72 all scrambling to try to show something tangible that would give H25 73 people a basis for hope and give young people a sense of connection H25 74 and empowerment."

H25 75 He called for wider recognition of the challenges the groups H25 76 faced in meeting capital and other needs, including leadership H25 77 development and staff development. He took particular note of the H25 78 devastating impact that the shift in national policy during the H25 79 1980s had on these groups. "At the same time," said H25 80 Thomas, "the vision embodied in the early CDCs is one that H25 81 the entire community development movement has to return to. For a H25 82 development strategy to be worthy of the name, it has to H25 83 simultaneously pursue work on housing, business growth, job H25 84 training, education, and art, culture, and recreation - because H25 85 those are all the elements necessary for a healthy community and a H25 86 healthy society." He cited what he saw as a "real H25 87 need to connect this first generation of CDCs with the newer ones H25 88 in a way that strengthens the whole."

H25 89 All the conference participants agreed that there hadn't been H25 90 enough recognition of how hard it was to carry out that vision. H25 91 Reflecting on their difficulties, SSUC's executive director, H25 92 Arabella Martinez, said, "Over the last decade there's been H25 93 a serious erosion of the social safety net. There's less of a will H25 94 to do something about the problems of poverty. It's a less caring H25 95 society."

H25 96 "A lot of the time," said Martinez, who was an H25 97 assistant secretary in the Department of Health and Human Services H25 98 during the Carter Administration, "we're taking on H25 99 development risks in areas long since abandoned by business and H25 100 industry." Speaking from her own experience, she said, H25 101 "If it hadn't been for the Spanish-Speaking Unity Council, H25 102 the Fruitvale section of Oakland would look the way the South Bronx H25 103 did 10 years ago."

H25 104 Yet, given the shortage of funding, many of the CDCs formed H25 105 over the past 10 to 15 years have had to restrict their activities H25 106 to housing development. "They've done important work adding H25 107 to the stock of low-income housing," said Martinez. H25 108 "But it's a narrower vision of community H25 109 development."

H25 110 At least in part because the mature CDCs remain the most H25 111 complete expression of the philosophy of community development, H25 112 Monsignor William Linder of Newark's New Community said he believed H25 113 that it was in everybody's interests that they continue to grow.

H25 114 Describing them as one of the most important sources of H25 115 expertise in the debate on poverty issues, from teenage motherhood H25 116 to homelessness, he observed that the mature CDCs "can tie H25 117 policy to the real world of people in a way that few other H25 118 organizations can."

H25 119 Speaking around a table where there were decidedly more people H25 120 with gray hair than not, he added, "There's no way for a H25 121 movement to progress if it doesn't have a sense of its own history. H25 122 We need a lot of the gray-haired people who have lived that history H25 123 to continue to play a role in the community development H25 124 movement."

H25 125 MACE's president, Larry Farmer, said that what he thought H25 126 distinguished the work of the groups attending the conference from H25 127 more recent efforts in poor communities was that many of the newer H25 128 ones seemed "more committed to helping people live better H25 129 in poverty rather than helping them get out of H25 130 poverty."

H25 131 He also said that community groups "had to try to H25 132 empower from all directions. Not just through economic development, H25 133 but through the people becoming leaders" - something that H25 134 MACE has stressed since its beginnings.

H25 135 Said SSUC's Martinez, "Don't measure my success solely H25 136 on the dollars and cents at the bottom of my balance sheet. Measure H25 137 me also on the number of people who got their first real chance H25 138 while working in a CDC. Leadership is just like anything else - H25 139 it's learned. And it's learned on the job. I would never have been H25 140 an assistant secretary in Washington if it hadn't been for the H25 141 experience I got at the Unity Council."

H25 142 Most felt that their organizations had to become better at H25 143 formalizing leadership training. CPLC's Pete Garcia recalled that H25 144 when he first started to move beyond the world of South Phoenix's H25 145 barrio, he was "still trying to figure out which one of H25 146 these whoms and forths and wherefores you used H25 147 first. You don't just take someone who grew up in a housing H25 148 project, the way I did, and expect that he or she will be able to H25 149 make their way through the corridors of power without some formal H25 150 training. If you're going to make a leader, you're going to have to H25 151 provide training, travel, internships, and a variety of other H25 152 things."

H25 153 One step that Garcia's organization has taken is to forge close H25 154 ties with Hispanic students in the nearby universities. "We H25 155 recruit interns through student associations," he said. H25 156 "And even if we can't offer them jobs after they graduate, H25 157 we try to keep in contact with them."

H25 158 But many at the conference said that the crisis atmosphere H25 159 brought on by the withdrawal of federal support made leadership H25 160 development - in their organizations and in the larger community - H25 161 a luxury they couldn't afford.

H25 162 "We need real institutional support," said H25 163 Martinez, "the kind of support that ballets, symphonies, H25 164 and museums, and national organizations like the American Red Cross H25 165 get. None of us are coming close to that kind of backing. We have a H25 166 harder job to do with fewer resources."

H25 167 "One of the problems," she added, "is H25 168 that we're working with people who aren't terribly attractive to a H25 169 lot of funders. Many have been drug dealers, or they're ex-addicts H25 170 or welfare mothers. And they're black and Hispanic."

H25 171 There's a double standard," said NCC board H25 172 member Mary Smith. "Funders will tell you, 'Oh, the work H25 173 you're doing is wonderful!' But then they'll tell you that they H25 174 don't give grants for that kind of work. They'll give it to an H25 175 institution they perceive as safe, like a college or a H25 176 hospital."

H25 177 Monsignor Linder cited as an example a university not far from H25 178 Newark's New Community. By midway in a yearlong $100 million H25 179 fund-raising drive it had already reached its goal. "New H25 180 Community touches a lot more people's lives than that H25 181 university," he said. "We're providing services H25 182 that are every bit as important and a lot more challenging to H25 183 deliver. But somehow we're not perceived as playing anywhere near H25 184 as important a role."

H25 185 CPLC's Garcia thinks wider recognition of that role is H25 186 absolutely essential. "With all the hard times we've H25 187 had," he said, "we've come of age as a group. We're H25 188 an institution now. And the powers-that-be should start taking H25 189 notice."

H25 190 "We have track records," said WLCAC's Ted H25 191 Watkins. "We've established our credibility. But government H25 192 and the private sector still haven't realized sufficiently that H25 193 what we're doing is in their best interests, too."

H25 194 To overcome those perceptions, all agreed that they had to get H25 195 much better at telling their story.

H25 196 "When it comes to inner-city communities," said H25 197 Watkins, "there's a lot more attention given to drive-by H25 198 shootings, crack dealers, and drug busts than to the work of CDCs. H25 199 But trying to get the attention of the media takes time - time that H25 200 none of us can afford right now."

H25 201 Just as important, said Garcia, was "getting more H25 202 involved in the debate over public policy, so that instead of us H25 203 having to follow the money, the money starts to follow us." H25 204 He added that this was also an area where an organization's H25 205 commitment to developing leaders in the community could be crucial. H25 206 "If you've done that work," he said, "then H25 207 a lot of the local political leaders may not only be your friends, H25 208 they may be part of your organization's family." He cited H25 209 as an example a recently elected U.S. congressman from the Phoenix H25 210 area who was a longstanding member of CPLC's board. "CPLC H25 211 identified the development of leadership as a primary objective 20 H25 212 years ago," said Garcia. "We've succeeded at the H25 213 local level, at the state level, and now, we're proud to say, at H25 214 the national level."

H25 215 According to Mary Smith of NCC, one way her organization has H25 216 dealt with this issue was by having a strong community action group H25 217 that worked hard to let elected officials know what they thought H25 218 was best for their community.

H25 219 She recalled an encounter she had 15 years earlier that brought H25 220 home the importance of organizing. H25 221 H26 1 <#FROWN:H26\>FROM THE DEPUTY CHAIRMAN

H26 2 "To fulfill its educational mission, achieve an orderly H26 3 continuation of free society, and provide models of excellence to H26 4 the American people, the Federal Government must transmit the H26 5 achievement and values of civilization from the past via the H26 6 present to the future ..."

H26 7 National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities Act of 1965, H26 8 as amended through November 5, 1990

H26 9 Civilization is a fragile thing. As the legislation that H26 10 authorizes the Endowment makes clear, history and literature and H26 11 philosophy do not by themselves speak to generations, present and H26 12 upcoming. There are necessary agents of transmission - teachers, H26 13 scholars, students, books, exhibitions, films - and there is H26 14 necessary support from American citizens. The National Endowment H26 15 for the Humanities, as an agency of the federal government, does H26 16 its part by translating American taxpayer monies into programs that H26 17 serve the present and the future.

H26 18 One universally acknowledged achievement of civilization is H26 19 being recognized through the NEH Initiative on the Emergence of H26 20 Democracy announced in 1992. It is a special invitation for H26 21 projects that study democracy in its beginnings 2500 years ago and H26 22 its subsequent emergence in different parts of the world. The H26 23 initiative is particularly timely in that American scholars are H26 24 just gaining access to archives held close in Eastern Europe and in H26 25 the former Soviet republics, but the emergence of democracy is of H26 26 enduring interest to a nation that seeks to provide for the future H26 27 orderly continuation of free society. The Endowment has supported H26 28 several initiatives over the years, mostly in response to H26 29 historically significant commemorations, such as the Bicentennial H26 30 of the Constitution, the Bill of Rights, and the Columbian H26 31 Quincentennary. Although for none of these initiatives were there H26 32 dedicated funds, they have served to enrich the pool of H26 33 applications and raise even higher the quality of NEH's many H26 34 awards.

H26 35 The merit of the thousands of applications is determined by a H26 36 process that encourages open debate and brings a multitude of H26 37 perspectives to bear. It is a procedure that respects intellectual H26 38 property and personal privacy while conducting public business. It H26 39 is a three-way tug-and-pull: first, an individual applicant's or H26 40 panelist's reasonable expectation of confidentiality; second, the H26 41 citizen's right, therefore the press's right, to know how federal H26 42 funds are being spent; and finally, a federal agency's H26 43 responsibility to carry out statutorily mandated programs as H26 44 effectively and fairly as possible.

H26 45 When NEH peer reviewers are asked for advice, they have the H26 46 reasonable expectation that their advice will be treated H26 47 confidentially. Likewise, when applicants submit proposals, they H26 48 have a reasonable expectation that the details of their proposals H26 49 will be held in confidence until the decision to fund or not to H26 50 fund is made. Once federal funds are obligated for a project, then H26 51 the description of that project is public information, for the H26 52 public has a right to know how federal funds are being spent.

H26 53 Meetings at NEH to discuss specific proposals are closed to the H26 54 public. When panelists and when National Council members meet in H26 55 Washington to discuss individual applications, they are reminded H26 56 that their discussions as well as the details within applications H26 57 are confidential. Not only does the Endowment reason that it has a H26 58 responsibility to protect the privacy of those people who do not H26 59 receive federal funds, but it also understands that it must H26 60 safeguard the ideas in the applications.

H26 61 Closed review, however, is more than an issue of the right to H26 62 privacy. It is an issue of fair and impartial evaluation. The H26 63 Endowment argues that it cannot carry out its statutorily mandated H26 64 programs without assuring that applications will be fairly and H26 65 judiciously considered. Since its inception NEH has depended on the H26 66 good will of knowledgeable people who have submitted assessments in H26 67 complete confidence. They have given honest opinions freely; they H26 68 have determined merit in an atmosphere of disinterested remove.

H26 69 Their work has resulted in a wide-ranging array of H26 70 Endowment-supported projects, from a film on Lyndon Baines Johnson H26 71 to a comprehensive dictionary of classical Latin. In the course of H26 72 its twenty-seven years, the Endowment has spent $2.65 billion H26 73 enabling 47,000 projects. In terms of the total federal budget, the H26 74 sums are small; in terms of total funding for humanities in the H26 75 United States, however, NEH annually provides more financial H26 76 support than the 846 largest private foundations do H26 77 collectively.

H26 78 One way in which the Endowment has made its funds go farther H26 79 than they would under ordinary circumstances is through alliances H26 80 with other federal agencies and with major private funders. H26 81 Currently an interagency agreement has enabled NEH to participate H26 82 with the National Science Foundation and the Fund for the H26 83 Improvement of Postsecondary Education in the Department of H26 84 Education. The three agencies are pooling resources to encourage H26 85 programs that improve the quality of undergraduate curricula. H26 86 Another agreement with the National Science Foundation and the H26 87 Library of Congress will support public lecture-discussion programs H26 88 in science and the humanities. A large gift from the DeWitt H26 89 Wallace-Reader's Digest Fund has given sabbatical opportunities to H26 90 almost 200 outstanding elementary and secondary teachers over the H26 91 four years the program has been in place.

H26 92 NEH is able to play as an equal partner with much larger H26 93 enterprises for several reasons, but none as important as its H26 94 reputation over the years for being a well-run agency with a highly H26 95 competent professional staff. On the administrative side of the H26 96 agency, for example, in the auditing office and grants office, are H26 97 knowledgeable, collegial professionals who serve as stewards of H26 98 taxpayer funds. And on the program side of the agency are H26 99 dedicated, intelligent officials who daily encourage and inform H26 100 potential applicants, and who, most importantly, assure fair and H26 101 impartial review.

H26 102 It is the widely acknowledged integrity of its merit review H26 103 process that has given the Endowment the reputation of being H26 104 primus inter pares in the community of grant-making H26 105 agencies. It is through these means - merit review, a superlative H26 106 staff, initiatives that emphasize the contribution of humanities to H26 107 the national interest - that the National Endowment for the H26 108 Humanities strives to enable projects that transmit the H26 109 accomplishments and values of civilization.

H26 110 H26 111 HOW THE ENDOWMENT WORKS

H26 112 In order "to develop and promote a broadly conceived H26 113 national policy of support for the humanities," the H26 114 National Endowment for the Humanities was established by Congress H26 115 in 1965 as an independent grant-making agency of the federal H26 116 government. The Endowment supports scholarly research, education, H26 117 and public programs in the humanities. Under the act that H26 118 established the Endowment, the term humanities includes, but H26 119 is not limited to, the study of the following disciplines: history; H26 120 philosophy; languages; linguistics; literature; archaeology; H26 121 jurisprudence; the history, theory, and criticism of the arts; H26 122 ethics; comparative religion; and those aspects of the social H26 123 sciences that employ historical or philosophical approaches.

H26 124 Programs. H26 125 This report lists federal funds obligated for grants made in H26 126 fiscal year 1992 through the Endowment's six divisions - Education H26 127 Programs, Fellowships and Seminars, Preservation and Access, Public H26 128 Programs, Research Programs, and State Programs - and one office - H26 129 the Office of Challenge Grants. Grant listings are preceded by a H26 130 brief introduction describing the nature and purposes of the H26 131 programs administered by each division. The grants themselves are H26 132 listed in alphabetical order under each grant-making program. H26 133 Except for the Travel to Collections program, grants for less than H26 134 $1,000 are not listed.

H26 135 Public Information.

H26 136 Information about Endowment programs and activities can be H26 137 found in a variety of publications produced by the Office of H26 138 Publications and Public Affairs. The Endowment's bimonthly magazine H26 139 Humanities features articles by nationally known scholars and H26 140 writers on current humanities topics, a listing of recent grants by H26 141 discipline, a calendar of grant application deadlines, a guide H26 142 section for those who are thinking of applying for an NEH grant, H26 143 and essays about noteworthy NEH supported projects.

H26 144 Matching Funds.

H26 145 To stimulate private support for the humanities, the Endowment H26 146 uses federal funds to match funds donated from private sources. To H26 147 date, NEH matching grants have helped generate almost §123 billion H26 148 in gift funds - more than $953 million of which has been generated H26 149 through the Challenge Grants program. Matching under the Challenge H26 150 Grants program is required in a ratio of three to one for H26 151 first-time awards or four to one for second-time awards. Matching H26 152 under other programs is on a one-for-one basis.

H26 153 In addition to federal matching funds, the Endowment stimulates H26 154 private-sector support of specific projects by requiring grantees H26 155 in most programs to commit their own funds for a portion of the H26 156 costs of a project. In many cases, this amounts to 50 percent of H26 157 total project costs.

H26 158 Grants. H26 159 Except in the case of challenge grants and most grants made by H26 160 the Division of State Programs, awards made by NEH are for specific H26 161 projects in the humanities. To apply, an individual or organization H26 162 submits a proposal for a project to one of the Endowment's funding H26 163 categories. A final decision can normally be expected about six H26 164 months after the application deadline.

H26 165 Each application is assessed by knowledgeable persons outside H26 166 the Endowment who are asked for their judgments about the quality H26 167 of the proposed project. About 1,200 scholars and professionals in H26 168 the humanities serve on approximately 250 panels throughout the H26 169 course of a year. The judgment of panelists is often supplemented H26 170 by individual reviews solicited from specialists who have extensive H26 171 knowledge of the specific subject area dealt with in the H26 172 application.

H26 173 The advice of the panels and outside reviewers is assembled by H26 174 the staff of the Endowment, who may comment on matters of fact or H26 175 on significant issues that would otherwise be missing from the H26 176 evaluation. These materials are then presented to the National H26 177 Council on the Humanities, a board of twenty-six citizens nominated H26 178 by the President of the United States and confirmed by the Senate. H26 179 The National Council meets four times each year to advise the H26 180 Chairman of the Endowment. The Chairman, who is appointed for a H26 181 four year term by the President with the consent of the Senate, H26 182 takes into account the advice provided by this review process and, H26 183 by law, makes the final decision about funding.

H26 184 In fiscal year 1992, more than 9,100 applications were H26 185 reviewed, of which about 1,900 were approved.

H26 186 H26 187 DIVISION OF EDUCATION PROGRAMS

H26 188 In 1992 the Division of Education Programs began to award H26 189 grants for undergraduate curricula that illuminate connections H26 190 among the various disciplines of science and the humanities. This H26 191 interagency effort, in cooperation with the National Science H26 192 Foundation and the Department of Education's Fund for the H26 193 Improvement of Postsecondary Education, will continue into 1993 and H26 194 1994. By means of one such grant, Southwest Texas State University H26 195 of San Marcos, Texas, will call on faculty from a wide range of H26 196 fields whose common interest is the study of the Southwest through H26 197 the perspectives of history, culture, and the natural sciences to H26 198 develop courses for a new Southwestern studies minor. Another grant H26 199 will enable Skidmore College to plan a series of multidisciplinary H26 200 capstone courses which will enrich general education courses. The H26 201 Division's Higher Education in the Humanities program emphasizes H26 202 not only general education and core curricula but also deepening H26 203 the humanities education of future teachers. At Southwest Texas H26 204 State University a seminar of thirteen humanities faculty members H26 205 and four secondary school teachers will refine foundation courses H26 206 for a new program leading to a graduate certificate in the H26 207 humanities for secondary school teachers. The courses are to focus H26 208 on 'The Quest for Order and Happiness: The Individual, the State, H26 209 and the Ethical Life'; readings will range from Seneca's 'Letter H26 210 from a Stoic' through Diderot's Rameau's Nephew to H26 211 Morrison's Beloved. To strengthen curricula for undergraduates H26 212 preparing to become history and social studies teachers, the H26 213 American Political Science Association will offer a summer H26 214 institute on constitutional history, principles, and law for H26 215 campus-based teams of humanities and education faculty members.

H26 216 Both of the division's comprehensive programs support H26 217 residential summer institutes for intensive study of significant H26 218 topics and texts in the humanities. 'The Nature of Meaning,' H26 219 sponsored by Rutgers University under a grant from the Higher H26 220 Education program, will focus on the fundamental question, now H26 221 widely disputed in the humanities, of whether meaning is verifiable H26 222 among individuals. Intended for faculty members in literary theory, H26 223 anthropology, linguistics, psychology, and cognitive studies, as H26 224 well as those who teach philosophy, the institute will feature many H26 225 leading contributors to the current debate. H26 226 H27 1 <#FROWN:H27\>Hershey

H27 2 A Report on the Company's Environmental Policies and H27 3 Practices

H27 4 The Council on Economic Priorities Corporate Environmental Data H27 5 Clearinghouse

H27 6 December 1992

H27 7 HERSHEY FOODS CORPORATION

H27 8 I. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

H27 9 This report documents the company's environmental impact. Among H27 10 the key aspects are the following:

H27 11 PERFORMANCE VS. INDUSTRY

H27 12 CEP looks at six indicators to provide comparative H27 13 industry-wide analysis. Taken together, these indicators by no H27 14 means reflect the sum total of a company's environmental H27 15 performance. CEP compares Hershey to its competitors in the Food H27 16 Industry.

H27 17 figure

H27 18 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey reported the release of just over 90,000 H27 19 pounds of toxic chemicals in 1989, up from 78,000 pounds in 1988. H27 20 In terms of aggregate releases, the company's reported release of H27 21 toxic chemicals was better than average among other companies in H27 22 the food industry.

H27 23 <*_>bullet<*/>When adjusted for sales, Hershey's toxic releases H27 24 were better than average for the food industry in 1988 and 1989. H27 25 Hershey Soup reported the release of 0.04 pounds of toxic chemicals H27 26 for every $1,000 in sales in 1989 and 0.03 in 1988.

H27 27 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey Foods paid nearly $12,000 in OSHA H27 28 violations during the past five years for 56 violations. This H27 29 dollar amount was lower than nearly all its major competitors.

H27 30 <*_>bullet<*/>The environmental soundness of Hershey's PAC H27 31 contributions was only about average in general, but much better H27 32 than that of its competitors. Hershey scored 50 out of 100 on CEP's H27 33 Greendex.

H27 34 <*_>bullet<*/>As of July 1991, the U.S. Environmental H27 35 Protection Agency had not identified Hershey Foods as a H27 36 'potentially responsible party' (PRP) at any Superfund site. This H27 37 tied them with 4 other companies in the food industry.

H27 38 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey had 4 facility-quarters out of compliance H27 39 with air permits in 1991. (A facility-quarter is a facility that is H27 40 out of compliance with its air permit during one calendar quarter.) H27 41 This was about average for the food industry.

H27 42 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

H27 43 <*_>bullet<*/>Though Hershey has not set goals to reduce the H27 44 use or emission of carbon dioxide and methane, they have done so H27 45 for nitrogen oxide and CFCs. Hershey states that its sulfur dioxide H27 46 emissions have been reduced significantly, through an energy policy H27 47 which uses cleaner burning natural gas as its primary fuel. And in H27 48 Hershey's new chocolate facility the company has installed new H27 49 technology in the boilers that reduces nitrogen oxide emissions.

H27 50 <*_>bullet<*/>In terms of solid waste management, the company H27 51 participates in waste exchanges when possible and reprocess<&|>sic! H27 52 waste for sale as usable product. The company's edible products are H27 53 reprocessed into animal feed and other wastes are reprocessed for H27 54 use as mushroom and garden mulch.

H27 55 <*_>bullet<*/>The company now has a policy that whenever H27 56 possible it purchases office paper with recycled content and it H27 57 replaces photocopiers with new ones which can use recycled paper. H27 58 Many of its photocopiers and laser printers also use refurbished H27 59 cartridges.

H27 60 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey's new chocolate facility is attempting to H27 61 conserve water in the manufacturing process by using water H27 62 recovered from the evaporation of milk in various non-food contact H27 63 operations. The company estimated that this program will save H27 64 approximately 100,000 gallons of water per day.

H27 65 REGULATORY, LEGAL AND POLITICAL ISSUES

H27 66 <*_>bullet<*/>Though the company did not state its position on H27 67 the proposed GATT Resolution (H.Con.Res. 246), they did state that H27 68 they support "harmonization" of food safety standards and H27 69 have a company representative in the U.S. delegation to the Codex H27 70 Alimentarius Commission.

H27 71 PRODUCTS AND TECHNOLOGIES

H27 72 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey does plans to conduct biotechnology H27 73 research on plants, but would not identify the projects and items H27 74 under consideration, stating this was confidential information.

H27 75 DISCLOSURE AND POLICY

H27 76 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey responded to CEP's environmental H27 77 questionnaire. The company also provided comments on a draft copy H27 78 of CEDC's environmental profile.

H27 79 <*_>bullet<*/>Hershey does not support the labelling of foods H27 80 for pesticides, waxes or shellacs, bioengineered genes, or H27 81 irradiation, because the company believes "that foods H27 82 complying with US safety standards do not require warnings on H27 83 labels."

H27 84 II. COMPANY OVERVIEW

H27 85 Hershey Foods Corporation produces a broad line of chocolate H27 86 confectionery, pasta and other food products. At the end of 1991, H27 87 the company employed 14,000 people full-time and 1,300 people H27 88 part-time and Richard A. Zimmerman is the Chairman and CEO.

H27 89 In 1991, Hershey had nearly $3 billion in sales revenues, a 7% H27 90 increase from 1990. Net income rose 2% in 1991 to $220 million. H27 91 According to Fortune, it was the 160th largest company in the H27 92 United States, and the 17th largest in the food industry in terms H27 93 of 1991 revenues.

H27 94 III. STRUCTURE AND POLICY

H27 95 INDUSTRIES AND SUBSIDIARIES

H27 96 Hershey Foods Corporation manufactures, distributes and sells H27 97 consumer food products, which include various chocolates, H27 98 confectionery, pasta and other food products. The corporation H27 99 includes the following: Hershey Chocolate U.S.A.; Hershey Canada H27 100 Inc.; Hershey Refrigerated Products; Hershey International and H27 101 Hershey Pasta Group.

H27 102 Hershey Chocolate U.S.A.

H27 103 This division of Hershey Foods, along with Hershey Canada Inc., H27 104 manufactures and sells chocolate and confectionery products under H27 105 approximately fifty-five brand names. Hershey Chocolate U.S.A's H27 106 main brand names are Hershey's, Reese's, Y&S, Luden's and Peter H27 107 Paul.

H27 108 Hershey Canada Inc.

H27 109 In addition to Hershey, Reese and Y&S, the main brand names of H27 110 this division include Moirs, Lowney, Glosette, Life Savers, Oh H27 111 Henry! and Planters.

H27 112 Hershey Refrigerated Products

H27 113 This division of Hershey Foods manufactures and sells H27 114 refrigerated puddings in the U.S.

H27 115 <p_>Hershey International

H27 116 In Germany and Mexico, the company manufactures chocolate and H27 117 confectionery products under the brand names Gubor and Hershey's H27 118 respectively. This division also exports products manufactured by H27 119 other divisions and is involved in various international joint H27 120 ventures.

H27 121 Hershey Pasta Group

H27 122 Hershey Pasta Group manufactures and sells pasta under eight H27 123 brand names, which include San Giorgio, Skinner, Delmonico, P&R, H27 124 Light 'N Fluffy, American Beauty, Perfection and Ronzoni.

H27 125 Importation of Foods

H27 126 The company imports ingredients directly as well as through H27 127 brokers. Currently, Hershey receives cocoa beans from seven H27 128 countries.

H27 129 Hershey explained that they do not grow cocoa beans themselves, H27 130 but import them from West African, South American and Far Eastern H27 131 equatorial regions.

H27 132 FACILITIES AND TERRITORIES

H27 133 Domestic and Canada

H27 134 Hershey Chocolate U.S.A. operates 10 manufacturing facilities, H27 135 six of these are plants of Hershey Pasta Group and the rest are two H27 136 Confectionery Products plants in Hershey, Pennsylvania, one H27 137 Confectionery Products plant in Oakdale, California and one in H27 138 Stuarts Draft, Virginia. Hershey Canada Inc. operates manufacturing H27 139 facilities in Smith Falls and Hamilton, Ontario; Dartmouth, Nova H27 140 Scotia; and Montreal, Quebec. They also have a Confectionery H27 141 Products plant in Smith Falls, Ontario. In addition to the plants H27 142 listed above, Hershey owns properties for manufacturing pasta H27 143 products.

H27 144 CONTACT PEOPLE

H27 145 Dr. Catherine St. Hilaire

H27 146 Director

H27 147 Regular Affairs

H27 148 (717)-534-5060

H27 149 John C. Long

H27 150 Director of Consumer and Public Relations

H27 151 (717)-534-7641

H27 152 ENVIRONMENTAL POLICY

H27 153 Company's environmental policy

H27 154 Hershey established an environmental taskforce in 1990 with the H27 155 purpose of updating the company's Environmental Compliance Policy. H27 156 The company's 'environmental philosophy' reads as follows: H27 157 "We believe that Hershey Foods Corporation has an H27 158 obligation to protect and preserve the environment for ouselves, H27 159 our children and for future generations. We will continue to H27 160 conduct our business activities in a manner which does not H27 161 adversely affect the environment and which protects the health and H27 162 safety of our employees, our consumers and the communities in which H27 163 we operate."

H27 164 Hershey's environmental compliance program is based on the H27 165 following: The company stated that they keep management informed of H27 166 all issues and circumstances relating to compliance; that its H27 167 facilities are provided with individuals who have technical H27 168 expertise in resolving environmental problems; that independent H27 169 environmental assessments are made by the company; and that any H27 170 permitting of non-compliance will result in disciplinary acton.

H27 171 Agriculture policy

H27 172 When importing ingredients, Hershey stated that they test all H27 173 lots of cocoa beans to ensure they comply with U.S. regulations on H27 174 pesticides.

H27 175 Hershey's formal environmental policy does not deal H27 176 specifically with integrated pest management (IPM), organic H27 177 certification, or soil conservation. However, the company does H27 178 endorse and encourage IPM and soil conservation in its supplier H27 179 documents and position on pesticide use.

H27 180 The company does not support the labelling of foods for H27 181 pesticides, waxes or shellacs, bioengineered genes, or irradiation H27 182 because the company believes "that foods complying with US H27 183 safety standards do not require warnings on labels."

H27 184 Food irradiation

H27 185 Hershey Foods' policy on food irradiation seems to have H27 186 fluctuated in the past few years. In 1990, it was reported that H27 187 Hershey supports food irradiation in policy and the Better H27 188 World Investment Guide in 1991, stated that up until the late H27 189 1980s Hershey belonged to the Coalition for Food Irradiation, a H27 190 pro-food irradiation lobby. In November of 1991 the Interfaith H27 191 Center on Corporate Responsibility (ICCR) had a dialogue with the H27 192 company regarding its policy on food irradiation. At the time, H27 193 Hershey was targeted as a company that possibly supports food H27 194 irradiation and ICCR initiated a shareholder resolution against the H27 195 company. Though ICCR was not able to follow up on the issue, H27 196 Hershey stated to CEP that "With respect to food H27 197 irradiation, it is not currently used by our corporation or any of H27 198 our operating divisions. Neither do we currently purchase or use H27 199 irradiated foods or ingredients or sell foods that have been H27 200 exposed to radiation." However, Laurie Williams, H27 201 educational coordinator for Food and Water, an anti-food H27 202 irradiation group, stated that as of now Hershey has not submitted H27 203 a statement to them on food irradiation.

H27 204 IV. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

H27 205 RELEASES

H27 206 While releases of methyl bromide (bromomethane), a potent H27 207 carcinogen, decreased slightly from 1988 to 1989, Hershey's total H27 208 reported toxic releases increased substantially. This was mostly H27 209 <}_><-|>do<+|>due<}/> to the release of over 27,000 pounds of H27 210 phosphoric acid into the sewer system at its Oakdale, CA H27 211 facility.

H27 212 caption&table

H27 213 caption&figure

H27 214 Toxic Releases Reduction

H27 215 Hershey does not participate in the EPA's Industrial Toxics H27 216 Project (33/50 program). The initiative aims to reduce by one-third H27 217 by 1992 and by one-half by 1995 the release of 17 target chemicals H27 218 from 600 industrial companies. Hershey stated that of the 17 H27 219 chemicals targeted by the EPA, they use only "small amounts H27 220 in laboratory-related methods." The company then explained H27 221 that when appropriate, they are looking to eliminate the use of H27 222 these chemicals through alternative methods.

H27 223 Though Hershey has not set goals to reduce the use or emission H27 224 of carbon dioxide and methane, they have done so for nitrogen H27 225 oxides and CFCs, though the targets were not divulged to CEP. H27 226 Hershey also stated that its sulfur dioxide (SO2) H27 227 emissions have been reduced significantly. The company explained H27 228 that this was achieved through its energy policy, which uses clean H27 229 burning natural gas as its primary fuel. They further explained, H27 230 that in Hershey's new chocolate facility the company has installed H27 231 new technology in the boilers that reduces nitrogen oxide H27 232 emissions.

H27 233 In 1988, Hershey's plant in Hershey, Pennsylvania emitted H27 234 40,591 pounds of methyl bromide. According to the Toxic Chemical H27 235 Release Inventory of the 1986 Emergency Planning and Community H27 236 Right to Know Act, this chemical is one of many which is considered H27 237 as "acutely toxic, possible carcinogenic, or capable of H27 238 having a significant adverse effect on the environment."

H27 239 WASTE MANAGEMENT

H27 240 Company Policy

H27 241 Hershey stated that their company does have a program for H27 242 reducing wastes generated in manufacturing and it is implemented in H27 243 the following ways: reducing or eliminating the use of H27 244 hazardous/toxic materials by switching to non-hazardous/non-toxic H27 245 materials; reusing or recycling materials; production H27 246 design/engineering changes; recycling of non-spec or substandard H27 247 product and establishing office paper recycling.

H27 248 Hazardous Waste Management

H27 249 In their 1991 Environmental Brochure, Hershey stated that they H27 250 do not handle many materials that are hazardous or toxic, but that H27 251 some amount of chemicals are used in their laboratories and H27 252 manufacturing plants. For disposal of these materials, Hershey H27 253 stated that they are moved by licensed transporters who deliver it H27 254 to waste treatment or disposal facilities. They also stated that H27 255 they are committed to minimizing the use of hazardous and toxic H27 256 materials.

H27 257 Hershey stated that their company does produce chemical, H27 258 nuclear, and biological wastes from laboratory work which require H27 259 special disposal procedures.

H27 260 Hershey stated the amount of hazardous waste (as defined under H27 261 the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act or RCRA - see APPENDIX H27 262 J) they produced for each year between 1987 and 1991 was less than H27 263 20,000 pounds. Hershey did no onsite recycling, incinerating, H27 264 treating or landfilling of the hazardous waste produced last year. H27 265 In terms of offsite efforts, however, the company did recycle 95% H27 266 of the hazardous waste generated and incinerated 5%.

H27 267 Solid Waste Management

H27 268 In their 1991 Environmental Brochure, Hershey stated that they H27 269 "agree" with the following waste reduction and disposal H27 270 techniques (in order of preference) adopted by the EPA: source H27 271 reduction; recycling (including composting of yard waste); H27 272 waste-to-energy conversion; and landfilling.

H27 273 H28 1 <#FROWN:H28\>Faculty Research Leave (Sabbatical H28 2 Leave)

H28 3 APPLICATION DEADLINE: None

H28 4 Faculty members spend their sabbatical leave, typically 9-12 H28 5 months, at the Laboratory. Over 120 appointments have been made H28 6 since the program's inception in 1980.

H28 7 The Faculty Research Leave Program is intended to provide H28 8 mutual benefits to the faculty members and the Laboratory. In H28 9 addition to bringing about fruitful research activity, it should H28 10 give Argonne scientists and engineers and visiting faculty H28 11 opportunities to develop a strengthened rapport and deepened H28 12 appreciation of mutual needs and interests pertaining to research H28 13 development and to catalyze the formation of continuing research H28 14 partnerships and collaborations.

H28 15 Interactions of faculty with students in the research programs H28 16 is strongly encouraged. This can take the form of research H28 17 collaboration as well as more conventional interactions such as H28 18 seminars and teaching. Also, when funding is available, faculty can H28 19 involve qualified student(s) from their home campus in their H28 20 Argonne research program.

H28 21 Appointments will normally be for an academic or a calendar H28 22 year, extendable, if mutually agreed upon by the faculty member, H28 23 the home institution and Argonne. To be eligible for the H28 24 appointment, a faculty member must be in receipt of a H28 25 sabbatical-leave award (or other appropriate award) from his/her H28 26 university, have the approval of the appropriate university H28 27 administrator to accept the Argonne appointment, and have H28 28 demonstrated accomplishment in an area of research and/or H28 29 development relevant to research at Argonne.

H28 30 During his/her Faculty Research Leave appointment, the faculty H28 31 member will remain on the payroll and under the fringe benefits of H28 32 the university. Typically, Argonne will reimburse the university H28 33 for 50% of salary and fringe benefits for the academic-year (9 H28 34 months) and full salary and fringe benefits for the summer period H28 35 (3 months). In addition, the Laboratory may, by direct payment to H28 36 the faculty member, negotiate reimbursement for certain travel, H28 37 moving, and housing expenses.

H28 38 Argonne desires that the expression of interest in Faculty H28 39 Research Leave participation by an individual faculty member, along H28 40 with university endorsement of such participation, be transmitted H28 41 to the Faculty Program Leader, Argonne Division of Educational H28 42 Programs. Initial expressions of interest should include a H28 43 curriculum vitae, a publication list, and a brief statement of the H28 44 research interests of the faculty member. There should also be an H28 45 indication by the responsible university official that the faculty H28 46 member is eligible to receive a sabbatical or other appropriate H28 47 award.

H28 48 GRADUATE STUDENT PROGRAMS

H28 49 Laboratory-Graduate Participantship Appointments

H28 50 Laboratory-Graduate Participantship (Lab-Grad) appointments are H28 51 available for qualified graduate students at U.S. universities who H28 52 wish to carry out their thesis research at Argonne National H28 53 Laboratory under the co-sponsorship of an Argonne staff member and H28 54 a faculty member. The university sets the academic standards and H28 55 awards the degree. In practice, the participation by the faculty H28 56 member varies from full partnership in the research to general H28 57 supervision. The Argonne staff sponsor undertakes to keep the H28 58 faculty sponsor informed about the student's progress and he/she H28 59 attends the thesis defense.

H28 60 Research may be conducted in the basic physical and life H28 61 sciences, mathematics, computer science, and engineering as well as H28 62 in a variety of applied areas relating to conservation, H28 63 environment, fission and fusion energy, and other energy H28 64 technologies.

H28 65 Lab-Grad appointments are for a one-year term with annual H28 66 renewals being contingent upon satisfactory performance by the H28 67 appointee. Appointments usually commence when the student begins H28 68 full-time thesis research at Argonne after having completed all H28 69 other academic requirements. In certain cases students may be H28 70 awarded support for pre-thesis studies on campus, provided that H28 71 they intend to carry out their thesis research at Argonne.

H28 72 Support of a Lab-Grad appointee consists of a stipend, tuition H28 73 payment up to $3,500 per year, and certain travel expenses. In H28 74 addition, the student's faculty sponsor may receive payment for H28 75 limited travel expenses.

H28 76 An application for a Lab-Grad appointment may be submitted at H28 77 any time during the year and an appointment may commence at any H28 78 time. A completed application should be submitted at least one H28 79 month prior to any proposed starting date but earlier application H28 80 submission is advantageous because the availability of Lab-Grad H28 81 appointments is limited by funding constraints.

H28 82 Mutual interest in an area of research by the student and the H28 83 Argonne staff sponsor is essential for the successful arrangement H28 84 of a Lab-Grad appointment. To help the parties gauge their mutual H28 85 interest, a limited number of temporary appointments are available H28 86 for qualified graduate students so that they may work with an H28 87 Argonne staff member and become familiar with his/her research H28 88 program. These temporary appointments have a tenure of three months H28 89 and support consists of a per diem payment to help defray the cost H28 90 of living away from home, plus travel expenses.

H28 91 Thesis-Parts Appointments

H28 92 Thesis-Parts Appointments support qualified graduate students H28 93 who wish to visit Argonne for periods from a few days to a few H28 94 months, so that they may utilize special Laboratory facilities or H28 95 capabilities during the course of their thesis research. Support H28 96 consists of a per diem amount to help defray the cost of living H28 97 away from home, plus transportation. Application is best made H28 98 through an Argonne staff person or research Division appropriate to H28 99 the proposed activity.

H28 100 Guest Graduate Appointments

H28 101 Guest Graduate Appointments are available for qualified H28 102 graduate students who show that access to Argonne National H28 103 Laboratory will be beneficial to their thesis research and to H28 104 Argonne programs. A Guest Graduate is given a gate pass, usually H28 105 for one year, and the student may visit Argonne whenever H28 106 appropriate. A Guest Graduate receives no stipend or payment of any H28 107 kind from the Laboratory.

H28 108 For application materials and further information about any of H28 109 these graduate student programs, or for assistance in identifying H28 110 an appropriate Argonne staff member, write or call:

H28 111 Graduate Student Program Office

H28 112 Division of Educational Programs

H28 113 Argonne National Laboratory

H28 114 Argonne, Illinois 60439-4845

H28 115 (708) 972-3371

H28 116 UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMS

H28 117 The student research programs at Argonne are educational H28 118 experiences designed to provide participants with the opportunity H28 119 to study and carry out research at the frontiers of their fields of H28 120 interest. Participation in the program takes the form of an H28 121 individual collaboration with an Argonne staff member in some part H28 122 of an ongoing project of interest to the student participant.

H28 123 Three programs exist at Argonne in which college/university H28 124 students may obtain research experience. These are the Summer H28 125 Research Participation (SRP) Program, the Science and Engineering H28 126 Research Semester (SERS), and the Graduate Student Thesis Research H28 127 Program. While specific details for SRP and SERS are given below, a H28 128 student will generally spend the first week of his/her Argonne H28 129 experience with an Argonne staff member devising a research H28 130 strategy. For the next few weeks the supervisor will provide H28 131 considerable program assistance and guidance. Subsequently, the H28 132 student will be expected to perform relatively independently and H28 133 complete the project on his/her own initiative. Each student is H28 134 required to submit a mid-term progress report and a final research H28 135 report.

H28 136 To be eligible for SRP or SERS, a student must:

H28 137 <*_>star<*/> have a grade point average of at least 3.0 on a H28 138 4.0 scale, and

H28 139 <*_>star<*/> be a U.S. citizen or permanent resident alien.

H28 140 Selection for any program is based upon a student's academic H28 141 record, statement of interests, and his/her faculty member H28 142 recommendations.

H28 143 Summer Research Participation Program

H28 144 APPLICATION DEADLINE: February 3, 1992

H28 145 The Program:

H28 146 The Summer Research Participation Program extends for an H28 147 eleven-week period which begins in early June and runs through H28 148 mid-August. In addition to their research activities, participants H28 149 are expected to attend a series of seminars and tours dealing with H28 150 current topics in science and engineering.

H28 151 Normally, participants in the summer program must have H28 152 completed their sophomore year and not more than their first year H28 153 of graduate study. While students must generally have matriculated H28 154 status, science or engineering graduates who have been out of H28 155 college for no more than one year will also be considered for the H28 156 program.

H28 157 Financial Assistance:

H28 158 During the appointment period, participants receive a stipend H28 159 of $200/week and complimentary housing or a housing allowance. All H28 160 housing arrangements for single students are handled by Argonne's H28 161 Division of Educational Programs. Transportation expenses are H28 162 reimbursed for one round-trip between the Laboratory and H28 163 the participant's home or university for round-trip distances H28 164 greater than 100 miles. If travel is via personal auto, H28 165 reimbursement is at a rate of 25.5 cents per mile, with the total H28 166 not to exceed coach-class airfare.

H28 167 Application Procedure:

H28 168 An application packet can be obtained by writing or calling:

H28 169 Student Research Programs

H28 170 Division of Educational Programs

H28 171 Argonne National Laboratory

H28 172 Argonne, Illinois 60439-4845

H28 173 (708) 972-4579

H28 174 Once completed, the application form should be returned to the H28 175 above address. The Student Evaluation Forms found in the H28 176 application packet should be given to faculty members with whom the H28 177 applicant has had frequent contact. The faculty member should mail H28 178 the evaluation form directly to the Division of Educational H28 179 Programs. These forms must be returned to complete your application H28 180 file.

H28 181 Science and Engineering Research Semester

H28 182 APPLICATION DEADLINES: 1992 Fall Program - March 15, 1992

H28 183 1993 Spring Program - October 20, 1992

H28 184 The Program:

H28 185 As part of a recent, nationwide Department of Energy H28 186 initiative, the Science and Engineering Research Semester offers H28 187 challenging opportunities for students selected nationally for H28 188 participation in energy-related research during the academic year. H28 189 The program enhances the historic collaboration between the H28 190 university community and the national laboratories and strengthens H28 191 the quality of science, mathematics, and engineering research and H28 192 education.

H28 193 The core of the academic-year SERS Program is the student H28 194 research experience. As such, the student is expected to devote at H28 195 least 35 hours per week to research on a specific project under the H28 196 mentorship of an Argonne staff scientist. In addition to a mid-term H28 197 and final report, each student will also be required to present a H28 198 brief seminar at Argonne on his/her research project.

H28 199 In addition to the research experience, courses which should H28 200 accommodate the needs and interests of a majority of the student H28 201 participants will be available. Information on the specific courses H28 202 to be offered during a particular term can be obtained by writing H28 203 to the Division of Educational Programs or by calling the Argonne H28 204 SERS coordinator at (708) 972-4579.

H28 205 Should a student require a special course not offered as part H28 206 of the regular program, he/she will be allowed to substitute a H28 207 course offered by a regional university. In this case, arrangements H28 208 MUST be made by the student well in advance of his/her stay at H28 209 Argonne. Students whose special needs are not covered by any of the H28 210 above options may arrange with their home campus faculty for H28 211 independent study to be conducted at Argonne under the supervision H28 212 of one of the Argonne staff.

H28 213 In addition to the above activities, Argonne has integrated H28 214 into its program a number of special features and activities. H28 215 During the Fall term, SERS participants have the opportunity to H28 216 attend the Argonne Graduate School Fair in Science and Engineering. H28 217 At this Fair, students have the chance to talk, one-on-one, with H28 218 faculty representatives from some of the finest graduate schools in H28 219 the U.S. On October 5, 1991, we will have over 135 departments H28 220 represented, including: Princeton, Yale, The University of Chicago, H28 221 Georgia Tech, to name a few. In the Spring, a number of the H28 222 program's students are selected for an expense-paid trip to make a H28 223 presentation on their Argonne research at the annual undergraduate H28 224 conference sponsored by the National Council on Undergraduate H28 225 Research. Last year, 18 Argonne students attended the Conference H28 226 held at the California Institute of Technology. In addition to the H28 227 above special activities, many cultural and scientific resources H28 228 exist in the greater Chicago area. Trips to the Aquarium, H28 229 Planetarium, Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory, Art Institute H28 230 of Chicago, Museum of Science and Industry, etc., are also H28 231 available.

H28 232 Academic Credit:

H28 233 Students are encouraged to seek academic credit from their home H28 234 institutions for their SERS experience. Recommended credit is 12-16 H28 235 semester hours or the equivalent; Interdisciplinary Seminar, 1 H28 236 credit; Advanced Course, 3 credits; Research, 8-12 credits. The H28 237 exact number of credits a student receives must be determined by H28 238 the student in consultation with the student's departmental H28 239 chairperson or advisor. DEP is willing to provide whatever H28 240 assistance it can in helping a student arrange for academic H28 241 credit.

H28 242 Periods of Appointment:

H28 243 Appointments are usually for either the Fall or Spring H28 244 Semester. For those students on other types of academic schedules H28 245 (quarter, tri-mester, etc.), adjustments of the beginning and H28 246 ending dates are usually possible. H28 247 H28 248 H29 1 <#FROWN:H29\> P&G in Saudi Arabia:

H29 2 Tapping a Wealth of Talents

H29 3 BACK IN JANUARY 1991, THINGS looked pretty bleak to Ali Abdo. A H29 4 welder at P&G's MIC-Dammam detergent plant in Saudi Arabia, he and H29 5 his family had fled to Yemen, their home country. Yemen's support H29 6 of Iraq during the Persian Gulf crisis prompted an exodus of H29 7 Yemenis from Saudi-Arabia.

H29 8 Beyond providing air tickets for the family, there was little H29 9 anyone at MIC-Dammam could do for Abdo. In Yemen, he fretted about H29 10 his future. Would the Saudi government allow him to return? Would H29 11 he still have his job?

H29 12 With the Gulf War's end and after three months of waiting, Abdo H29 13 and his family were allowed to return to Saudi-Arabia. He was H29 14 elated to find his old job waiting for him at the Dammam plant.

H29 15 Today, reflecting on events, Abdo is clear on one point: H29 16 MIC-Dammam stood by him. "I've heard a lot about the H29 17 Company's principles," he says, "but the war put H29 18 them to the test ... and they worked."

H29 19 The Company's Saudi Arabian joint venture companies are P&G to H29 20 the core, especially concerning principles and employees. Dealing H29 21 with everything from war to labor shortages, the joint ventures H29 22 reach across many borders to attract the best people for building a H29 23 fast-growing, profitable business. Saudi Arabian market shares for H29 24 diapers, detergents and shampoos are the highest in the world. [See H29 25 sidebar on the next page.]

H29 26 P&G's three Saudi joint ventures - Modern Products H29 27 Company-Jeddah, Modern Industries Company-Dammam, Modern Industries H29 28 Company-Jeddah- employ about 1,000 people from 31 nations.

H29 29 This wide diversity is a necessity, since competition for the H29 30 best-educated and trained Saudis is sharp. "Until the oil H29 31 boom of the early '70s, the number of Saudi college graduates was H29 32 very small," says Anand Prasad. A citizen of India, Prasad H29 33 is personnel manager for P&G's Saudi businesses.

H29 34 The kingdom moved quickly to establish universities and trade H29 35 schools, but for now, the number of college and technical school H29 36 graduates is well below the country's needs. Since the potential H29 37 recruits are also attracted to government-sponsored corporations H29 38 such as state oil companies, luring graduates to a consumer H29 39 products company is a further challenge.

H29 40 STAFFING CHALLENGES

H29 41 The joint ventures' personnel goal is for Saudi nationals to H29 42 make up at least half the workforce within a few years. Progress is H29 43 steady: three years ago, only 15 percent of P&G's Saudi Arabian H29 44 workforce were Saudi nationals; today, nearly 27 percent of H29 45 employees are.

H29 46 As the joint ventures' corporate recruiting manager, Haitham H29 47 Alhudhaif creates ways to increase awareness of P&G and its global H29 48 business on Saudi campuses. To capture the interest of the H29 49 brightest students, the joint ventures hold marketing seminars at H29 50 Saudi Arabia's two primary universities, King Fahd University and H29 51 King Abdul Aziz University.

H29 52 Students are responding. Wlid Hajj, a brand assistant on Head H29 53 & Shoulders, was a marketing major at King Fahd University in H29 54 Dhahran when he attended a marketing seminar sponsored by the joint H29 55 ventures. Impressed, he chose MIC-Jeddah because "it has a H29 56 quality of work I couldn't get anywhere else."

H29 57 Amr Kandil, Pampers line manager, is a three-year veteran of H29 58 MPC-Jeddah. A Saudi and a graduate of Riyadh University, he joined H29 59 MPC because "it's an opportunity to learn and work with a H29 60 worldwide company."

H29 61 He sees himself as part of Saudi Arabia's drive to diversify H29 62 its economy from total reliance on oil. "We [Saudis] need H29 63 exposure to other working methods," he says, "and H29 64 P&G is building a strong organization here."

H29 65 While more Saudis are joining the business, the labor and skill H29 66 shortage means that reliance on expatriate managers and technicians H29 67 will continue for the near future. After Saudis, the largest H29 68 nationality groups are from Egypt, Yemen, Sudan, Jordan, India and H29 69 Pakistan.

H29 70 ONLY THE BEST

H29 71 "We recruit only the best," explains Personnel H29 72 Manager Prasad, "to get the best mix of strengths and H29 73 creative skills from different societies and nations."

H29 74 On a language and cultural level, close co-operation H29 75 between the dozens of nationalities is relatively easy. The H29 76 majority of employees come from Arab countries, speak the same H29 77 language (Arabic) and follow the same faith (Islam).

H29 78 Employees work and live in a nation in which Islam serves as H29 79 religious and civil law: Employment is limited to males. Each H29 80 work site has a prayer room facing Mecca. During the holy month of H29 81 Ramadan, work shifts are shortened to six hours to accommodate the H29 82 fasting required of Moslems.

H29 83 Cultural and religious similarities are helpful, but hiring the H29 84 best and creating an environment focused on business results are H29 85 even more important. Consider the MPC-Jeddah plant, which produces H29 86 Pampers, Luvs and Always. In 1991 it won Product Supply's Process H29 87 Reliability Award for having the highest reliability rate of any H29 88 P&G paper plant in the world. Backed with a combination of great H29 89 quality at low cost, Pampers captured a commanding share of the H29 90 Arabian Peninsula diaper market.

H29 91 The foundation of success like this is meticulous attention to H29 92 hiring the right people. The Company is "very H29 93 selective", agrees Abdel Moneim Bashir, a Sudanese who H29 94 works in Paper Product Development. "The Company wants H29 95 wide-minded people."

H29 96 To enable people to focus on "doing the best work H29 97 possible," says Obied Khojah "there's one system, H29 98 balanced and fair" for everyone. It's common for other H29 99 companies to have one pay scale for Saudis and another for foreign H29 100 workers. Not so with P&G's joint ventures, according to Khojah, a H29 101 Saudi and MIC-Jeddah plant personnel manager. Saudis and non-Saudis H29 102 alike have the same opportunities for advancement.

H29 103 "LIKE ONE HAND"

H29 104 Dedicated by King Faisal in 1965, the MIC-Jeddah plant is H29 105 famous throughout Saudi Arabia as the Tide plant. Once the sole H29 106 structure on this stretch of the Mecca road, Jeddah's booming H29 107 growth has engulfed the plant site and placed it in the midst of a H29 108 busy neighborhood.

H29 109 Abdul-Mugni Qasim, a supervisor in the plant's Raw Materials H29 110 section, describes a 'rare' bond of trust between MIC and its H29 111 workers. He knows, for example, that many companies in the Middle H29 112 East depend upon contracted labor and "are quick to fire a H29 113 person for someone cheaper."

H29 114 This is unheard of at the Jeddah plant. Qasim himself is a H29 115 expatriate, a citizen of Yemen whose family has lived in Jeddah for H29 116 nearly three decades. He has worked for MIC-Jeddah for most of his H29 117 work life and now supervises a team of eight that includes six H29 118 nationalities. Nearly 30 years ago, he was part of the construction H29 119 crew that built the plant.

H29 120 Differences in nationality are of no consequence to him. On the H29 121 contrary, he sees his group as an extended family. "If H29 122 someone's wife has a baby, or a relative dies, I live it with H29 123 them."

H29 124 Abdul-Qadir Basher, a Pampers line technician from Sudan, has a H29 125 succinct metaphor to describe how MPC-Jeddah's 18 nationalities H29 126 cooperate: "We work like one hand," with the H29 127 "goal of getting fine products with good H29 128 quality."

H29 129 Lest one get the impression of a workplace utopia, frictions H29 130 due to nationality occasionally arise. "There are H29 131 differences" of cultural styles among Arabs, says Adnan H29 132 Ossailan, a Saudi who works in Quality Control at MPC-Jeddah, which H29 133 can sometimes lead to resentments. The goal is to address problems H29 134 before they grow, explains Mohammad Al-Ghamdi, plant personnel H29 135 manager.

H29 136 MAXIMUM EFFORT

H29 137 With Iraq's invasion of Kuwait in August 1990, the MIC-Dammam H29 138 plant's personnel challenges took on a whole new dimension. H29 139 "People were worried," recalls Fahad Abdul-Karim, H29 140 personnel manager for the detergent plant. "No one knew H29 141 what would happen." Kuwait is only a few hours away by car. H29 142 Helicopters and jets from a nearby Saudi airbase filled the skies. H29 143 Tanks and military trucks clogged the streets.

H29 144 In January, with war imminent, the decision was made to H29 145 evacuate employees and their families to Jeddah and Mecca. Buses H29 146 were impossible to find, making caravans of private cars necessary. H29 147 Fuel, maps, tools and first-aid kits were gathered for the nearly H29 148 1,600-kilometer drive across the desert.

H29 149 One hundred apartments awaited the evacuees in the west. After H29 150 settling in, "we got people working" in the Jeddah H29 151 plants and headquarters, says Abdul-Karim. A group of 40 employees, H29 152 mostly Saudis with roots in the Dhahran region, volunteered to H29 153 continue working at the plant.

H29 154 Among them was Abdullah Abu-Saed, a mechanic. Dammam is his H29 155 family's home, and "I felt it was my duty to stay behind in H29 156 order not to shut down the plant." He and his colleagues H29 157 kept a security watch to handle damage in case the plant was hit by H29 158 one of the Scud missiles that passed over nightly. By the last H29 159 stages of the brief war, the group managed to begin limited H29 160 production at the plant.

H29 161 "As Saudis," says Abu-Saed, "we served H29 162 our country too, because this is a Saudi company."

H29 163 By April, Saudi Arabia's Eastern Provinces were back to a H29 164 semblance of normality, and the Dammam-MIC employees evacuated to H29 165 Jeddah returned to work. No time was lost in reestablishing H29 166 shipments to newly liberated Kuwait. Truckloads of Ariel and Tide H29 167 headed for Kuwait as soon as the roads were reopened. Because of H29 168 this quick action, P&G brand shares in Kuwait are today higher than H29 169 pre-war levels.

H29 170 As the chaos and uncertainty created by the war dissipated, H29 171 MIC-Dammam could evaluate its evacuation as a job well done. H29 172 "We were one of the few - if not the only - companies that H29 173 really took care of its people" in providing transportation H29 174 and living facilities, says Marwan Haddad, Synthetic Detergents H29 175 Operations manager.

H29 176 If there's any question about P&G principles providing a H29 177 competitive edge in Saudi Arabia, Bader Al-Din Hossain, a Customer H29 178 Services coordinator at MIC-Dammam, has an answer. "The H29 179 Company has proven it values us very much. Now I want to give the H29 180 maximum."

H29 181 H29 182 Mastery In Action

H29 183 "Given the current competitive environment, unless we H29 184 continually upgrade our skills and competencies, we'll become H29 185 obsolete both as individuals and as a Company," says Keith H29 186 Lawrence, Industrial Relations Division, who is working on the H29 187 long-term worldwide vision of work systems in Product Supply. There H29 188 has been a growing concern among management for the past several H29 189 years that Procter & Gamble is not building the organization as H29 190 deep as it could, and is losing some of its technical mastery.

H29 191 Technical mastery is profound knowledge and skill used to H29 192 improve business results. It is a continual improvement process H29 193 necessary to remain competitive.

H29 194 The gradual eroding of these technical skills is a result of H29 195 several factors which tended to encourage the development of H29 196 generalists at P&G, more than specialists. But the trend is H29 197 changing.

H29 198 At the November annual meetings, Chairman and Chief Executive H29 199 Ed Artzt outlined six key strategies for P&G's future growth. One H29 200 is organizational development, or said another way, building the H29 201 capacity of people to keep pace with rapid business growth.

H29 202 There are many examples of building, developing and recognizing H29 203 organizational capability, from Advertising to R&D to Finance and H29 204 beyond. All have a common purpose - to help build individuals' H29 205 technical mastery and, in turn, to support the key corporate H29 206 strategy of building the organization.

H29 207 PRODUCT SUPPLY

H29 208 Product Supply is one of the leaders in developing and H29 209 recognizing technical mastery. In fact, the function even H29 210 celebrates technical excellence with the coveted Worldwide H29 211 Technology Achievement Awards.

H29 212 Gary Simpson, Product Supply manager-Laundry & Cleaning H29 213 Products, sees technical mastery as more than just expert H29 214 individual knowledge. It also includes systems mastery.

H29 215 "Think of it as creating a gourmet meal," says H29 216 Simpson. "It takes an expert chef to first create a new H29 217 entree. But he or she can only make one at a time. Now, if the chef H29 218 writes down the recipe, thus creating a system to follow, others H29 219 can then be taught to be technical masters of that entree. The H29 220 result is many more entrees being made from one expert's H29 221 knowledge."

H29 222 This expert/master thinking applies directly to Product H29 223 Supply's strategies. "By creating technical masters, we're H29 224 enhancing the total organization's ability to execute key strategic H29 225 work," says Simpson. Strategy development involves picking H29 226 the critical few things which will make a significant difference in H29 227 building the business. Technical mastery allows us to do those H29 228 right things right - or execute all strategies with excellence. In H29 229 Product Supply, this includes everything from sourcing raw H29 230 materials, to how the plants are run, to improving delivery of H29 231 'perfect orders,' to getting quickly to market with the new H29 232 consumer benefits.

H29 233 H30 1 <#FROWN:H30\>ADMISSION CRITERIA

H30 2 Jacksonville University seeks students with potential to H30 3 contribute to and benefit from the institution's programs. H30 4 Admission decisions are based on:

H30 5 1. The secondary school academic record, including course H30 6 selection, honors or AP classes, grade point average, and class H30 7 rank (where available).

H30 8 2. SAT or ACT test results.

H30 9 3. Extracurricular involvement, leadership record, and evidence H30 10 of special talents or abilities.

H30 11 4. The applicant's writing sample or essay.

H30 12 5. Interviews, when possible.

H30 13 To be considered for admission, students must satisfactorily H30 14 complete, or be in the process of completing, a satisfactory H30 15 college preparatory program. Recommended minimum preparation should H30 16 include 18 academic units, including:

H30 17 1. 4 units of English

H30 18 2. 3 units of Mathematics

H30 19 3. 2 units of Natural Sciences

H30 20 4. 2 units of Foreign Languages

H30 21 5. 2 units of Social Sciences

H30 22 A minimum GPA of 2.5 and class rank in the top half of the H30 23 graduating class is recommended.

H30 24 PROVISIONAL ADMISSION

H30 25 Students whose records do not meet the criteria for admission H30 26 but who show potential to be successful in college, e.g., low SAT H30 27 scores but a good high school record, or vice versa, may be H30 28 admitted to a summer session on a provisional basis. Decisions on H30 29 students admitted on a provisional basis may be made by the H30 30 University Admissions Committee. These students will enroll in the H30 31 appropriate English course, as determined by a placement H30 32 examination, and other three-credit course and a one-credit course H30 33 or a four-credit course, for a total of seven (7) credits. A grade H30 34 of 'C' or better must be earned in each course for the student to H30 35 continue beyond the summer session. Students who meet the H30 36 requirements of the provisional admission will be admitted to H30 37 Jacksonville University as degree candidates. A limit of 30 H30 38 students annually is placed on the number of students to be H30 39 enrolled provisionally.

H30 40 ADMISSION NOTIFICATION

H30 41 REGULAR DECISION PLAN. Consideration of the application will H30 42 follow receipt of all materials, and applicants will be notified on H30 43 a rolling bases as soon as possible after January 1 of the current H30 44 academic year of the decision of the Admissions Office.

H30 45 EARLY DECISION PLAN. Students who declare Jacksonville H30 46 University their first choice college by November 15 and have all H30 47 credentials to Jacksonville University by December 1 will be H30 48 notified of University action on applications by December 25. H30 49 Replies from accepted applicants and deposits will be due by H30 50 January 15. The Early Decision Plan of Jacksonville University is H30 51 intended to serve those students with exceptional high school H30 52 records, rank in class, grade point average, SAT or ACT scores, and H30 53 special potential to contribute to and benefit from Jacksonville H30 54 University.

H30 55 EARLY ADMISSION

H30 56 A gifted student of unusual maturity whose high school record H30 57 shows excellent academic performance through the junior year in a H30 58 college preparatory program, and whose scores on a standardized H30 59 aptitude test are high may submit his application for admission to H30 60 the University for enrollment after the junior year in high school. H30 61 The candidate should have the support of his or her parents in H30 62 writing submitted with the application. A strong recommendation H30 63 from the high school is expected, and the candidate must come to H30 64 the campus for a personal interview with the Director of H30 65 Admissions.

H30 66 DUAL ENROLLMENT

H30 67 The dual enrollment program is designed primarily for high H30 68 school seniors who along with their guidance counselors feel that H30 69 their academic program would be enriched by college-level courses. H30 70 The normal freshman application for admission to Jacksonville H30 71 University is required with the indication that the student is H30 72 applying for dual enrollment. The following supporting data must be H30 73 submitted with the application:

H30 74 1. Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) of the College Board (PSAT H30 75 may be submitted) or the American College Test (ACT).

H30 76 2. High school transcript.

H30 77 3. Guidance Counselor's recommendation including a statement in H30 78 support of allowing the student to attend both high school and H30 79 college at the same time.

H30 80 TRANSFERS APPLICATION PROCESS

H30 81 Transfer applicants must submit:

H30 82 1. Completed application.

H30 83 2. $25.00 application fee (non-refundable).

H30 84 3. Official transcripts of colleges and universities attended, H30 85 sent by the Registrar of each institution.

H30 86 4. High school transcripts if transferring less than 15 H30 87 semester hours of college credit.

H30 88 5. Statement from Dean of Students (or other appropriate H30 89 official) at the last college attended full time, attesting to the H30 90 candidates character and general fitness to continue university H30 91 work.

H30 92 6. Catalog of the institution from which the candidate H30 93 transfers, if requested.

H30 94 7. Medical information/immunization after admission (see H30 95 below).

H30 96 Art students must submit a portfolio.

H30 97 Music, Theatre Arts, and Dance students must audition.

H30 98 TRANSFERS ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

H30 99 A student who wishes to transfer to Jacksonville University H30 100 must:

H30 101 1. Have completed a semester of academic work at an accredited H30 102 college or university at the time of entry, and not be concurrently H30 103 enrolled in high school.

H30 104 2. Be in good standing and eligible to continue or be H30 105 readmitted at the last institution attended, unless all work has H30 106 been completed or the student has graduated from that H30 107 institution.

H30 108 Jacksonville University encourages transfer applications from H30 109 students with cumulative grade point averages of 2.5 or higher but H30 110 will give full consideration to students with averages from 2.0 - H30 111 2.5.

H30 112 Jacksonville University honors academic suspensions of the last H30 113 institution, and credit will not be awarded for work taken during H30 114 the suspension period.

H30 115 It is the responsibility of the candidate to provide the H30 116 Director of Admissions at Jacksonville University with official H30 117 transcripts of work completed from all colleges attended. H30 118 Concealment of previous attendance at a college or university is H30 119 cause for cancellation of admission and registration.

H30 120 TRANSFER OF CREDITS

H30 121 Generally, occupational/vocational college level courses are H30 122 not accepted as transfer credit at Jacksonville University. H30 123 Academic courses completed at institutions which are approved by H30 124 the regional accrediting agency are acceptable in transfer provided H30 125 that they are comparable to courses offered at Jacksonville H30 126 University and were completed with a grade of 'C' or better. In H30 127 order for a course to be comparable, Jacksonville University must H30 128 either list the course in its current catalog or offer a H30 129 significant number of course offerings (minimally, four) within the H30 130 division having primary responsibility for that general area of H30 131 instruction. A limited number of college level courses which are H30 132 not comparable because JU does not offer a minimum of four courses H30 133 in the general area may still be transferred provided these courses H30 134 are not occupational/vocational and meet the other criteria for H30 135 acceptable transfer credit. A maximum of 12 semester hours is H30 136 allowable and these hours can be applied only as elective credit in H30 137 the student's academic program. Transfer credit for nursing courses H30 138 counted toward BSN major requirements must be approved by Nursing H30 139 faculty. Grades recorded as 'P' for Pass, 'CR' for Credit, etc., H30 140 will be transferred only if verification is provided by the H30 141 previous institution's Registrar that the work was completed with a H30 142 'C' or better grade. Students desiring transfer credit for courses H30 143 completed at another institution may be required to provide a copy H30 144 of the Catalog from that institution so that an evaluation of H30 145 transfer credit may be made. Credit may also be granted for Federal H30 146 Aviation Administration Aviation Certificates if the holder is H30 147 enrolled in one of the Flight programs.

H30 148 Any work transferred to Jacksonville University will be entered H30 149 on the Jacksonville University transcript as hours earned only and H30 150 will not be used in computation of the grade-point average.

H30 151 A maximum of 64 semester hours of credit will be accepted from H30 152 junior colleges; junior college credit will not be accepted after a H30 153 student has accumulated 64 semester hour credits.

H30 154 The final 30 semester hours toward a bachelor's degree must be H30 155 completed at Jacksonville University.

H30 156 Limited or provisional credit also may be accepted from H30 157 specialized or special purpose institutions, including the United H30 158 States Armed Services, provided the work is applicable to our H30 159 baccalaureate degree programs and is recommended in appropriate H30 160 publications of the American Council on Education. For further H30 161 information see 'Credit for Military Service.'

H30 162 INTERNATIONAL ADMISSION

H30 163 International students must meet the same requirements as H30 164 freshmen or transfer candidates, as the case warrants, with the H30 165 following additions:

H30 166 1. Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL): A minimum H30 167 score of 550 is required in all cases for further consideration.

H30 168 2. Documentation: Certified copies of academic records must be H30 169 accompanied by English translations where necessary.

H30 170 3. International Student Form and Financial Guarantee is H30 171 required.

H30 172 4. Submission of Application: Due to immigration regulations H30 173 and issuance of the student visa, the student's completed H30 174 application and all supporting papers must be submitted no later H30 175 than 60 days prior to registration.

H30 176 The Experiment in International Living (English as a H30 177 Second Language Program). International Students of English H30 178 (ISE), a program conducted on the Jacksonville University campus by H30 179 the Experiment in International Living, is an English language and H30 180 orientation program designed to prepare students to study, work or H30 181 travel in the United States. Eight and four-week programs are H30 182 offered each calendar year, and students may enroll in successive H30 183 sessions until they reach the desired proficiency.

H30 184 English Language Examinations. The ISE program uses H30 185 the Michigan English Language Placement Test at the beginning and H30 186 end of each course to measure progress. The test of English as a H30 187 Foreign Language (Institutional TOEFL) is also administered by the H30 188 Experiment at the end of each course. Persons who are interested in H30 189 applying for admission to the language program or who wish to take H30 190 the examination would contact the Director, ISE, Jacksonville H30 191 University.

H30 192 MEDICAL INFORMATION/IMMUNIZATION

H30 193 As a prerequisite to registration, Jacksonville University H30 194 requires that all new students born after 1956 present documented H30 195 proof of immunity of measles. A licensed physician or H30 196 representative of a medical clinic must sign the form provided by H30 197 the University.

H30 198 Students who will live in University operated residence halls H30 199 must also submit the STUDENT MEDICAL RECORD completed and signed by H30 200 a licensed physician.

H30 201 TRANSIENT STUDENTS

H30 202 A student who is a degree candidate at another institution and H30 203 who wishes to attend one term at Jacksonville University for H30 204 transfer credit should apply to the Director of Admissions. Such a H30 205 student may arrange with his/her Registrar to submit a letter of H30 206 good standing to Jacksonville University. This letter serves as a H30 207 substitute for the transcript required from other students. Such a H30 208 student is admitted as a transient student. A transient student who H30 209 decides to become a degree candidate at Jacksonville University H30 210 must reapply for admission and meet the requirements for a transfer H30 211 admission.

H30 212 READMISSION

H30 213 A former Jacksonville University student who was not enrolled H30 214 at this University during the most recent fall or spring semester H30 215 must apply for readmission through the Registrar's Office. H30 216 Applications for readmission must be submitted as early as H30 217 possible, but at least two months prior to registration for the H30 218 term in which the student wishes to enroll.

H30 219 The following policies apply to the readmission of H30 220 undergraduate degree candidates:

H30 221 1. If enrolled at another institution during the period since H30 222 last enrolled at this University, an official transcript of all H30 223 courses attempted must be submitted to the Registrar's Office.

H30 224 2. No undergraduate degree candidate who has attended another H30 225 institution since leaving this University will be readmitted unless H30 226 an official transcript from that institution is received in H30 227 sufficient time to permit evaluation prior to registration.

H30 228 Students who have a bachelor's or higher degree must have an H30 229 official transcript on file in the Registrar' Office which shows H30 230 the degree(s) earned. Such students need not submit transcripts of H30 231 subsequent course work taken elsewhere unless they are degree H30 232 candidates at this University. Degree candidates must have copies H30 233 of all transcripts on file.

H30 234 A student who terminates enrollment at Jacksonville University H30 235 while in a probationary or suspended status and who subsequently H30 236 completes course work at another institution prior to being H30 237 readmitted does so at the student's own risk. Such course work will H30 238 be used in determining whether or not to readmit the student. If H30 239 the decision is made to readmit the student, appropriate transfer H30 240 credits will be awarded at the time of readmission. In the case of H30 241 a suspended student, transfer credit will not be awarded for course H30 242 work completed during the period of suspension from Jacksonville H30 243 University.

H30 244 ENROLLMENT DEPOSIT

H30 245 Upon notification of acceptance, all new non-boarding students H30 246 are required to pay a $100 tuition deposit. This is a H30 247 non-refundable deposit. H30 248 H31 1 H32 1 H33 1 H34 1 H35 1